Panasonic | DMCTZ100EB | Operating instructions | Panasonic DMCTZ100EB Operating Instructions

Panasonic DMCTZ100EB Operating Instructions
Operating Instructions
for advanced features
Digital Camera
Model No.
DMC-TZ100/DMC-TZ101
DMC-TZ80/DMC-TZ81
DMC-TZ100/DMC-TZ101
DMC-TZ80/DMC-TZ81
Please read these instructions carefully before using this product,
and save this manual for future use.
Message Display
→375
Q&A Troubleshooting
→383
Finding the information you need
→2
Contents
→5
Contents by Function
→13
Menu list
→379
SQW0550
M0216KZ0
Finding the information you need
In this “Operating Instructions for advanced features”, you can find the information you
need from the following pages.
By clicking a page number, you can jump to the linked page and quickly find the
information.
Search from “Contents”
5-
Search from the list of function
names
13 -
“Contents by Function”
Search from “Names and
Functions of Main Parts”
19 -
Search from “List of monitor/
viewfinder displays”
363 -
Search from the list of
on-screen messages
375 -
Search from the menu list
379 -
“Message displays”
DMC-TZ100/DMC-TZ101
“Menu list”
[Rec]............................. 379
[Motion Picture]............ 380
[Custom]....................... 381
[Setup] ......................... 382
[Playback]..................... 382
Search from “Q&A
Troubleshooting”
DMC-TZ80/DMC-TZ81
For details on how to use this manual,
see the next page.
®
Wi-Fi function
2
383 -
→301
SQW0550
How to use this manual
Recording mode icons
Recording mode:
In Recording modes that show icons in black, you can select and execute indicated
menus and functions.
••Click a cross reference in the text to jump to the corresponding page.
■■About the models
••This manual provides instructions for DMC-TZ100/DMC-TZ101 and
DMC-TZ80/DMC-TZ81.
••Screens shown in this manual are from the DMC-TZ100/DMC-TZ101 unless
otherwise indicated.
••Functions vary by model. When reviewing the manual, be aware that model numbers
corresponding to each function will appear as below.
Model number
How it appears in the manual
DMC-TZ100/DMC-TZ101
DMC-TZ80/DMC-TZ81
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Click this icon to jump to “Finding the information you need”.
Click this icon to jump to “Contents”.
Click this icon to jump to “Menu list”.
Click this icon to return to the previously displayed page.
3
SQW0550
How to use this manual
■■About the symbols in the text
Indicates that the menu can be set by pressing [MENU/SET] button.
Indicates that the Wi-Fi setting can be made by pressing [Wi-Fi] button.
Configurations that can be performed in the [Custom] menu.
Tips for skilful use and points for recording.
(→00)
Indicates the reference page. Click to go to the corresponding page.
Click to view the description on the next page.
In this Operating Instructions, steps for setting a menu item are described as follows:
→
[Rec] → [Quality] → [ ]
••In this manual, ring, dial and lever operations are illustrated as below.
Turn the control ring
TZ100/TZ101 Rotate the rear dial
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial
Rotate the zoom lever
4
SQW0550
Contents
■■Finding the information you need...... 2
■■How to use this manual....................... 3
■■Contents by Function........................ 13
Before Use
■■Before use.......................................... 16
■■Standard Accessories....................... 18
■■ TZ100/TZ101
Names and Functions
of Main Parts...................................... 19
■■ TZ80/TZ81 Names and Functions
of Main Parts...................................... 21
Preparations
■■Attaching the Hand Strap.................. 23
TZ100/TZ101 Attaching the Shoulder Strap
adaptor.......................................................23
■■Charging battery................................ 25
TZ100/TZ101 Inserting the battery.................26
TZ80/TZ81 Inserting the battery.................27
TZ100/TZ101 Charging the battery.................28
TZ80/TZ81
■■ TZ100/TZ101
■■About the Card................................... 37
Formatting the card (initialisation)..............38
Estimated recording capacity
(number of pictures/recording time)............39
■■Setting the clock................................ 42
Changing time settings...............................43
Charging the battery.................29
Inserting and
removing the card (optional)............ 35
■■ TZ80/TZ81 Inserting and
removing the card (optional)............ 36
5
SQW0550
Contents
Basics
■■Holding the camera............................ 44
■■Buttons/Dials/Levers
Used for Recording............................ 45
Zoom Lever (Use Zoom)............................45
Shutter button (Taking pictures)..................46
Motion picture button
(Recording motion pictures).......................48
Mode dial (Select the recording mode).......49
TZ100/TZ101 Control ring / Rear dial.............50
TZ80/TZ81 Control ring / Control dial.........51
Cursor button / [MENU/SET] button
(Selecting/setting items).............................52
[DISP.] button
(Switching the display information).............53
[LVF] button
(Recording pictures using the viewfinder)....58
■■Touch screen (Touch operations).... 61
Touching the screen and recording
(Touch Shutter function).............................63
Easily Optimising the Brightness for a
Specified Area ([Touch AE])........................64
■■Setting the menu................................ 65
How to set the menu...................................65
■■Calling frequently-used menus
instantly (Quick Menu)..................... 68
TZ100/TZ101 Change the Quick Menu to
your preferred item.....................................69
■■Assigning frequently used
functions to the buttons
(Function buttons)............................. 70
Using the function buttons during
recording.....................................................71
Using the function buttons during
playback.....................................................73
6
■■ TZ100/TZ101
Changing the settings
assigned to the control ring/
rear dial............................................... 74
■■ TZ80/TZ81 Changing the settings
assigned to the control ring/
control dial.......................................... 75
■■Using the [Setup] menu..................... 76
[Online Manual]..........................................76
[Clock Set]..................................................76
[World Time]................................................76
[Travel Date]...............................................77
[Wi-Fi].........................................................77
[Beep].........................................................78
[Live View Mode]........................................78
[Monitor Display] / [Viewfinder]...................79
[Monitor Luminance]...................................80
[Economy]...................................................81
[USB Mode]................................................82
[TV Connection]..........................................82
[Menu Resume]..........................................84
[Menu Background]....................................84
[Menu Information]......................................84
[Language]..................................................84
[Version Disp.]............................................85
[Exposure Comp. Reset]............................85
[Self Timer Auto Off]....................................85
[No.Reset]...................................................85
[Reset]........................................................86
[Reset Wi-Fi Settings].................................86
[Demo Mode]..............................................86
[Format]......................................................86
■■Entering Text...................................... 87
SQW0550
Contents
Recording mode
■■Taking pictures with
automatic settings
(Intelligent Auto Mode)...................... 88
Taking pictures using a handheld camera
([iHandheld Night Shot]).............................91
Combining pictures into a single still
picture with rich gradation ([iHDR]).............92
Defocusing the background
(Defocus control function)...........................93
Recording images by changing the
brightness (exposure) or colour tone..........94
About Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and
Intelligent Auto Mode..................................95
■■Taking pictures after
automatically setting the aperture
value and shutter speed
(Programme AE Mode)...................... 97
■■Taking pictures by setting the
aperture value and shutter speed... 100
Taking pictures by setting the aperture
value (Aperture-Priority AE Mode)............101
Taking pictures by setting the shutter
speed (Shutter-Priority AE Mode).............102
Taking pictures by setting the
aperture value and shutter speed
(Manual Exposure Mode).........................103
Checking the effects of the aperture value
and shutter speed (Preview Mode)...........106
Easily set aperture / shutter speed for
suitable exposure (One Push AE)............108
7
■■Recording panorama pictures
(Panorama Shot Mode).................... 109
■■Taking pictures according to the
scene (Scene Guide Mode)............ 112
■■Taking Pictures with
different picture effects
(Creative Control Mode).................. 117
■■Recording motion pictures by setting
the aperture value/shutter speed
(Creative Video Mode)..................... 124
Recording Slow Motion Pictures
([High Speed Video])................................125
Minimising operational sounds during
motion picture recording...........................126
■■Registering your own
settings and recording
(Custom Mode)................................. 127
Registering your own settings
([Cust.Set Mem.]).....................................127
Recording using registered custom set....128
SQW0550
Contents
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
■■Adjusting the picture quality with
effects [Photo Style]....................... 129
■■Taking pictures using picture effects
[Filter Settings]................................. 131
■■ TZ100/TZ101 Adjusting highlights
and shadows
[Highlight Shadow].......................... 133
■■Adjusting the White Balance.......... 134
■■Setting the picture quality
and size............................................. 139
Changing the aspect ratio of the
still pictures...............................................139
Setting the picture size.............................139
Setting the compression rate of pictures
([Quality])..................................................140
■■Using the picture correction
functions effectively........................ 142
Correcting contrast and exposure
([i.Dynamic]).............................................142
Enhancing the impression of
high-resolution ([i.Resolution])..................142
Combining still pictures with different
exposures ([HDR])....................................143
TZ100/TZ101 Suppressing the noise of
a long exposure ([Long Shtr NR]).............144
Raising the resolution when the aperture
is closed ([Diffraction Compensation])......144
TZ100/TZ101 Setting the colour space.........145
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
■■Taking pictures with Auto Focus.... 146
Set the focusing operation to be
performed when the shutter button is
pressed halfway (AFS, AFF, AFC)............148
Switching [AF Mode].................................149
Changing the position and size of the
AF area.....................................................156
Setting the AF area position with the
touch pad..................................................161
Optimising the focus and brightness
for a touched position...............................162
Setting your preferred focusing
method......................................................163
■■Taking close-up pictures
(Macro recording)............................ 165
■■Taking pictures with
■■ TZ100/TZ101
Taking pictures by
locking the focus and/or exposure
(AF/AE Lock).................................... 173
■■ TZ80/TZ81 Taking pictures by
locking the focus and/or exposure
(AF/AE Lock).................................... 175
■■Taking pictures with Exposure
Compensation.................................. 177
■■Setting the ISO Sensitivity.............. 179
Setting the upper limit of ISO Sensitivity....181
Setting the incremental value of
ISO Sensitivity..........................................181
Extending the ISO Sensitivity setting........182
■■Setting the metering mode.............. 183
Manual Focus................................... 167
Quickly adjusting the focus using
Auto Focus...............................................170
8
SQW0550
Contents
Recording 4K Photos
■■Recording 4K Photos...................... 184
Recording with [4K Burst].........................187
Recording with [4K Burst(S/S)].................188
Recording with [4K Pre-Burst]..................189
Selecting pictures from 4K burst file
and saving................................................190
Notes on the 4K Photo function................196
Shutter and Drive Settings
■■Setting the Shutter Type.................. 199
■■Selecting a Drive Mode.................... 201
■■Burst function.................................. 202
■■Recording while exposure is
changed automatically
[Auto Bracket].................................. 206
■■Taking pictures with self-timer....... 208
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
■■Saving a picture by selecting a
focus point after recording
[Post Focus]..................................... 210
Recording using [Post Focus]...................210
Select the focus point and save the
picture.......................................................214
■■Taking pictures automatically
at set intervals
[Time Lapse Shot]............................ 216
■■Creating stop motion animation
[Stop Motion Animation]................. 219
■■ TZ100/TZ101 Performing multiple
exposures for a single picture
[Multi Exp.]........................................ 223
■■Disabling the beeps and
flash at the same time
[Silent Mode].................................... 225
■■Recording with the
Face Recognition function
[Face Recog.]................................... 226
■■Setting the profile for a baby
or pet to record in a picture............ 229
■■Displaying the appropriate
screen for specific recording
conditions......................................... 230
■■ TZ100/TZ101 Recording while
monitoring camera images............. 232
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
■■Correcting jitter................................ 234
■■Using Zoom...................................... 236
Zoom types and use.................................236
Using the zoom by performing touch
operations (Touch zoom)..........................240
■■Taking pictures with flash............... 241
9
■■Setting the Flash Functions............ 243
Changing Flash Mode..............................243
TZ100/TZ101 Setting the 2nd curtain
sync..........................................................249
Adjusting the flash output.........................250
SQW0550
Contents
Recording motion pictures
■■Recording motion pictures............. 251
Recording 4K motion pictures..................254
Setting the format, picture size and
recording frame rate.................................255
Adjusting the focus while recording
motion pictures ([Continuous AF])............257
■■Recording pans with little
vibration or recording motion
pictures with zoom
[4K Live Cropping]........................... 258
■■Taking still pictures while a motion
picture is being recorded................ 261
■■Recording Snap Movies.................. 262
Setting up [Pull Focus]..............................264
■■Using the [Motion Picture] menu.... 265
[4K Live Cropping]....................................265
[Snap Movie].............................................265
[Rec Format].............................................265
[Rec Quality].............................................265
[Exposure Mode]......................................265
[High Speed Video]...................................265
[Continuous AF]........................................266
[Level Shot]...............................................266
[Flkr Decrease].........................................266
[Silent Operation]......................................266
[Wind Noise Canceller].............................267
[Zoom Mic]................................................267
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
■■Viewing your pictures...................... 268
■■Viewing motion pictures................. 270
Capturing still pictures from motion
pictures.....................................................271
■■Switching the Playback Method..... 272
Zooming in and viewing
“Playback Zoom”......................................272
Viewing a list of pictures
“Multi Playback”........................................273
Viewing pictures by their recording date
“Calendar Playback”.................................274
Viewing group pictures.............................275
■■Deleting pictures.............................. 277
10
■■Using the [Playback] menu............. 279
[Slide Show]..............................................280
[Playback Mode].......................................281
[Location Logging]....................................283
TZ100/TZ101 [RAW Processing]..................284
[Light Composition]...................................287
[Clear Retouch].........................................289
[Title Edit]..................................................290
[Text Stamp]..............................................291
[Video Divide]............................................292
[Time Lapse Video]...................................293
[Stop Motion Video]..................................293
[Resize].....................................................294
[Cropping].................................................295
[Rotate] / [Rotate Disp.]............................296
[Favorite]...................................................297
[Print Set]..................................................298
[Protect]....................................................299
[Face Rec Edit].........................................299
[Picture Sort].............................................300
SQW0550
Contents
Wi-Fi
■■What you can do with the
Wi-Fi® function................................. 301
■■Wi-Fi Function.................................. 302
■■Operating the camera by
connecting it to a smartphone........ 305
Installing the smartphone/tablet app
“Panasonic Image App”............................305
Connecting to a smartphone....................306
Taking pictures via a smartphone
(remote recording)....................................312
Playing back pictures in the camera on
a smartphone............................................313
Saving pictures in the camera to a
smartphone...............................................313
Sending pictures in the camera to
social networking services........................314
Adding location information to pictures
in the camera from a smartphone.............314
Combining motion pictures recorded
with Snap Movie according to your
preference on a smartphone....................316
■■Displaying still pictures on a TV..... 318
■■Sending pictures.............................. 319
■■Sending pictures to a
smartphone...................................... 322
■■Wireless printing.............................. 323
■■Sending pictures to AV device........ 324
■■Sending pictures to a PC................ 325
■■Using WEB services........................ 327
When sending images to WEB service....327
When sending images to
[Cloud Sync. Service]...............................331
■■Using “LUMIX CLUB”...................... 332
About the [LUMIX CLUB]..........................332
■■About connections.......................... 337
Connecting via a wireless access point
([Via Network])..........................................338
Connecting directly ([Direct])....................341
Connecting quickly with the same
settings as used previously
([Select a destination from History] /
[Select a destination from Favorite]).........342
■■[Wi-Fi Setup]..................................... 344
Connecting with other devices
■■Enjoying 4K motion pictures.......... 346
Viewing 4K motion pictures......................346
Storing 4K motion pictures.......................347
■■Viewing on TV screen...................... 348
VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™).....350
■■Storing recorded still pictures
and motion pictures on your PC.... 352
Downloading software..............................353
Copying still pictures and motion
pictures.....................................................355
11
■■Storing recorded still pictures and
motion pictures in the recorder...... 357
Copying by inserting the card into the
recorder....................................................357
■■Printing............................................. 358
Printing multiple pictures..........................359
Printing with date and text........................360
Making print settings on the camera.........361
SQW0550
Contents
Others
■■Optional accessories....................... 362
Using the AC adaptor (optional)
and DC coupler (optional) instead
of the battery.............................................362
■■ TZ100/TZ101
List of monitor/
viewfinder displays.......................... 363
■■ TZ80/TZ81 List of monitor/
viewfinder displays.......................... 369
12
■■Message displays............................ 375
■■Menu list........................................... 379
■■Q&A Troubleshooting..................... 383
■■Usage cautions and notes.............. 398
SQW0550
Contents by Function
Recording
Recording
Recording mode............................................49
[Preview]......................................................106
Panorama Shot Mode..................................109
Macro recording...........................................165
[4K PHOTO]................................................184
[Post Focus].................................................210
[Time Lapse Shot]........................................216
[Stop Motion Animation]...............................219
TZ100/TZ101
[Multi Exp.]...................................................223
[Silent Mode]................................................225
Focus (AF/MF)
Focus Mode.................................................146
AF Mode......................................................149
Adjusting the AF area position.....................156
Manual Focus..............................................167
AF/AE Lock..........................................173, 175
Drive
Drive Mode..................................................201
[Self Timer]..................................................208
Exposure
[Touch AE].....................................................64
[One Push AE].............................................108
AF/AE Lock..........................................173, 175
Exposure Compensation.............................177
ISO sensitivity..............................................179
[Metering Mode]...........................................183
[Auto Bracket]..............................................206
Picture Quality and Colour Tone
[Photo Style]................................................129
[Filter Settings].............................................131
TZ100/TZ101
[Highlight Shadow].......................................133
White Balance.............................................134
[Picture Size]...............................................139
[Quality].......................................................140
[i.Dynamic]...................................................142
[i.Resolution]................................................142
[HDR]...........................................................143
TZ100/TZ101
[Long Shtr NR].............................................144
[Diffraction Compensation]..........................144
TZ100/TZ101
[Color Space]...............................................145
Flash
[Flash Mode]................................................243
TZ100/TZ101
2nd curtain synchro.....................................249
[Flash Adjust.]..............................................250
Monitoring
TZ100/TZ101
Recording while monitoring camera
images.........................................................232
Motion Picture
Motion Picture
Creative Video Mode...................................124
[High Speed Video]......................................125
[Silent Operation].........................................126
Motion pictures in 4K...................................254
[Rec Format]................................................255
[Rec Quality]................................................255
[4K Live Cropping].......................................258
Taking still pictures while a motion picture
is being recorded.........................................261
[Snap Movie]................................................262
13
Audio
[Wind Noise Canceller]................................267
Screen settings
[Zebra Pattern].............................................230
[Monochrome Live View].............................231
SQW0550
Contents by Function
Setup/Custom
Basic settings
[Format].........................................................38
[Clock Set].....................................................42
Display switching.....................................53, 57
Diopter adjustment........................................60
How to set menu items..................................65
[Q.MENU]......................................................68
[Beep]............................................................78
[Economy]......................................................81
[Reset] (initialisation).....................................86
Customisation
TZ100/TZ101
[CUSTOM] in the Quick Menu.......................69
Function buttons............................................70
Custom Mode..............................................127
[Custom] menu............................................381
Playback
Playback
[Auto Review]................................................47
Picture playback..........................................268
Motion picture playback...............................270
Playback Zoom............................................272
Multi Playback.............................................273
Delete..........................................................277
Display/playback settings
[Slide Show].................................................280
[Rotate]/[Rotate Disp.].................................296
Adding information
[Location Logging].......................................283
[Title Edit].....................................................290
[Text Stamp].................................................291
Image settings
[Favorite]......................................................297
[Print Set].....................................................298
[Protect].......................................................299
Edit
TZ100/TZ101
[RAW Processing]........................................284
[Light Composition]......................................287
[Clear Retouch]............................................289
[Resize]........................................................294
[Cropping]....................................................295
14
SQW0550
Contents by Function
Wi-Fi
Connect
“Image App”.................................................305
[WPS (Push-Button)]...........................338, 341
Direct connection.........................................341
Image App
Remote recording........................................312
Saving images.............................................313
Sending images...................................314, 322
Sending and adding location information....314
Combining motion pictures recorded with
[Snap Movie]................................................316
In combination with other devices
Playing back pictures on a TV.....................318
Printing images............................................323
Sending images to an AV device.................324
Sending images to a PC..............................325
Sending images to a WEB service..............327
Using [Cloud Sync. Service]........................331
Connecting with other devices
PC
Transferring images to a PC........................352
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”...................................353
SILKYPIX.....................................................354
TV
Recorder
Dubbing.......................................................357
Printer
PictBridge....................................................358
Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen........348
[VIERA Link]................................................350
15
SQW0550
Before Use
Before use
■■Camera handling
Keep the camera away from excessive vibration, force, or
pressure.
●●Avoid using the camera under the following conditions, which
may damage the lens, monitor, viewfinder, or camera body.
This may also cause the camera to malfunction or prevent
recording.
••Dropping or hitting the camera against a hard surface
••Sitting down with the camera in your pants pocket or forcing it
into a full bag
••Adding accessories to the camera strap
••Pushing with excessive force on the lens or monitor
The camera is not dust resistant, splash resistant, or
waterproof.
Avoid using the camera in places with excessive dust or
sand, or where water can come into contact with the camera.
●●Avoid using the camera under the following conditions, which
present a risk that sand, water, or foreign material may enter
the camera through the lens or openings around buttons. Be
especially careful because these conditions may damage the
camera, and such damage may not be repairable.
••In extremely dusty or sandy places
••In the rain or by the shore, where the camera may be exposed
to water
■■Condensation (When the lens, the monitor, or viewfinder, is fogged up)
●●Condensation may occur when the camera is exposed to sudden changes of
temperature or humidity. Avoid these conditions, which may make the lens, monitor,
or viewfinder, dirty, cause mould, or damage the camera.
●●If condensation does occur, turn off the camera and wait about two hours before
using it. Once the camera adjusts to the surrounding temperature, the fogging will
clear naturally.
16
SQW0550
Before Use
Before use
■■Always take a test shot first
Before important events when you will use the camera (at weddings, for example),
always take a test shot to make sure that pictures and sound record correctly.
■■No compensation for missed shots
We cannot compensate for missed shots if technical problems with the camera or card
prevent recording.
■■Carefully observe copyright laws
Unauthorised use of recordings that contain works with copyright for purposes other
than personal use is prohibited under copyright law. Recording of certain material may
be restricted even for the purpose of personal use.
■■Also refer to “Usage cautions and notes” (→398)
■■Before using the camera, make sure all accessories specified in the attached
“Basic Operating Instructions” are supplied.
For details on optional accessories (→362)
17
SQW0550
Before Use
Standard Accessories
Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.
●●The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
For details on the accessories, refer to “Basic Operating Instructions”.
●●Battery Pack is indicated as battery pack or battery in the text.
●●SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are indicated as card
in the text.
●●Please dispose of all packaging appropriately.
●●Keep small parts in a safe place out of the reach of children.
■■Optional accessories
••Cards are optional.
18
SQW0550
Before Use
Names and Functions of Main Parts
TZ100/TZ101
1
2
3
7
8
9
10
4
5
6
11
16
12
15
14
13
1 Shutter button (→46)
12 Strap eyelet (→23)
2 Zoom lever (→45)
13 Control ring (→50)
3 Motion picture button (→48)
4 Mode dial (→49)
Use this to select the recording mode.
5 Camera [ON/OFF] switch (→42)
6 Rear dial (→50)
7 Flash (→241)
Allows you to zoom and adjust settings
when recording.
14 Lens barrel
15 Lens
16 Self-timer indicator (→208) /
AF Assist Lamp (→164)
8 Viewfinder (→58)
9 Diopter adjustment dial (→60)
10 Eye sensor (→58, 60)
11 Stereo microphone (→44)
Be careful not to cover the microphone
with your finger. Doing so may make
sound difficult to record.
19
SQW0550
Before Use
TZ100/TZ101
Names and Functions of Main Parts
20
23
21
24
25
17 18 19
12
26
27
22
28
29
30
31
32
33 34 35
12 Strap eyelet (→23)
30 Touch screen (→61) / monitor (→363)
17 [LVF] button (→58) /
31 Speaker (→44)
[Fn4] button (→70)
18 Flash open lever (→241)
The flash opens, and recording with the
flash becomes possible.
19 [AF/AE LOCK] button (→173)
20 Charging lamp (→30) /
Wi-Fi® connection lamp (→302)
21 [
] ([Post Focus]) button (→210) /
[Fn2] button (→70)
22 [Q.MENU/ ] (Cancel) button (→68) /
[ ] (Delete) button (→277) /
[Fn3] button (→70)
23 [
] (4K photo mode) button (→184) /
[Fn1] button (→70)
24 [
] (Playback) button (→268)
25 Cursor button (→52)
[ ] (Exposure compensation) ( )
(→177)
[ ] (White Balance) ( ) (→134)
] (Drive Mode) ( ) (→201)
[
[ ] (Focus Mode) ( ) (→146, 165, 167)
Be careful not to cover the speaker with
your finger. Doing so may make sound
difficult to hear.
32 Tripod mount (→401)
Do not attach this unit to tripods that
have screws with a length of 5.5 mm
(0.22 inch) or more. Doing so may
damage this unit or the unit may not be
secured properly on the tripod.
33 DC coupler cover (→362)
When using an AC adaptor, ensure that
the Panasonic DC coupler (optional) and
AC adaptor (optional) are used.
34 Release lever (→26)
35 Card/Battery door (→26)
■■Function buttons [Fn5] to [Fn9]
••Buttons [Fn5] to [Fn9] (→70) are
touch icons. They can be displayed by
touching the [ ] tab on the recording
screen.
26 [MENU/SET] button (→52)
27 [DISP.] button (→53)
Use this to change display.
28 [HDMI] socket (→348)
29 [CHARGE] socket (→28)
20
SQW0550
Before Use
Names and Functions of Main Parts
TZ80/TZ81
1
2
3
7
6
8
9
4
5
15
10
16
11
14
13
12
1 Shutter button (→46)
10 Strap eyelet (→23)
2 Zoom lever (→45)
11 Speaker (→44)
3 Motion picture button (→48)
4 Mode dial (→49)
Use this to select the recording mode.
5 Camera [ON/OFF] button (→42)
6 Stereo microphone (→44)
Be careful not to cover the microphone
with your finger. Doing so may make
sound difficult to record.
7 Viewfinder (→58)
8 Diopter adjustment dial (→60)
9 Eye sensor (→58, 60)
21
Be careful not to cover the speaker with
your finger. Doing so may make sound
difficult to hear.
12 Control ring (→51)
Allows you to zoom and adjust settings
when recording.
13 Lens barrel
14 Lens
15 Flash (→241)
16 Self-timer indicator (→208) /
AF Assist Lamp (→164)
SQW0550
Before Use
TZ80/TZ81
Names and Functions of Main Parts
17
22
18
19
10
23
24
20
25
26
21
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
10 Strap eyelet (→23)
29 Touch screen (→61) / monitor (→369)
17 [LVF] button (→58) /
[Fn4] button (→70)
30 Tripod mount (→401)
18 Charging lamp (→30) /
Wi-Fi® connection lamp (→302)
19 [
] ([Post Focus]) button (→210) /
[Fn2] button (→70)
20 Control dial (→51)
21 [Q.MENU/ ] (Cancel) button (→68) /
[ ] (Delete) button (→277) /
[Fn3] button (→70)
22 [
] (4K photo mode) button (→184) /
[Fn1] button (→70)
23 [
] (Playback) button (→268)
24 Cursor button (→52)
[ ] (Exposure compensation) ( )
(→177)
[ ] (Flash) ( ) (→244)
] (Drive Mode) ( ) (→201)
[
[ ] (Focus Mode) ( ) (→146, 165, 167)
Do not attach this unit to tripods that
have screws with a length of 5.5 mm
(0.22 inch) or more. Doing so may
damage this unit or the unit may not be
secured properly on the tripod.
31 DC coupler cover (→362)
When using an AC adaptor, ensure that
the Panasonic DC coupler (optional) and
AC adaptor (optional) are used.
32 Release lever (→27)
33 Card/Battery door (→27)
■■Function buttons [Fn5] to [Fn9]
••Buttons [Fn5] to [Fn9] (→70) are
touch icons. They can be displayed by
touching the [ ] tab on the recording
screen.
25 [MENU/SET] button (→52)
26 [DISP.] button (→53)
Use this to change display.
27 [HDMI] socket (→348)
28 [CHARGE] socket (→29)
22
SQW0550
Preparations
Attaching the Hand Strap
We recommend attaching the hand strap when using the camera to prevent it from
dropping.
TZ100/TZ101
TZ100/TZ101
Strap eyelet
TZ80/TZ81
Strap eyelet
Attaching the Shoulder Strap adaptor
You can use a shoulder strap (commercially available) by attaching a shoulder strap
adaptor (supplied) to the camera.
Strap eyelet
1 Attach a shoulder strap adaptor to the strap eyelet
on the camera
2
Pass your shoulder strap through the shoulder
strap opening of the strap adaptor
Shoulder Strap opening
•• Check the operating instructions that came with the
shoulder strap.
23
SQW0550
Preparations
Attaching the Hand Strap
3
Pull the shoulder strap and then check that it will
not come out
•• Also attach the other side of the shoulder strap so it is not
twisted.
■■An alternative way to attach the shoulder strap
You can make the shoulder strap adaptor a little shorter.
Pass the shoulder strap adaptor through the strap eyelet
Pass your shoulder strap through both the shoulder
strap adaptor string and shoulder strap opening
•• Check the operating instructions that came with the
shoulder strap.
Pull the shoulder strap and then check that it will not
come out
•• Also attach the other side of the shoulder strap so it is not
twisted.
String
●●Keep the shoulder strap adaptors out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
24
SQW0550
Preparations
Charging battery
Always use the dedicated AC adaptor (supplied), USB connection cable (supplied), and
battery for this camera.
••Always charge before first use! (battery shipped uncharged)
••Charge the battery while it is in the camera.
Camera status
Turn off
Turn on
Charge
Yes
No
About batteries that you can use with this unit
It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the
genuine products are made available to purchase in some markets. Some of
these battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to
meet the requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility
that these battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that
we are not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a
counterfeit battery pack. To ensure that safe products are used we recommend
that a genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.
25
SQW0550
Preparations
Charging battery
TZ100/TZ101
Inserting the battery
To charge the battery, insert it into the camera.
1
Slide the release lever to the
[OPEN] position and open the
card/battery door
[OPEN] [LOCK]
Release lever
2
Insert the battery all the way
3
Close the card/battery door
and then slide the release
lever to the [LOCK] position
••Insert the battery all the way firmly and
check that it is locked by lever.
Lever
■■To remove battery
Make sure to insert the battery in
the correct orientation.
Move the lever in the card/battery
compartment in the direction of the arrow.
●●Always use genuine Panasonic batteries.
●●If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.
●●To remove the battery, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX indicator on the screen goes
off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to malfunction and may damage the card or recorded
data.)
●●Remove battery from camera after use.
•• Keep the battery in a plastic bag, making sure that it is kept away from metallic objects (such as
clips) when carrying or storing it.
26
SQW0550
Preparations
Charging battery
TZ80/TZ81
Inserting the battery
To charge the battery, insert it into the camera.
1
Slide the release lever to the
[OPEN] position and open the
card/battery door
2
Insert the battery all the way
3
Close the card/battery door
and then slide the release
lever to the [LOCK] position
[OPEN] [LOCK]
Release lever
••Insert the battery all the way firmly and
check that it is locked by lever.
Lever
■■To remove battery
Make sure to insert the battery in
the correct orientation.
Move the lever in the card/battery
compartment in the direction of the arrow.
●●Always use genuine Panasonic batteries.
●●If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.
●●To remove the battery, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX indicator on the screen goes
off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to malfunction and may damage the card or recorded
data.)
●●Remove battery from camera after use.
•• Keep the battery in a plastic bag, making sure that it is kept away from metallic objects (such as
clips) when carrying or storing it.
27
SQW0550
Preparations
Charging battery
TZ100/TZ101
Charging the battery
We recommend charging in a location where the ambient temperature is between 10 °C
and 30 °C (50 °F to 86 °F) (same for the battery temperature).
Make sure that the camera is turned off.
The battery can be charged from an outlet or through a PC.
AC adaptor (supplied)
USB connection
cable (supplied)
Computer
Getting ready:
Turn on the computer.
When charging the camera, connect the USB connection cable (supplied) to the
[CHARGE] socket.
: [CHARGE] socket
•• This terminal is located at the bottom when the camera is
in an upright position.
•• Always check the direction of the pins and hold the plug
straight to insert or remove it. (If the cable is inserted in the
wrong direction, the pins could become deformed and cause
faulty operation.)
Also, do not insert into the wrong socket. Doing so may cause
damage to this unit.
28
SQW0550
Preparations
Charging battery
TZ80/TZ81
Charging the battery
We recommend charging in a location where the ambient temperature is between 10 °C
and 30 °C (50 °F to 86 °F) (same for the battery temperature).
Make sure that the camera is turned off.
The battery can be charged from an outlet or through a PC.
AC adaptor (supplied)
USB connection
cable (supplied)
Computer
Getting ready:
Turn on the computer.
When charging the camera, connect the USB connection cable (supplied) to the
[CHARGE] socket.
: [CHARGE] socket
•• This terminal is located at the bottom when the camera is
in an upright position.
•• Always check the direction of the pins and hold the plug
straight to insert or remove it. (If the cable is inserted in the
wrong direction, the pins could become deformed and cause
faulty operation.)
Also, do not insert into the wrong socket. Doing so may cause
damage to this unit.
29
SQW0550
Preparations
Charging battery
●●If the computer enters sleep mode during charging, charging may be stopped.
●●If a notebook computer that is not connected to an electrical outlet is connected to the camera,
the battery of the notebook computer will be depleted. Do not leave the camera and notebook
connected for a long period of time.
●●Always connect the USB connection cable to the USB connector on your computer. Do not
connect the USB connection cable to the USB connector of the monitor, keyboard, printer, or USB
hub.
Charging lamp indications
TZ100/TZ101
Charging lamp
On: Charging in progress
Off:Charging complete
(After charging stops, disconnect the camera
from the electrical outlet or your computer.)
Flashing:Charging error
(For instructions on correcting the problem,
refer to (→383).)
TZ80/TZ81
Notes on charging time
When using the AC adaptor (supplied)
Charging time
Approx. 190 min.
••The charging time indicated above is the time required for charging in case when the
battery is completely used up. The time required for charging differs depending on
conditions of battery usage. Charging takes longer in cases when temperatures are
either high or low and when the battery has not been used for a long period of time.
••The time required for charging through the computer varies depending on the power
supply capacity of the computer.
30
SQW0550
Preparations
Charging battery
●●Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one. Doing so may cause
malfunction of the camera.
●●Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
●●Do not use a USB extension cable.
●●The AC adaptor (supplied) and the USB connection cable (supplied) are dedicated accessories of
this camera. Do not use them for other devices.
●●Remove the battery after use. (The battery will be exhausted if left for a long period of time after
being charged.)
●●If there is any trouble related to the electrical outlet (i.e. power failure), charging may not complete
properly. Disconnect the USB connection cable (supplied) and reconnect it to the camera.
●●If the charging lamp does not light even when the camera is connected to the AC adaptor
(supplied) or a computer, check to make sure it is properly connected. (→28, 29)
31
SQW0550
Preparations
Charging battery
Remaining battery
Remaining battery (only when using battery)
50p
(flashes red)
If the battery mark flashes red, recharge or replace a fully charged
battery.
Estimated number of recordable pictures and operating time
■■Recording still pictures (When using monitor)
Number of recordable
pictures
Recording time
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Approx. 300 pictures
Approx. 320 pictures
Approx. 150 min.
Approx. 160 min.
By CIPA standard
■■Recording still pictures (When using viewfinder (LVF))
Number of recordable
pictures
Recording time
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Approx. 260 pictures
Approx. 280 pictures
Approx. 130 min.
Approx. 140 min.
By CIPA standard
Recording conditions by CIPA standard
CIPA is an abbreviation of “Camera & Imaging Products Association”.
•• Programme AE Mode
•• Temperature: 23 °C (73.4 °F)/Humidity: 50%RH when monitor/viewfinder is on.
•• Using a Panasonic SDHC Memory Card.
•• Using the supplied battery.
]).
•• Starting recording 30 seconds after the camera is turned on (when [Stabilizer] is set to [
•• Recording once every 30 seconds with full flash every second recording.
•• Rotating the zoom lever from Tele to Wide or vice versa in every recording.
•• Turning the camera off every 10 recordings and leaving it until the temperature of the battery
decreases.
Number reduced if intervals are longer (e.g. to approx. one quarter for 2-minute intervals
under the above conditions).
32
SQW0550
Preparations
Charging battery
■■Recording motion pictures (When using monitor)
TZ100/TZ101
[Rec Format]
[AVCHD]
[MP4]
[MP4]
[Rec Quality]
[FHD/17M/50i]
[FHD/28M/50p]
[4K/100M/25p]
Approx. 105 min.
Approx. 100 min.
Approx. 90 min.
Approx. 50 min.
Approx. 50 min.
Approx. 45 min.
Available recording time
Actual available recording time*
TZ80/TZ81
[Rec Format]
[AVCHD]
[MP4]
[MP4]
[Rec Quality]
[FHD/17M/50i]
[FHD/28M/50p]
[4K/100M/25p]
Approx. 110 min.
Approx. 110 min.
Approx. 90 min.
Approx. 55 min.
Approx. 55 min.
Approx. 45 min.
Available recording time
Actual available recording time*
*The time you can actually record when repeatedly turning the camera on and off, starting and
stopping recording and using zoom.
Recording conditions
•• Temperature 23 °C (73.4 °F), humidity 50%RH
•• [AVCHD] motion pictures:
Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
•• Motion pictures with their file size set to [FHD], [HD] or [VGA] in [MP4]:
Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the file
size exceeds 4 GB.
–– Since the file size becomes larger with [FHD], recording with [FHD] will stop before 29 minutes
59 seconds.
•• MP4 motion pictures with a [Rec Quality] size of [4K]:
Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 15 minutes.
When you are using an SDHC memory card, you can continue recording without interruption even if
the file exceeds 4 GB, but the motion picture file will be recorded and played back in separate files.
If using an SDXC Memory Card, you can record a motion picture in a single file even if the size is
greater than 4 GB.
33
SQW0550
Preparations
Charging battery
■■Viewing pictures (When using monitor)
Playback time
Approx. 260 min.
●●The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the
environment and the operating conditions.
For example, in the following cases, the operating times shorten and the number of recordable
pictures is reduced.
•• In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.
•• When operations such as the flash and zoom are used repeatedly.
●●If available battery power is significantly reduced, battery is reaching end of lifespan. Please
purchase a new battery.
34
SQW0550
Preparations
TZ100/TZ101
Inserting and removing the card (optional)
••Make sure that the camera is turned off.
1
Slide the release lever to the
[OPEN] position and open the
card/battery door
2
Insert the card all the way
3
Close the card/battery door
and slide the release lever to
the [LOCK] position
••Check the orientation of a card
(terminals face monitor).
••Insert the card all the way firmly until
it clicks.
[OPEN] [LOCK]
Release lever
■■To remove card:
Press the centre
of the card.
Do not touch the terminal
●●Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
●●To remove the card, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX indicator on the screen goes
off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to malfunction and may damage the card or recorded
data.)
35
SQW0550
Preparations
TZ80/TZ81
Inserting and removing the card (optional)
••Make sure that the camera is turned off.
1
Slide the release lever to the
[OPEN] position and open the
card/battery door
2
Insert the card all the way
3
••Check the orientation of a card
(terminals face monitor).
••Insert the card all the way firmly until
it clicks.
[OPEN] [LOCK]
Release lever
Close the card/battery door
and slide the release lever to
the [LOCK] position
■■To remove card:
Press the centre
of the card.
Do not touch the terminal
●●Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
●●To remove the card, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX indicator on the screen goes
off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to malfunction and may damage the card or recorded
data.)
36
SQW0550
Preparations
About the Card
The following SD standard-based cards (Panasonic brand recommended) can be used.
Operation has been confirmed when using a Panasonic brand card.
Type of Card
Capacity
SD Memory Cards
SDHC Memory Cards
SDXC Memory Cards
Notes
512 MB – 2 GB •• Can be used with devices compatible with the
respective formats.
4 GB – 32 GB
•• Before using SDXC Memory Cards, check that your
48 GB – 128 GB computer and other devices support this type of card.
http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html
•• This unit is compatible with UHS-Ι UHS Speed Class
3 standard SDHC/SDXC memory cards.
•• Only the cards listed on the left with the given capacities
are supported.
■■About motion picture/4K photo recording and speed class ratings
According to the [Rec Format] (→255) and [Rec Quality] (→255) of a motion picture,
the required card differs. To record 4K photos, you need a card with a speed class
rating that supports 4K photo recording. Use a card that meets the following ratings of
the SD Speed Class or UHS Speed Class.
••SD Speed Class and UHS Speed Class are the speed standards regarding
continuous writing. Confirm the SD speed by checking the card label or other card
related materials.
[Rec Format]
[Rec Quality]
[AVCHD]
All
[MP4]
[FHD]/[HD]/[VGA]
[MP4]
[4K]/[High Speed Video]
When recording in 4K Photo /
[Post Focus]
Speed class
Label example
Class 4 or higher
UHS Speed Class 3
UHS Speed Class 3
••Latest information:
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This site is available in English only.)
Access to the card
The access indication displays red when pictures are being
recorded on the card.
50p
●●While the camera is accessing the card (for an operation such as picture writing, reading, deletion,
or formatting), do not turn off the camera or remove the battery, card, AC adaptor (optional) or DC
coupler (optional). Do not subject the camera to vibrations, impact, or static electricity. The card or
the data on the card may be damaged, and this unit may no longer operate normally. If operation
fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation again.
37
SQW0550
Preparations
About the Card
●●If you set the write-protect switch to “LOCK”, you may not be able to write, delete
or format the data or display it by recording date.
●●It is recommended that you copy important pictures to your computer
(as electromagnetic waves, static electricity, or faults may cause data to be
damaged).
Formatting the card (initialisation)
Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.
Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary
data in advance.
1
Set the menu
→
[Setup] → [Format]
●●This requires a sufficiently charged battery, or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).
●●Do not turn off the camera or perform other operations during formatting.
●●Always format cards with this camera. Please reformat the card with this camera if it has already
been formatted with a computer or another device.
●●If the card cannot be formatted, please try another card before contacting Panasonic.
38
SQW0550
Preparations
About the Card
Estimated recording capacity (number of pictures/recording time)
The number of pictures you can take and the recording time vary in proportion to card
capacity (and depending on recording conditions and type of card).
Recording picture capacity (still pictures)
TZ100/TZ101
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2] and [Quality] is set to [
[Picture Size]
]
16 GB
32 GB
720
1450
2910
5810
M (10M)
1310
2650
5310
10510
S (5M)
2270
4600
9220
17640
L (20M)
8 GB
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2] and [Quality] is set to [
64 GB
]
[Picture Size]
8 GB
16 GB
L (20M)
220
450
32 GB
920
1840
M (10M)
260
530
1070
2140
S (5M)
290
580
1170
2340
TZ80/TZ81
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3] and [Quality] is set to [
[Picture Size]
L (18M)
8 GB
16 GB
64 GB
]
32 GB
64 GB
800
1610
3240
6500
M (9M)
1470
2970
5950
11760
S (4.5M)
2590
5240
10500
20590
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3] and [Quality] is set to [
]
[Picture Size]
8 GB
16 GB
32 GB
64 GB
L (18M)
240
490
1000
2000
M (9M)
280
580
1160
2330
S (4.5M)
310
630
1270
2540
●●When the number of recordable pictures exceeds 9,999, “9999+” is displayed.
39
SQW0550
Preparations
About the Card
Recording time capacity (motion pictures)
••The recordable time is the total time of all the motion pictures which have been
recorded.
([h], [m] and [s] indicate “hour”, “minute” and “second”.)
When [Rec Format] is [AVCHD]
TZ100/TZ101
[Rec Quality]
8 GB
16 GB
32 GB
64 GB
[FHD/28M/50p]
36m00s
1h15m00s
2h30m00s
5h00m00s
[FHD/17M/50i]
1h00m00s
2h00m00s
4h05m00s
8h15m00s
[FHD/24M/25p]
[FHD/24M/24p]
42m00s
1h25m00s
2h55m00s
5h50m00s
TZ80/TZ81
[Rec Quality]
8 GB
16 GB
32 GB
64 GB
[FHD/28M/50p]
36m00s
1h15m00s
2h30m00s
5h00m00s
[FHD/17M/50i]
1h00m00s
2h00m00s
4h05m00s
8h15m00s
[FHD/24M/25p]
42m00s
1h25m00s
2h55m00s
5h50m00s
When [Rec Format] is [MP4]
TZ100/TZ101
[Rec Quality]
8 GB
16 GB
32 GB
64 GB
[4K/100M/25p]
[4K/100M/24p]
9m00s
20m00s
42m00s
1h20m00s
[FHD/28M/50p]
36m00s
1h15m00s
2h30m00s
5h00m00s
[FHD/20M/25p]
49m00s
1h40m00s
3h20m00s
6h40m00s
[HD/10M/25p]
1h30m00s
3h10m00s
6h25m00s
12h50m00s
[VGA/4M/25p]
3h25m00s
7h00m00s
14h05m00s
28h15m00s
TZ80/TZ81
40
[Rec Quality]
8 GB
16 GB
32 GB
64 GB
[4K/100M/25p]
9m00s
20m00s
42m00s
1h20m00s
[FHD/28M/50p]
37m00s
1h15m00s
2h30m00s
5h00m00s
[FHD/20M/25p]
49m00s
1h40m00s
3h20m00s
6h40m00s
[HD/10M/25p]
1h30m00s
3h10m00s
6h25m00s
12h50m00s
[VGA/4M/25p]
3h25m00s
7h00m00s
14h05m00s
28h15m00s
SQW0550
Preparations
About the Card
●●If the surrounding temperature is high, or a motion picture is recorded continuously, [
] is
displayed and recording may be stopped halfway through to protect the camera.
●●[AVCHD] motion pictures:
Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
●●Motion pictures with their file size set to [FHD], [HD] or [VGA] in [MP4]:
Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the
file size exceeds 4 GB.
•• Since the file size becomes larger with [FHD], recording with [FHD] will stop before 29 minutes
59 seconds.
●●MP4 motion pictures with a [Rec Quality] size of [4K]:
Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 15 minutes.
When you are using an SDHC memory card, you can continue recording without interruption even
if the file exceeds 4 GB, but the motion picture file will be recorded and played back in separate
files.
If using an SDXC Memory Card, you can record a motion picture in a single file even if the size is
greater than 4 GB.
●●The maximum available continuous recording time is displayed on the screen.
50p
50p
Switching the display between the number of recordable pictures
that you can take and the available recording time
→
[Custom] → [Remaining Disp.]
[
] (Remaining shots):
Displays the number of pictures that can be recorded.
[
] (Remaining time):
Displays the remaining recording time.
Number of
recordable
pictures
41
Available
recording time
SQW0550
Preparations
Setting the clock
The clock is not set when the camera is shipped.
1
TZ100/TZ101
Set the Camera [ON/OFF] switch to [ON]
TZ80/TZ81
Press the Camera [ON/OFF] button
••If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed to step 4.
2
3
Press [MENU/SET] while the message is displayed
4
5
Press [MENU/SET]
Press
to select the language, and press [MENU/SET]
••The [Please set the clock] message appears.
Press
to select the items (year,
month, day, hour, minute), and press
to set
: Home time
: Destination time
To set the display order or time display format
••Select [Style] and press [MENU/SET] to display the
setting screen for display order and time display
format.
Style
Display order
Time display format
42
SQW0550
Preparations
Setting the clock
6
7
8
9
Press [MENU/SET]
When [The clock setting has been completed.] is displayed,
press [MENU/SET]
When [Please set the home area] is displayed, press
[MENU/SET]
Press
to set your home area and
press [MENU/SET]
City or area name
Current time
Difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
●●If the clock is not set, the correct date cannot be printed when you order a photo studio to print the
picture, or when you stamp the date on the pictures with [Text Stamp].
Changing time settings
1
2
Select [Clock Set] from the [Setup] menu
•• For details about how to set the menu (→65)
Set the date and time (Perform steps 5 - 6. (→42))
●●Clock settings will be saved for approx. 3 months even after the battery is removed, provided a
fully charged battery was installed in the camera for 24 hours beforehand.
43
SQW0550
Basics
Holding the camera
Hold the camera gently with both hands keeping your arms close to your body
while standing with your feet slightly apart.
••To prevent dropping, be sure to attach the supplied strap and fit it to your wrist.
••Do not block the flash, AF Assist Lamp, microphone, or speaker with your fingers
or other objects.
••Make sure that the camera does not move at the moment the shutter button is pressed.
••Make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with another person
or object in the vicinity while taking pictures.
TZ80/TZ81
TZ100/TZ101
AF Assist Lamp
Microphone
Flash/AF Assist Lamp
Microphone
Flash
Speaker
Hand strap
Speaker
Hand strap
■■About the direction detect function
Still pictures recorded with the camera held vertically can
be automatically displayed in portrait orientation during
playback. (Only when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [ON].)
••The direction detect function may not operate correctly if
pictures are taken with the camera pointing up or down.
••Motion pictures, 4K burst files recorded with the 4K Photo
function, and pictures recorded in [Post Focus] cannot be
displayed vertically.
44
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
Zoom Lever (Use Zoom)
You can adjust the area of a picture to be taken using the zoom or control ring.
••You can also use the zoom function from the touch panel. (→240)
••For details about zoom types and use, refer to (→236).
1
Zoom lever
Move the zoom lever
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
1
Control ring
Turn the control ring*
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
*You can perform zoom operation by assigning
the [Zoom] setting to the control ring. (→74, 75)
T side: Telephoto, Enlarge the subject
W side: Wide-angle, Capture a wider area
Clockwise: Telephoto, Enlarge the subject
Counterclockwise: Wide-angle, Capture a wider
area
●●Do not touch the lens barrel during zooming.
●●Adjust the focus after adjusting the zoom.
●●The camera may make a rattling noise and vibrate when the zoom lever or control ring is
operated. This is not a malfunction.
45
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
Shutter button (Taking pictures)
••Press the [
] button ( ) to set the drive mode to [
Press
the
shutter
button halfway (press lightly) to
1
focus on the subject
] ([Single]).
•• The aperture value and shutter speed are displayed. (If the
aperture value and shutter speed are shown in red and flashing,
you do not have the appropriate exposure, unless you are using
the flash.)
Focus display
(When focus is aligned:
illuminated
When focus is not aligned:
flashing)
Shutter speed
Aperture value
2
Press the shutter button fully (push the button all the
way), and take the picture
●●Pictures can be taken only when the image is correctly focused as long as the [Focus/
Release Priority] (→164) is set to [FOCUS].
●●Even during menu operation or picture playback, if you press the shutter button halfway, you can
instantly set the camera ready for recording.
■■Focus range
Focus range is displayed when operating the zoom
••The focus range is displayed in red when it is not focused
after pressing the shutter button halfway.
Focus range
The focus range may change gradually depending on the zoom position.
46
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
Example: Range of focus during the Programme AE Mode
TZ100/TZ101
70 cm (2.3 feet)
50 cm (1.6 feet)
TZ80/TZ81
2 m (6.6 feet)
50 cm (1.6 feet)
Displaying still pictures immediately after taking them
→
[Custom] → [Auto Review]
Set the time to display the pictures you have taken after taking still pictures.
Settings: [HOLD] / [5SEC] / [4SEC] / [3SEC] / [2SEC] / [1SEC] / [OFF]
●●When [HOLD] is selected, pictures are displayed until you press the shutter button
halfway.
●●During 4K Photo recording (→184) and [Post Focus] recording (→210), the [Auto
Review] settings items change to [ON] and [OFF].
47
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures)
1
Press the motion picture button to start recording
•• Immediately release the motion picture button after pressing it.
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
2
48
Press the motion picture button again to end recording
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
Mode dial (Select the recording mode)
1
Set to the desired recording mode
•• Rotate the mode dial slowly to select the desired mode.
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Intelligent Auto Mode (→88)
Take pictures with automatic settings.
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode (→95)
Allows you to adjust the brightness (exposure) and colour hue as desired.
Programme AE Mode (→97)
Take pictures with automatic shutter speed and aperture value settings.
Aperture-Priority AE Mode (→101)
Determine aperture, then record pictures.
Shutter-Priority AE Mode (→102)
Determine shutter speed, then record pictures.
Manual Exposure Mode (→103)
Determine aperture and shutter speed, then record pictures.
Creative Video Mode (→124)
Determine aperture and shutter speed, then record motion pictures.
* You cannot take still pictures.
Custom Mode (→127)
Record pictures using pre-registered settings.
Panorama Shot Mode (→109)
Record panorama pictures.
Scene Guide Mode (→112)
Take pictures that match the scene being recorded.
Creative Control Mode (→117)
Take pictures by selecting your preferred picture effect.
49
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
TZ100/TZ101
Control ring / Rear dial
The “Control Ring/Rear dial” is an easy and convenient way to adjust several settings,
depending on the camera mode selected. You can use the control ring ( )/rear dial ( ) to
change the settings of the unit.
Items that can be set by the control ring/rear dial vary depending on recording modes.
Following are the pre-assigned settings.
Mode dial
[
] (→88)
[
] (→97)
[
] (→101)
[
] (→102)
[
] (→103)
[
] (→109)
[
[
] (→112)
] (→117)
Control ring*1
Rear dial
—
Step Zoom (→239)
Programme Shift (→97)
Aperture adjustment (→101)
Shutter speed adjustment (→102)
Aperture adjustment*2 (→103)
Shutter speed adjustment*2 (→103)
Picture effects change (→117)
Aperture adjustment*3 (→103) /
Shutter speed adjustment*4 (→103)
Picture effects change (→117)
*1 When Manual Focus is set, the control ring is assigned to focus adjustment. (→167)
*2 Press to switch between shutter speed adjustment and aperture adjustment.
*3 The operation is possible only when the Scene Guide Mode is set to [Appetizing Food].
*4 The operation is possible only when the Scene Guide Mode is set to [Artistic Nightscape].
••The control ring/rear dial can be used to change to your preferred settings. (→74)
50
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
TZ80/TZ81
Control ring / Control dial
The “Control Ring/Control dial” is an easy and convenient way to adjust several settings,
depending on the camera mode selected. You can use the control ring ( )/control dial
( ) to change the settings of the unit.
Items that can be set by the control ring/control dial vary depending on recording modes.
Following are the pre-assigned settings.
Mode dial
[
] (→88)
[
] (→97)
[
] (→101)
[
] (→102)
[
] (→103)
[
] (→109)
[
[
] (→112)
] (→117)
Control ring*1
Control dial
—
Step Zoom (→239)
Programme Shift (→97)
Aperture adjustment (→101)
Shutter speed adjustment (→102)
Aperture adjustment*2 (→103)
Shutter speed adjustment*2 (→103)
Picture effects change (→117)
Aperture adjustment*3 (→103) /
Shutter speed adjustment*4 (→103)
Picture effects change (→117)
*1 When Manual Focus is set, the control ring is assigned to focus adjustment. (→167)
*2 Press to switch between shutter speed adjustment and aperture adjustment.
*3 The operation is possible only when the Scene Guide Mode is set to [Appetizing Food].
*4 The operation is possible only when the Scene Guide Mode is set to [Artistic Nightscape].
••The control ring/control dial can be used to change to your preferred settings. (→75)
51
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
Enabling/disabling the operation guide display
→
[Custom] → [Dial Guide] → [ON] / [OFF]
••When you set [Dial Guide] to [ON], operation guide appears
on the recording screen.
Example
Cursor button / [MENU/SET] button (Selecting/setting items)
Pressing the cursor button:Selection of items or setting of values etc., is
performed.
Pressing [MENU/SET]:Confirmation of setting contents, etc., is performed.
TZ100/TZ101
••In this manual, the button that is to be used is indicated by
.
TZ80/TZ81
••Even when the camera is operated using the touch
screen, it is possible to operate with the cursor button and
[MENU/SET] button if a guide like the one shown on the
right is displayed.
••Even on menu screens etc. on which the guide is not
displayed, you can make settings and selections by
operating the buttons.
•• TZ100/TZ101
When the [Cursor Button Lock] is assigned to the function
button, operation of the cursor button and [MENU/SET]
button can be disabled. (→70)
52
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
[DISP.] button (Switching the display information)
1
Press [DISP.] button to switch the display
•• If the information on the screen is not displayed any longer
because no operation was performed for some time, press the
[DISP.] button or touch the screen to display the information
again.
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
During recording
You can use [Monitor Disp. Style] and [LVF Disp.Style] in the [Custom] menu to select
] (Monitor style display layout) or [
] (Live View Finder style display layout)
either [
for the display screen of the monitor and viewfinder.
■■[
] Monitor style display layout (Example of monitor style display)
With information
50p
Without information
With information
+
level gauge
Without information
+
level gauge
50p
Turned off
53
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
■■[
] Live View Finder style display layout (Example of viewfinder style display)
With information
(Detailed information)
With information
With information
(Detailed information)
+
level gauge
50p
With information
+
level gauge
50p
Switching the monitor display method
[
[
→
[Custom] → [Monitor Disp. Style]
]: Live View Finder style display layout
]: Monitor style display layout
Switching the viewfinder display method
[
[
54
→
[Custom] → [LVF Disp.Style]
]: Live View Finder style display layout
]: Monitor style display layout
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
Enabling/disabling the histogram display
→
[Custom] → [Histogram] → [ON] / [OFF]
When set to [ON], you can move the display position of the histogram by pressing
••Direct touch operation is also possible from the recording screen.
(Example)
Displays distribution of brightness in picture – e.g.
if the graph peaks at the right, this means there are
several bright areas in the picture. A peak in the centre
represents correct brightness (correct exposure). This
can be used as a reference for exposure correction, etc.
.
Dark ← OK → Bright
●●When the histogram is not the same as that of the recorded picture under the following
conditions, histogram will be displayed in orange:
] in Manual Exposure Mode
•• When manual exposure assist indicates settings other than [
or during Exposure Compensation.
•• When the flash fires.
•• When the correct exposure is not achieved or when the brightness of the screen cannot be
displayed accurately in a dark location.
●●The histogram is different from those displayed using the image editing software of a computer.
Enabling/disabling the guideline display
→
[Custom] → [Guide Line] → [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
••The guideline is not displayed during panorama picture recording.
When you select [ ], you can move the position of the guideline by pressing
.
••You can also set the position directly by touching [ ] on the guideline of the recording
screen.
55
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
Using the level gauge
If you want to make sure that the camera is not slanted or tilted, for example, when you
take a picture of a landscape, use the level gauge indication as a reference.
1
Press [DISP.] button to display the level gauge
The yellow line indicates the current angle. Correct the angle of the camera so that it
matches the white line.
Tilting up or down
Tilting left or right
•• In this case, it is facing upward.
•• In this case, the right side has
dropped.
••When the camera is tilted very little or not at all, the level gauge will turn green.
●●Even when angle is more or less corrected, there may be an error of about ±1 degree.
●●When [Level Gauge] is assigned to a function button, you can turn the level gauge on and off
every time you press the function button.
●●The level gauge may not be displayed correctly or the direction detect function (→44) may not
operate correctly if the pictures are taken with the camera pointing sharply up or down.
56
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
During playback
With information
Detailed information
display*1
Histogram display*1
Without information
([Highlight])*1, *2, *3
R
G
B
10:00 1.DEC.2016
100-0001
Y
1/98
100-0001
Without information*3
*1This screen is not displayed during Playback Zoom, Motion Picture Playback, Automatic Scrolling
Playback of panorama pictures, continuous playback or Slide Show.
*2This screen is displayed only when [Highlight] (below) in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON].
*3If no operation is performed for a few seconds, [ ] and other touch icons will disappear.
••A histogram of each colour, including R (red), G (green), B (blue), and Y (luminance), is
separately displayed during playback.
Enabling/disabling the overexposed area display
→
[Custom] → [Highlight] → [ON] / [OFF]
You can set overexposed areas (areas that are too bright and where there are no shades
of grey) to flash on the screen when the [Auto Review] function is activated or during
playback. This does not affect recorded pictures.
••To reduce overexposed areas, record a picture by setting
negative exposure compensation (→177) using the histogram
display (→55) and so on as a reference.
••This feature is disabled during 4K photo playback, playback
of pictures recorded in Post Focus, Multi Playback, Calendar
Playback, or Playback Zoom.
57
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
[LVF] button (Recording pictures using the viewfinder)
Switching between the monitor and viewfinder
You can operate the [LVF] button/[Fn4] button in two ways,
using it either as the [LVF] button or as a function button [Fn4].
You can use this button as the [LVF] button at the time of
purchase.
••For details on the function button, refer to (→70).
TZ100/TZ101
Eye Sensor
[LVF] button
TZ80/TZ81
Eye Sensor
[LVF] button
58
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
1
Press [LVF] button
Automatic switching
between viewfinder and
monitor (eye sensor)
Viewfinder display
Mode
Monitor display
Display
Automatic switching between
viewfinder and monitor (eye sensor)
The eye sensor automatically switches the display to
viewfinder when your eye or an object moves close to the
viewfinder. When the eye or object moves away from the
viewfinder, the camera returns to monitor display.
Viewfinder display
Viewfinder display only
Monitor display
Monitor display only
■■About the eye sensor
••The eye sensor may react depending on the shape of your eyeglasses, the way you
hold the camera, or whether the eye sensor is exposed to strong light.
••During motion picture playback or Slide Show, the eye sensor does not operate.
59
SQW0550
Basics
Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording
■■About diopter adjustment
Rotate the diopter adjustment dial to adjust until you
are able to clearly see the characters displayed in the
viewfinder.
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Setting the sensitivity of the eye sensor or setting to switch the
display between the viewfinder and monitor
→
[Custom] → [Eye Sensor]
[Sensitivity]
Use this setting to set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.
[HIGH] / [LOW]
[LVF/Monitor Switch]
Use this setting to switch the display between the viewfinder and monitor.
[LVF/MON AUTO] (Automatic switching between viewfinder and
monitor) / [LVF] (Viewfinder display) / [MON] (Monitor display)
•• After the display is switched using the [LVF] button, the setting of [LVF/
Monitor Switch] will also change.
Adjusting/not adjusting the focus automatically when the eye sensor
is activated
→
[Custom] → [Eye Sensor AF] → [ON] / [OFF]
••Even when [Eye Sensor AF] is set and the camera automatically adjusts the focus, a
beep will not sound.
••[Eye Sensor AF] may not work when the lighting is low.
60
SQW0550
Basics
Touch screen (Touch operations)
Touch screen of this unit is capacitive. Touch the panel directly with your bare finger.
Touch
To touch and release the touch screen. Be sure to touch
the centre of the desired icon.
Drag
To touch and slide your finger across the touch screen.
This can also be used to forward or rewind a picture during
playback, etc.
Pinch (spread/pinch)
On the touch screen, spread (pinch out) your 2 fingers to
zoom in, and pinch (pinch in) your 2 fingers to zoom out.
Enabling/disabling the touch operation
→
[Custom] → [Touch Settings]
[Touch Screen]
All touch operations. When set to [OFF], only button and dial operations
can be used.
[ON] / [OFF]
[Touch Tab]
Operation to display the touch icons by touching tabs such as [ ]
displayed on the right of the screen.
[ON] / [OFF]
[Touch AF]
Operation to optimise the focus or both the focus and brightness for a
touched subject.
[AF] (→156) / [AF+AE] (→162) / [OFF]
[Touch Pad AF]
Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the
viewfinder is in use. (→161)
[EXACT] / [OFFSET] / [OFF]
61
SQW0550
Basics
Touch screen (Touch operations)
●●Touch the screen with the clean and dry finger.
●●If you use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, please follow the instructions that
accompany the sheet. (Some monitor protection sheets may impair visibility or operability.)
●●Do not press on the monitor with hard pointed tips, such as ballpoint pens.
●●Do not press the touch screen with your fingernails.
●●Clean the monitor with a soft, dry cloth if there are fingerprints or other kinds of dirt on it.
●●Do not scratch or press the monitor too hard.
●●The touch screen may not function normally in the following cases.
•• When touched by a gloved hand
•• When the touch screen is wet
•• When touched by multiple hands or fingers at the same time
62
SQW0550
Basics
Touch screen (Touch operations)
Touching the screen and recording (Touch Shutter function)
Recording mode:
This function enables you to focus and record still pictures simply by touching the
subjects that appear on the screen.
1
Touch [ ]
2
Touch [
3
Touch the subject you want to record
]
•• The icon changes to [
shutter recording.
] and you can now proceed with touch
•• To release the touch shutter function → Touch [
].
●●If shooting with the touch shutter fails, the AF area turns red and disappears.
●●Measurement of brightness is performed on the spot touched when the [Metering Mode] (→183) is
]. At the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by the brightness around the
set to [
touched location.
63
SQW0550
Basics
Touch screen (Touch operations)
Easily Optimising the Brightness for a Specified Area
([Touch AE])
Recording mode:
You can easily optimise the brightness for a touched position. When the face of the
subject appears dark, you can brighten the screen according to the brightness of the face.
1
Touch [ ]
2
Touch [
3
Touch the subject you want to optimise the brightness
for
]
•• The setting screen for the brightness optimisation position is
displayed.
•• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used exclusively for the
[Touch AE].
•• Touching [Reset] will bring the brightness optimisation position
back to the centre.
Reset
4
Set
Touch [Set]
■■Cancelling the [Touch AE] function
Touch [
]
•• [Metering Mode] returns to the original setting, and the brightness optimisation position is
cancelled.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• When using the Digital Zoom
•• When [High Speed Video] is set
•• When [4K Live Cropping] is set
•• When [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] menu has been set to [AF+AE] (→61)
64
SQW0550
Basics
Setting the menu
You can use the menu to set camera and recording functions, operate playback functions,
and perform other operations.
In this Operating Instructions, steps for setting a menu item are described as follows:
Example: To change the [Quality] setting from [ ] to [ ] in the [Rec] menu
→
[Rec] → [Quality] → [ ]
How to set the menu
Menu settings can be made either by button or touch operation.
1 Press [MENU/SET] to bring up the menu
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
65
[Rec]
(→379)
You can perform settings for the aspect ratio, number of pixels, 4K
Photo, etc.
[Motion Picture]
(→380)
You can select the recording format and picture quality and other
settings.
[Custom]
(→381)
Operation of the unit, such as displaying of the screen and button
operations, can be set up according to your preferences. Also, it is
possible to register the modified settings.
[Setup]
(→382)
You can perform settings that make usage more convenient, such
as the changing the clock settings and beep volume. You can also
perform Wi-Fi function-related settings.
[Playback]
(→382)
You can specify picture protection, cropping, print settings, and other
settings for pictures you have taken.
SQW0550
Basics
Setting the menu
■■Switching menu type
Press
Press
to select a tab such as [
]
•• TZ100/TZ101
Items can also be selected by rotating the rear dial.
•• TZ80/TZ81
Items can also be selected by rotating the control dial.
Press [MENU/SET]
Menu type
With touch screen operations
Touch a tab, such as [ ]
2
Press
to select the menu item and press
[MENU/SET]
•• TZ100/TZ101
The menu item can also be selected by rotating the rear
dial.
•• TZ80/TZ81
The menu item can also be selected by rotating the
control dial.
••You can also switch to the next page by pressing [DISP.]
button or rotating the zoom lever.
With touch screen operations
Touch the menu item
•• You can switch to the next page by touching [
3
]/[
Page
Item
].
Press
to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]
•• TZ100/TZ101
The setting can also be selected by rotating the rear dial.
•• TZ80/TZ81
The setting can also be selected by rotating the control
dial.
Selected setting
••The setting methods vary depending on the menu item.
With touch screen operations
Touch the setting to set
66
Settings
SQW0550
Basics
Setting the menu
4
Press [Q.MENU/ ] button repeatedly until the
recording or playback screen reappears
•• During recording, the menu screen can also be exited by
pressing the shutter button halfway.
With touch screen operations
Touch [ ]
●●When [Menu Resume] (→84) in the [Setup] menu is set to [ON], the screen
displayed last after you selected the menu item will reappear.
It is set to [ON] at the time of purchase.
●●When the [Menu Information] (→84) in the [Setup] menu is set to [ON],
descriptions of the menu items and settings will appear on the menu screen.
67
SQW0550
Basics
Calling frequently-used menus instantly
(Quick Menu)
You can easily call some of the menu items and set them during recording.
••Some items or settings can not be selected depending on the mode or display style the
camera is in.
1
Press [Q.MENU/ ] button
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
2
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to select a menu item,
and press or
50p
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to select a menu
item, and press or
••The menu item can also be selected by pressing
3
.
TZ100/TZ101
50p
Rotate the rear dial to select the setting
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to select the
setting
••The setting can also be selected with
4
68
.
Press [Q.MENU/ ] button to close the Quick menu
SQW0550
Basics
Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu)
TZ100/TZ101
Switching the method for setting Quick Menu items
→
[Custom] → [Q.MENU]
[PRESET]: The default items can be set.
[CUSTOM]: The Quick Menu will consist of desired items (below).
TZ100/TZ101
Change the Quick Menu to your preferred item
When [Q.MENU] in the [Custom] menu is set to [CUSTOM] (above), the Quick Menu can
be changed as desired. Up to 15 items can be set to the Quick Menu.
1 After pressing the [Q.MENU/ ] button, press to
select [
], and press [MENU/SET]
2
3
4
69
Press
to select the menu item in the top row
and press [MENU/SET]
Top row:
Items that can be set
•• Items that are displayed in grey in the top row have already been
set.
Press
to select the empty space in the bottom row
and press [MENU/SET]
•• You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to
the bottom row.
•• If there is no empty space in the bottom row, you can replace an
existing item with a new select item by selecting the existing item. Bottom row: Set items
•• To cancel the setting, move to the bottom row by pressing and
select an item to cancel, and then press [MENU/SET].
Press [Q.MENU/ ] button
•• It will return to screen of step 1. Press [MENU/SET] to switch to the recording screen.
SQW0550
Basics
Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons
(Function buttons)
You can assign frequently-used functions to particular buttons ([Fn1] - [Fn4]) or icons
displayed on the screen ([Fn5] - [Fn9]).
••Certain functions cannot be assigned to some function buttons.
••The function assigned to the function button may not work in some modes or on some
display screens.
1
Set the menu
2
3
Use
to select [Setting in REC mode] or [Setting in PLAY
mode] and press [MENU/SET]
Press
to select the function button
you want to assign a function to and
press [MENU/SET]
Press
to select the function you want
to assign and press [MENU/SET]
4
→
[Custom] → [Fn Button Set]
••For details on the functions that can be assigned in
[Setting in REC mode], refer to (→71).
••For details on the functions that can be assigned in
[Setting in PLAY mode], refer to (→73).
■■Rapidly assigning functions
The assignment screen displayed in Step 4 above can be displayed by holding a
function button ([Fn1] to [Fn4]) for 2 seconds.
Recording mode:
The function assignment screen for [Setting in REC mode] is displayed
Playback mode:
The function assignment screen for [Setting in PLAY mode] is displayed
••In some cases the function assignment screen cannot be displayed depending on the
mode or display screen
70
SQW0550
Basics
Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (Function buttons)
Using the function buttons during recording
Press the function button to use the assigned function.
■■Using function buttons with touch operations
Touch [ ]
Touch [Fn5], [Fn6], [Fn7], [Fn8] or [Fn9]
■■Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in REC mode]
[Rec] menu/Recording functions
•• [4K PHOTO] (→184): [Fn1]*
•• [Wi-Fi] (→302): [Fn5]*
•• [Q.MENU] (→68): [Fn3]*
•• [LVF/Monitor Switch] (→58): [Fn4]*
•• [AF/AE LOCK] (→173, 175)
•• [AF-ON] (→173, 175)
•• [Preview] (→106)
•• [One Push AE] (→108)
•• [Touch AE] (→64)
•• [Level Gauge] (→56): [Fn6]*
•• [Focus Area Set]
•• TZ100/TZ101 [Cursor Button Lock]
•• [Photo Style] (→129)
•• [Filter Select] (→131)
•• [Aspect Ratio] (→139)
•• [Picture Size] (→139)
•• [Quality] (→140)
•• [Sensitivity] (→179)
•• TZ80/TZ81 [White Balance] (→134)
•• [AF Mode] (→149)
•• [AFS/AFF/AFC] (→148)
71
•• [Metering Mode] (→183)
•• [Burst Rate] (→202)
•• [Auto Bracket] (→206)
•• [Self Timer] (→208)
•• TZ100/TZ101 [Highlight Shadow] (→133)
•• [i.Dynamic] (→142)
•• [i.Resolution] (→142)
•• [Post Focus] (→210): [Fn2]*
•• [HDR] (→143)
•• [Shutter Type] (→199)
•• TZ100/TZ101 [Flash Mode] (→243)
•• [Flash Adjust.] (→250)
•• [i.Zoom] (→237)
•• [Digital Zoom] (→238)
•• [Stabilizer] (→234)
•• [Exposure Comp.] (→177)
•• TZ80/TZ81 [Flash Mode] (→244)
•• TZ100/TZ101 [White Balance] (→134)
•• [Focus Mode] (→146, 165, 167)
•• [Drive Mode] (→201)
•• [Restore to Default]
SQW0550
Basics
Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (Function buttons)
[Motion Picture] menu
•• [Motion Pic. Set] (→255)
•• [4K Live Cropping] (→258)
•• [Snap Movie] (→262): [Fn8]*
[Custom] menu
•• [Silent Mode] (→225)
•• [Peaking] (→172)
•• [Histogram] (→55): [Fn7]*
•• [Guide Line] (→55)
•• [Zebra Pattern] (→230)
•• [Monochrome Live View] (→231)
•• [Rec Area] (→252)
•• [Zoom lever] (→239)
•• [Touch Screen] (→61)
*Function button settings at the time of purchase.
([Fn9] has no function button setting at the time of purchase)
●●When [Focus Area Set] is assigned to the function button, you can display the AF area or the MF
Assist position setting screen.
●● TZ100/TZ101
When [Cursor Button Lock] is assigned to a function button, operation of the cursor button and
[MENU/SET] is disabled. To enable operation, press the function button again.
●●Setting [Restore to Default] returns the function buttons to their original settings at the time of
purchase.
●●The function assigned to the [Fn1] button will not work in the following cases:
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) of the 4K Photo function.
•• When recording with [
•• When [4K Live Cropping] is set
●●The function registered to the [Fn2] button will not work in the following cases.
•• TZ100/TZ101 When setting AF area when Auto Focus Mode is [Custom Multi]
•• When doing peaking operation after recording in [Post Focus]
] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) 4K burst files in the 4K photo
•• When playing back [ ] ([4K Burst]) or [
function
●●[Fn5], [Fn6], [Fn7], [Fn8], and [Fn9] cannot be used when the viewfinder is in use.
72
SQW0550
Basics
Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (Function buttons)
Using the function buttons during playback
You can directly set an assigned function to a selected image by pressing the function
button during playback.
Example: When [Fn2] is set to [Favorite]
1
2
Press
to select the picture
Press [Fn2] button, and then set the picture as
[Favorite]
■■Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in PLAY mode]
••The following functions can be assigned to the button [Fn1], [Fn2], or [Fn4].
•• [Favorite] (→297): [Fn2]*
•• [Print Set] (→298)
•• [Protect] (→299)
[Playback] menu/Playback functions
•• [Delete Single] (→277)
•• [Off]: [Fn1]*, [Fn4]*
•• [Restore to Default]
*Function button settings at the time of purchase.
73
SQW0550
Basics
Changing the settings assigned to the
control ring/rear dial
TZ100/TZ101
Recording mode:
Changes the settings assigned to the control ring/rear dial.
1
Set the menu
2
3
Use
to select [ ] (control ring) or [
] (rear dial) and
press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]
→
[Custom] → [Ring/Dial Set]
[DEFLT] [Normal]
[Photo Style] (→129)
[Zoom]* (→236)
[Filter Effect] (→131)
[Step Zoom]* (→239)
[Aspect Ratio] (→139)
[Exposure Comp.] (→177)
[Highlight Shadow] (→133)
[Sensitivity] (→179)
[i.Dynamic] (→142)
[White Balance] (→134)
[i.Resolution] (→142)
[AF Mode] (→149)
[Flash] (→243)
[Focus Mode] (→146, 165, 167)
[Flash Adjust.] (→250)
[Drive Mode] (→201)
[OFF] [Not Set]*
* Items that can only be set to the control ring
••To return to the default setting, select [Normal].
••If you do not use the control ring, select [Not Set].
••Under [Highlight Shadow], use the control ring and rear dial.
If [Highlight Shadow] is assigned to the control ring (or rear dial), [Highlight
Shadow] will also be assigned to the rear dial (or control ring).
●●The assigned function setting applies to all the recording modes.
However, the assigned function may not operate when combined with certain recording mode.
74
SQW0550
Basics
Changing the settings assigned to the
control ring/control dial
TZ80/TZ81
Recording mode:
Changes the settings assigned to the control ring/control dial.
1
Set the menu
2
3
Use
to select [ ] (control ring) or [ ] (control dial) and
press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]
→
[Custom] → [Ring/Dial Set]
[DEFLT] [Normal]
[Drive Mode] (→201)
[Zoom]* (→236)
[Photo Style] (→129)
[Step Zoom]* (→239)
[Filter Effect] (→131)
[Exposure Comp.] (→177)
[Aspect Ratio] (→139)
[Sensitivity] (→179)
[i.Dynamic] (→142)
[White Balance] (→134)
[i.Resolution] (→142)
[AF Mode] (→149)
[Flash Mode] (→244)
[Focus Mode] (→146, 165, 167)
[Flash Adjust.] (→250)
[OFF] [Not Set]*
* Items that can only be set to the control ring
••To return to the default setting, select [Normal].
••If you do not use the control ring, select [Not Set].
●●The assigned function setting applies to all the recording modes.
However, the assigned function may not operate when combined with certain recording mode.
75
SQW0550
Basics
Using the [Setup] menu
[Clock Set] and [Economy] are important for clock setting and battery life. Please
check these before use.
For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→65).
[Online Manual]
Settings: [URL display] / [QR Code display]
[Clock Set]
Set time, date, and display format. (→42)
[World Time]
Set the recording date and time with the local time at your destination.
••You can set [Destination] after setting [Home].
Settings: [Destination] / [Home]
1
2
Use
to select [Destination] or [Home] and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select area and press [MENU/SET]
Current time at selected destination
City/area name
Difference with
home time
When [Destination] has been selected
When [Home] has been selected
■■To set daylight savings
Press in step 2. (Press again to release the setting)
•• When daylight savings [
] is set, the current time is advanced by 1 hour. If the setting is
cancelled, the time automatically returns to the current time.
■■When you come back from your travel destination
Select [Home] in step 1 and press [MENU/SET].
●●If you cannot find your destination in the area displayed on the screen, set based on difference
with home time.
76
SQW0550
Basics
Using the [Setup] menu
For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→65).
[Travel Date]
If you set your travel schedule and record pictures, the day of your trip on which the
picture was taken will be recorded.
■■[Travel Setup]
Settings: [SET] / [OFF]
1
2
3
4
Use
to select [Travel Setup] and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select the departure date and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select the return date and press [MENU/SET]
■■To record [Location]
Once the [Travel Setup] is set, you can set the location.
Select [Location] in step 1 above, and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]
Enter your location (Entering text (→87))
●●To print [Location] or the number of days that have passed, either use [Text Stamp] (→291) or
print using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software (→353).
●●The travel date is calculated from the set departure date and the date set in the camera’s clock.
When destination is set in [World Time], days elapsed are calculated based on local destination
time.
●●When [Travel Setup] is set to [OFF], the number of days elapsed is not recorded. It is not
displayed even if [Travel Setup] is set to [SET] after recording.
●●When the current date passes the return date, [Travel Setup] is automatically cancelled.
●●[Travel Date] cannot be recorded for AVCHD motion pictures.
●●[Location] cannot be recorded while recording motion pictures, recording 4K photos, or recording
in [Post Focus].
[Wi-Fi]
Settings: [Wi-Fi Function] / [Wi-Fi Setup]
Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function. (→303, 344)
77
SQW0550
Basics
Using the [Setup] menu
For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→65).
[Beep]
Sets the beep sounds or shutter sounds.
■■[Beep Volume]
Settings:
(High) /
(Low) /
(Off)
Settings:
(High) /
(Low) /
(Off)
Settings:
/
■■[Shutter Vol.]
■■[Shutter Tone]
/
●●When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], [Beep Volume] and [Shutter Vol.] are set to “Off”.
[Live View Mode]
Sets the display speed and picture quality of the screen (Live View screen) when
recording pictures.
Settings
[30fps]
[60fps]
Pictures are displayed at 30 fps.
For example, use when you want to record a comparatively slow-moving subject while
confirming the focusing. Minimises power consumption and the operating time is
extended.
Display speed has higher priority over picture quality and pictures are displayed at
60 fps.
For example, use when you want to record a fast-moving subject.
●●The [Live View Mode] setting does not affect the recorded picture.
●●The display speed may slow down in dark locations.
●●When the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional) are used, [Live View Mode] is fixed to
[60fps].
●● TZ100/TZ101
[Live View Mode] is disabled while the HDMI output is being used for recording.
78
SQW0550
Basics
Using the [Setup] menu
For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→65).
[Monitor Display] / [Viewfinder]
Adjust brightness and colour of the monitor or viewfinder.
Settings
Adjusts the brightness.
[Brightness]
Adjusts the contrast.
[Contrast]
Adjusts the vividness of colours.
[Saturation]
Adjusts red hues.
[Red Tint]
Adjusts blue hues.
[Blue Tint]
1
Press
2
Press [MENU/SET]
to select the setting item and press
•• TZ100/TZ101
You can also make adjustments with the rear dial.
•• TZ80/TZ81
You can also make adjustments with the control dial.
to make adjustments
●●It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the viewfinder is in
use.
●●Some subjects may look different from their actual appearance, but the recorded picture will not
be affected.
79
SQW0550
Basics
Using the [Setup] menu
For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→65).
[Monitor Luminance]
Sets the monitor brightness according to the ambient light level.
Settings
The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera.
The brightness is increased.
The brightness is standard.
The brightness is decreased.
●●Some subjects may look different from their actual appearance, but the recorded picture will not
be affected.
] returns to ordinary brightness if there is no operation for 30 seconds when recording. (Press
any button or touch the screen to make the screen brighter again.)
●●Setting [ ] or [ ] reduces the operating time.
●●Cannot select [ ] during playback.
●●When the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional) are used, the initial setting is [ ].
●●[
80
SQW0550
Basics
Using the [Setup] menu
For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→65).
[Economy]
Turn off the camera or make the monitor go dark while not using the camera or if no
operation is performed for a preset period of time to minimise battery consumption.
■■ TZ100/TZ101
[Sleep Mode]
The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time
selected on the setting.
Settings: [10MIN.] / [5 MIN.] / [2 MIN.] / [1 MIN.] / [OFF]
••To restore → P
ress the shutter button halfway, or turn the camera [ON/OFF] switch to
[OFF] and then turn it [ON] again
■■
TZ80/TZ81 [Auto Power Off]
The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time
selected on the setting.
Settings: [10MIN.] / [5 MIN.] / [2 MIN.] / [1 MIN.] / [OFF]
••To restore → Press the Camera [ON/OFF] button
■■[Auto LVF/Monitor Off]
The monitor is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time
selected on the setting.
Settings: [5 MIN.] / [2 MIN.] / [1 MIN.]
••To restore → Press any button or touch the monitor.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• During motion picture recording/playback
] ([4K Pre-Burst]) of the 4K Photo function
•• When recording with [
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
•• When connected to computer/printer
•• During Slide Shows
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]
•• TZ100/TZ101 While the HDMI output is being used for recording
●● TZ100/TZ101
When using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional), the [Sleep Mode] is disabled.
●●
TZ80/TZ81
When using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional), the [Auto Power Off] is disabled.
●●When using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional), [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] is fixed to
[5 MIN.].
81
SQW0550
Basics
Using the [Setup] menu
For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→65).
[USB Mode]
Select communication method for when connecting camera to a computer or printer with
USB connection cable (supplied).
Settings
[Select on connection]
[PictBridge(PTP)]
Select communication method each time you connect to a computer
or PictBridge-compatible printer.
Select when connecting to a PictBridge-compatible printer.
Select when connecting to a computer.
[PC]
[TV Connection]
Change the settings to be used when the camera is connected to a TV or other device.
■■[Video Out]
This setting performs when the HDMI micro cable is connected.
Settings
82
[NTSC]
Video output is set to NTSC system.
[PAL]
Video output is set to PAL system.
SQW0550
Basics
Using the [Setup] menu
For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→65).
[TV Connection] (continued)
■■[HDMI Mode (Play)]
Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible highdefinition TV connected with this unit using the HDMI micro cable.
Settings
[AUTO]
Automatically sets the output resolution based on information from a
connected TV.
[4K]
Outputs pictures with a resolution of 3840×2160 pixels using a progressive
scan method for the number of effective scanning lines (2,160 lines).
[1080p]
Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective
scanning lines (1,080 lines).
[1080i]
Outputs pictures using an interlace scan method for the number of effective
scanning lines (1,080 lines).
[720p]
Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective
scanning lines (720 lines).
[576p]*1/[480p]*2
Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective
scanning lines (576*1/480*2 lines).
*1 When [Video Out] is set to [PAL]
*2 When [Video Out] is set to [NTSC]
●●If no image appears on the TV with [AUTO], switch the setting to a constant setting other than
[AUTO] to set a format supported by your TV. (Please read the operating instructions for the TV.)
■■ TZ100/TZ101
[HDMI Info Display (Rec)]
Set whether or not to display information when recording a picture on the camera while
monitoring it on a TV, etc., connected to the camera via an HDMI micro cable.
Settings
83
[ON]
The camera display is output as is.
[OFF]
Only images are output.
SQW0550
Basics
Using the [Setup] menu
For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→65).
[TV Connection] (continued)
■■[VIERA Link]
Enable automatic linking with other VIERA Link-compatible devices, and operability with
a VIERA remote control when connecting via an HDMI micro cable. (→350)
Settings
[ON]
Operations may be performed via the remote control of the VIERA Link-compatible
device.
•• Not all operations will be available.
•• Operability of the camera’s own buttons will be limited.
[OFF]
Operations must be performed via the camera’s own buttons.
[Menu Resume]
Save the last operated menu position.
Settings: [ON] / [OFF]
[Menu Background]
Set the background colour for the menu screen.
[Menu Information]
Explanations of the menu items and settings are displayed on the menu screen.
Settings: [ON] / [OFF]
[Language]
Change display language.
Set the language displayed on the screen.
••If you set a different language by mistake, select [
desired language.
84
] from the menu icons to set the
SQW0550
Basics
Using the [Setup] menu
For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→65).
[Version Disp.]
Check the firmware version of the camera.
●●When you press [MENU/SET] while the version is displayed, software information for this unit,
such as the licence, is displayed.
[Exposure Comp. Reset]
If the recording mode is changed or the camera is turned off, the exposure compensation
(brightness) setting is reset.
Settings: [ON] / [OFF]
[Self Timer Auto Off]
The self-timer is cancelled if the unit is turned off.
Settings: [ON] / [OFF]
[No.Reset]
Reset picture file numbers. (The folder number is updated and the file number starts from
0001.)
••To reset folder number to 100:
First, format the card, and reset the file numbers using [No.Reset]. Then, select [Yes]
on the folder number reset screen.
●●A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned.
Numbers cannot be reset once folder number reaches 999. In this case, save all necessary
pictures to your computer, and format the card (→38).
85
SQW0550
Basics
Using the [Setup] menu
For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→65).
[Reset]
The following settings are reset to the default:
–– Recording settings (except for [Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings) and drive
mode
–– Recording settings ([Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings)
–– Setup/custom settings
●●When the setup/custom settings are reset, the following settings are also reset:
•• The [World Time] setting
•• The [Travel Date] setting (Departure date, Return date, [Location])
•• The settings of [Rotate Disp.] and [Picture Sort] in the [Playback] menu
●●Folder numbers and clock settings will not be reset.
[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]
Returns [Wi-Fi] settings to default settings.
(Excluding [LUMIX CLUB])
[Demo Mode]
You can try focusing, peaking, etc. in [Post Focus], with the image picture.
[Format]
Format (initialise) a memory card. (→38)
86
SQW0550
Basics
Entering Text
Use the cursor button to enter names with the Face Recognition function and in [Profile
Setup] (babies and pets), or to register locations in [Travel Date] etc.
••Example of operation for displaying a screen:
→
[Rec] → [Profile Setup] → [SET] → [Baby1] → [Name] → [SET]
1
2
Use
to select characters
Press [MENU/SET] several times until the
desired character is displayed
••[
]: Enter a blank.
■■To change the character type
••Press [DISP.] button
••Use
to select [
] and press [MENU/SET]
■■To continue entering characters
••Use
to select [ ] and press [MENU/SET]
••Move the zoom lever toward T side
•• TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial counterclockwise.
•• TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial clockwise.
■■To edit text
Use
to select [
cursor to the text to edit
][
] and press [MENU/SET]. Then, move the
•• TZ100/TZ101
You can also use the zoom lever or rear dial to reposition the cursor.
•• TZ80/TZ81
You can also use the zoom lever or control dial to reposition the cursor.
Use
Use
3
to select [Delete] and press [MENU/SET]
to select the correct text, and press [MENU/SET]
When you are finished entering text, use
[Set] and press [MENU/SET]
to select
●●Only alphabetical characters and symbols can be entered.
●●A maximum of 30 characters can be entered (maximum of 9 characters when setting names in
[Face Recog.]).
●●A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for [
6 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.]).
87
], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [
] (maximum of
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures with automatic settings
(Intelligent Auto Mode)
Recording mode:
This mode is recommended for those who want to point and shoot as the camera
optimises settings to match the subject and recording environment.
(○: Available, –: Not available)
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
Intelligent Auto Mode
Defocus control
function
○
○
Setting the brightness
(exposure)
○
–
Setting the colour tone
○
Menus that can be set
1
Set mode dial to [
–
(→96)
]
TZ100/TZ101
••The camera will switch to either the most recently used
of Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.
(→95)
Following are the settings in effect at time of purchase.
TZ100/TZ101 : Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
TZ80/TZ81 : Intelligent Auto Mode
TZ80/TZ81
2
88
Point the camera at the subject
••When the camera identifies the optimal scene, the
icon for each scene turns blue for 2 seconds and then
changes to the normal red indication.
(Automatic Scene Detection)
50p
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)
Auto Focus, Face/Eye Detection, and Face Recognition
[AF Mode] is automatically set to [ ]. If you touch the subject, the camera switches to
[ ] and the AF tracking function starts operating.
You can also switch to [ ] by pressing [MENU/SET], going to the [Rec] menu, then
going to the [AF Mode] menu and selecting [ ] (tracking). Align the AF tracking area with
the subject and press the shutter button halfway to operate the AF tracking function.
For details about AF tracking, refer to (→151).
••In [
], [
], and [
], the camera adjusts the focus on the eye that is closest to this
unit and matches the exposure with the face. In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or Intelligent
Auto Mode, the eye to be focused on cannot be changed. (Face/Eye Detection)
••Automatic Scene Detection does not function until the focus is locked on a subject
during AF Tracking.
••When [Face Recog.] (→226) is set to [ON] and if the camera recognises a face similar
to a registered face, [R] is displayed on the upper right corner of the [
], [
], and
[
] icons.
89
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)
Flash
TZ100/TZ101
When the flash is open, the camera automatically sets [ ], [
] (Auto/Red-Eye
Reduction), [
], or [ ] based on the type of subject and brightness.
TZ80/TZ81
When is pressed and [
] (i auto) selected, the camera will automatically be set to
[ ], [
] (Auto/Red-Eye Reduction), [
], or [ ], depending on the type of subject
and brightness.
●●When [
] or [
] is displayed, the [Red-Eye Removal] function is activated to automatically
detect red-eye and correct the picture data.
●●When [ ] or [ ] is selected, the shutter speed is reduced.
Automatic Scene Detection
When taking pictures
[i-Portrait]
[i-Scenery]
[i-Macro]
[i-Night Portrait]*1
[i-Night Scenery]
[i-Handheld Night
Shot]*2
[i-Food]
[i-Baby]*3
[i-Sunset]
When scene does not correspond to any of the above
*1Displayed only when using flash.
*2When [iHandheld Night Shot] is [ON]. (→91)
*3When children (that are registered in the camera with Face Recognition) under 3 years old are
recognised.
••When the camera identifies [ ] as the optimal scene and if the camera determines
that jitter is reduced by the use of a tripod or by other means, a shutter speed that
is slower than usual is selected. After pressing the shutter button, do not move the
camera while recording.
••When recording 4K photos or when recording using [Post Focus], Scene Detection
works the same way as when recording motion pictures.
When recording motion pictures
[i-Portrait]
[i-Scenery]
[i-Low Light]
[i-Macro]
When scene does not correspond to any of the above
●●Depending on recording conditions, different scene types may be determined for the same
subject.
90
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)
About Backlight Compensation
Backlight compensation is automatically activated in Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or
Intelligent Auto Mode. Backlight is a condition where a light shines from behind a subject.
When there is a backlight, the subject appears darker and the camera will automatically
attempt to correct it by increasing the brightness of the picture.
Taking pictures using a handheld camera
([iHandheld Night Shot])
Recording mode:
If a night scene is detected automatically while the unit is being handheld, [iHandheld
Night Shot] can record a still picture with less jitter and less noise without using a tripod
by combining a burst of pictures.
→
[Rec] → [iHandheld Night Shot] → [ON] / [OFF]
●●The angle of view becomes narrow slightly.
●●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.
●●When the camera is fixed in place on a tripod or by other means, [ ] will not be identified.
●●The flash is fixed to the [ ] (Forced Flash Off) setting.
●●This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• When using [Burst]
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When using [Auto Bracket]
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
], [
] or [ ]
•• When [Quality] is set to [
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]
91
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)
Combining pictures into a single still picture with rich
gradation ([iHDR])
Recording mode:
When there is, for example, strong contrast between the background and the subject,
[iHDR] records multiple still pictures with differing exposures and combines them to
create a single still picture rich in gradation.
[iHDR] is activated when required. When activated, [
] will be displayed on the screen.
→
[Rec] → [iHDR] → [ON] / [OFF]
●●The angle of view becomes narrow slightly.
●●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.
●●Since a burst of still pictures are combined after they have been recorded, it will be a few
moments before you can record another picture.
●●In the case of composition from a burst, afterimages may appear if the subject was moving.
●●This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• When recording using the flash
•• When using [Burst]
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When using [Auto Bracket]
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
], [
] or [ ]
•• When [Quality] is set to [
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]
92
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)
Defocusing the background (Defocus control function)
Recording mode:
You can easily set the blurriness of the background while checking the screen.
1 Press to display the setting screen
2
•• When in Intelligent Auto Plus mode, each press of switches between brightness (exposure)
setting operation (→94), blur control operation, and operation finish.
•• When in Intelligent Auto mode, each press of switches between blur control operation and
operation finish.
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to adjust the background defocusing condition
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to adjust the background defocusing condition
250
Strong defocusing
125
60
30
15
2.8
4.0
5.6
8.0
Slight defocusing
•• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.
■■With touch screen operations
Touch [ ]
Touch [ ] to display the setting screen
Drag the exposure meter to set the blurriness
•• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.
●●Pressing [Q.MENU/ ] button on the blurriness setting screen will cancel the setting.
●●In Intelligent Auto Mode ([ ] or [ ]), Auto Focus Mode is set to [ ]. The position of the AF
area can be set by touching the screen. (Its size cannot be changed)
93
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)
Recording images by changing the brightness (exposure) or
colour tone
Recording mode:
Setting brightness (exposure)
1
2
Press
button
•• Each press of switches between brightness (exposure) setting operation, blur control
operation (→93), and operation finish.
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to adjust brightness (exposure)
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to adjust brightness (exposure)
Setting colouring
1
TZ100/TZ101
Press
TZ80/TZ81
2
Press
to display the setting screen
to display the setting screen
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to adjust colour
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to adjust colour
•• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.
■■With touch screen operations
Touch [ ]
Touch the item you want to set
[ ]: Colouring
[ ]: Brightness (exposure)
Drag the slide bar to set
•• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.
94
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)
●●When [Exposure Comp. Reset] is set to [ON], the set brightness returns to standard (midpoint) if
the camera is turned off or the camera is changed to another recording mode. (→85)
●●The colour setting will return to the default level (centre point) when this unit is turned off or the
camera is switched to another Recording mode.
About Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode
■■Switching between Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode
1
2
3
4
Press [MENU/SET]
TZ100/TZ101
Press
Press
to select the [
] or [
] tab
•• TZ100/TZ101
Items can also be selected by rotating the rear dial.
•• TZ80/TZ81
Items can also be selected by rotating the control dial.
Use
to select [
] or [
] and press [MENU/SET]
It is also possible to display the
selection screen by touching the
Recording mode icon in recording
screen.
95
TZ80/TZ81
50p
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)
Available menus
You can set only the following menus.
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
Menu
Item
[Rec]
[Photo Style], [Aspect Ratio], [Picture Size], [Quality], [AF Mode],
[AFS/AFF/AFC], [Burst Rate], [4K PHOTO], [Auto Bracket], [Self Timer],
[Post Focus], [iHandheld Night Shot], [iHDR], [Time Lapse Shot],
[Stop Motion Animation], [Shutter Type], [Color Space]*, [Stabilizer],
[Face Recog.], [Profile Setup]
[Motion Picture]
[Photo Style], [Snap Movie], [Rec Format], [Rec Quality], [AF Mode],
[AFS/AFF/AFC], [Continuous AF], [Wind Noise Canceller], [Zoom Mic]
[Custom]
[Silent Mode], [Half Press Release], [Pinpoint AF Time]*, [Pinpoint AF Display]*,
[Focus/Release Priority], [AF+MF], [MF Assist], [MF Assist Display], [MF Guide],
[Peaking], [Histogram], [Guide Line], [Highlight], [Zebra Pattern],
[Monochrome Live View], [Constant Preview]*, [Dial Guide], [LVF Disp.Style],
[Monitor Disp. Style], [Rec Area], [Remaining Disp.], [Auto Review],
[Fn Button Set], [Zoom lever], [Zoom Resume], [Q.MENU]*, [Ring/Dial Set],
[Eye Sensor], [Touch Settings], [Touch Scroll], [Menu Guide]
[Setup]
All menu items can be set. (→76)
*
TZ100/TZ101
Intelligent Auto Mode
Menu
Item
[Rec]
[Aspect Ratio], [Picture Size], [AF Mode], [AFS/AFF/AFC], [Burst Rate],
[4K PHOTO], [Self Timer], [Post Focus], [iHandheld Night Shot], [iHDR],
[Time Lapse Shot], [Stop Motion Animation], [Face Recog.]
[Motion Picture]
[Snap Movie], [Rec Format], [Rec Quality], [AFS/AFF/AFC]
[Custom]
[Silent Mode], [Guide Line], [Remaining Disp.]
[Setup]
All menu items can be set. (→76)
96
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures after automatically setting the
aperture value and shutter speed (Programme AE Mode)
Recording mode:
Take pictures using automatic aperture values and shutter speed settings in accordance
with the brightness of a subject.
1
2
3
Set mode dial to [
]
Press the shutter button halfway
50p
••If the aperture value and shutter speed flash red, you do not have the correct
exposure.
TZ100/TZ101
While the numeric values are displayed
(approximately 10 seconds), rotate the
rear dial to change the values using
Programme Shift
••The operation can also be performed by rotating the
control ring. (→50)
••To cancel Programme Shift, either turn off the camera
or rotate the rear dial until the Programme Shift
indication turns off.
250
125
60
30
15
2.8
4.0
5.6
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Programme Shift indication
TZ80/TZ81
While the numeric values are displayed
(approximately 10 seconds), rotate the
control dial to change the values using
Programme Shift
••The operation can also be performed by rotating the
control ring. (→51)
••To cancel Programme Shift, either turn off the camera
or rotate the control dial until the Programme Shift
indication turns off.
••Programme Shift can easily be cancelled by setting a function button to [One Push
AE]. (→108)
97
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures after automatically setting the aperture value and shutter speed (Programme AE Mode)
••
••
TZ100/TZ101
The camera automatically removes noise when [Long Shtr NR] is set to [ON] and
the shutter speed is slow. Therefore, [Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] may
be displayed. (→144)
Although noise reduction requires the same time as the shutter speed for signal
processing, you can take sharp pictures.
TZ80/TZ81
The camera automatically removes noise when the shutter speed is slow.
Therefore, [Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] may be displayed.
Although noise reduction requires the same time as the shutter speed for signal
processing, you can take sharp pictures.
Enabling/disabling the exposure meter display
50p
→
[Custom] → [Expo.Meter] → [ON] / [OFF]
Exposure meter
●●When you set this function to [ON], an exposure meter is
displayed during Programme Shift, aperture setting, and
250 125
60
30
15
shutter speed operation.
2.8
4.0
5.6
●●Proper exposure is not possible in the range indicated in red.
●●If the exposure meter is not displayed, press the [DISP.]
button to switch the display of the monitor. (→53)
●●The exposure meter will turn off if no operation is performed for approximately
4 seconds.
98
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures after automatically setting the aperture value and shutter speed (Programme AE Mode)
About Programme Shift
The function for maintaining the same exposure (brightness) while changing the shutter
speed and aperture value combination is called “Programme Shift”. You can use
“Programme Shift” to take pictures by adjusting the shutter speed and aperture value
even in Programme AE Mode.
<Example of Programme Shift>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 (EV)
(Aperture value)
2.0
15
2.8
16
4.0
17
5.6
18
8.0
19
11
20
1
1/2
1/4
1/8
1/15
1/30
1/60
1/250
1/1000
1/4000 (Shutter speed)
1/125
1/500
1/2000
Programme Shift amount
Represents the aperture and shutter speed set automatically by the camera at each exposure
value.
Programme Shift diagram
Represents the range of the aperture and shutter speed combination you can change with
Programme Shift at each exposure value.
Programme Shift limit
Represents the range of the aperture and shutter speed you can select when you use
Programme Shift with the camera.
●●Programme Shift cannot be used in the following cases:
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
]
•• When ISO sensitivity is set to [
99
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and
shutter speed
Recording mode:
••The effect of the aperture value and shutter speed you have set is not applied to the
recording screen. To check the effect on the recording screen, use Preview Mode.
(→106)
••The brightness of the screen may vary from the actual pictures recorded. Check the
brightness of pictures using the playback screen.
•• TZ100/TZ101
The camera automatically removes noise when [Long Shtr NR] is set to [ON] and
the shutter speed is slow. Therefore, [Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] may be
displayed. (→144)
Although noise reduction requires the same time as the shutter speed for signal
processing, you can take sharp pictures.
•• TZ80/TZ81
The camera automatically removes noise when the shutter speed is slow. Therefore,
[Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] may be displayed.
Although noise reduction requires the same time as the shutter speed for signal
processing, you can take sharp pictures.
100
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed
Taking pictures by setting the aperture value
(Aperture-Priority AE Mode)
When the aperture value is increased, the range of depth in focus expands, and the
picture shows up clearly from the position of the camera to the background. When the
aperture value is reduced, the range of depth in focus shrinks, and the background can
get blurry.
1 Set mode dial to [ ]
2
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to set the aperture value
•• The operation can also be performed by rotating the control ring.
(→50)
•• When you rotate the control ring or rear dial, an exposure meter
is displayed. If the correct exposure is not achieved, the numeric
values of the aperture are shown in red.
Aperture values
that can be set*1
F2.8 - F8.0
Shutter speed set (seconds)
60 - 1/2000
(When the mechanical shutter is used)
1 - 1/16000
(When the electronic shutter is used)
250
125
60
30
15
2.8
4.0
5.6
8.0
Exposure meter
Aperture value
*1You may not be able to select some values depending on zoom
position.
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to set the aperture value
•• The operation can also be performed by rotating the control ring.
(→51)
•• When you rotate the control ring or control dial, an exposure
meter is displayed. If the correct exposure is not achieved, the
numeric values of the aperture are shown in red.
Aperture values
that can be set*1
F3.3 - F8.0
Shutter speed set (seconds)
4*2 - 1/2000
(When the mechanical shutter is used)
1*2 - 1/16000
(When the electronic shutter is used)
*1You may not be able to select some values depending on zoom
position.
*2 Varies depending on the setting of ISO sensitivity.
●●If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the numeric
values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red.
101
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed
Taking pictures by setting the shutter speed
(Shutter-Priority AE Mode)
When you increase the shutter speed, you can reduce jitter when recording a subject.
When you decrease the shutter speed, the subject’s movement is shown.
1
2
Set mode dial to [
]
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to set the shutter speed
•• The operation can also be performed by rotating the control ring.
(→50)
•• When you rotate the control ring or rear dial, an exposure meter
is displayed. If the correct exposure is not achieved, the numeric
values of the aperture are shown in red.
Shutter speeds that can be set (seconds)
Aperture value
set
60 - 1/2000
(When the mechanical shutter is used)
1 - 1/16000
(When the electronic shutter is used)
8
15
30
5.6
4.0
2.8
60
125
Exposure meter
Shutter speed
F2.8 - F8.0
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to set the shutter speed
•• The operation can also be performed by rotating the control ring.
(→51)
•• When you rotate the control ring or control dial, an exposure
meter is displayed. If the correct exposure is not achieved, the
numeric values of the aperture are shown in red.
Shutter speeds that can be set (seconds)
4* - 1/2000
(When the mechanical shutter is used)
1* - 1/16000
(When the electronic shutter is used)
Aperture value
set
F3.3 - F8.0
*Varies depending on the setting of ISO sensitivity.
●●If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the numeric
values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red.
●●If you switch the recording mode to Shutter-Priority AE Mode when ISO sensitivity is set to [
ISO sensitivity will change to [AUTO].
●●We recommend using a tripod or self-timer when the shutter speed is slow.
102
],
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed
Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed
(Manual Exposure Mode)
Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed.
1 Set mode dial to [ ]
2
Exposure meter
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to set the shutter speed and the
aperture value
•• You can switch between the shutter speed setting operation and
the aperture value setting operation each time is pressed.
•• You can also set the aperture value with the control ring and
the shutter speed with the rear dial. You can switch the setting
operation of control ring and rear dial by pressing .
Aperture values that
can be set*1
F2.8 - F8.0
Shutter speeds that can be set
(seconds)
T (Time),
60 - 1/2000
(When the mechanical shutter is used)
1 - 1/16000
(When the electronic shutter is used)
2
4
8
15
30
2.8
4.0
5.6
8.0
6
Manual
Exposure Assist
Shutter speed
Aperture value
*1You may not be able to select some values depending on zoom
position.
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to set the shutter speed and the
aperture value
•• You can switch between the shutter speed setting operation and
the aperture value setting operation each time is pressed.
•• You can also set the aperture value with the control ring and the
shutter speed with the control dial. You can switch the setting
operation of control ring and control dial by pressing .
Aperture values that
can be set*1
F3.3 - F8.0
Shutter speeds that can be set
(seconds)
4*2 - 1/2000
(When the mechanical shutter is used)
1*2 - 1/16000
(When the electronic shutter is used)
*1You may not be able to select some values depending on zoom
position.
*2Varies depending on the setting of ISO sensitivity.
103
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed
●● TZ100/TZ101
When you rotate the control ring or rear dial, an exposure meter is displayed.
●●
TZ80/TZ81
When you rotate the control ring or control dial, an exposure meter is displayed.
●●If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the numeric
values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red.
●●If you switch the recording mode to Manual Exposure Mode when ISO sensitivity is set to [ ],
ISO sensitivity will change to [AUTO].
●●We recommend using a tripod or self-timer when the shutter speed is slow.
Optimising the ISO sensitivity for the shutter speed and aperture
value
When the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], the camera sets the ISO sensitivity
automatically so that the exposure will be appropriate for the shutter speed and aperture
value.
••Depending on recording conditions, an appropriate exposure may not be set or the ISO
sensitivity may become higher.
Manual exposure assist (estimate)
Shows pictures with standard brightness (appropriate exposure).
Shows brighter pictures. For the appropriate exposure, either use a faster shutter
speed or increase aperture value.
Shows darker pictures. For the appropriate exposure, either use a slower shutter
speed or reduce aperture value.
104
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed
TZ100/TZ101
About [T] (Time)
If you set the shutter speed to [T], the shutter stays open when the shutter button is
pressed fully. (Approximately up to 120 seconds)
The shutter closes if you press the shutter button again. Use this function when you
want to keep the shutter open for an extended period, for example, to record pictures of
fireworks or night scenes.
••When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [T], use a sufficiently charged
battery. (→25)
••Manual exposure assist is not displayed.
••When ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], ISO sensitivity will change to [125].
••You cannot use this function when the electronic shutter is used.
●●When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to T (time), we recommend
using remote recording (→312) with a tripod or smartphone as a remote shutter
release, in order to prevent jitter.
●●When you take still pictures with the shutter speed set to T (time), the pictures
may have higher noise levels. If you want to suppress noise, we recommend
taking pictures by setting [Long Shtr NR] to [ON] in the [Rec] menu. (→144)
TZ100/TZ101 Enabling/disabling the preview of the selected aperture
value and shutter speed effects on the recording screen
→
[Custom] → [Constant Preview] → [ON] / [OFF]
●●This function is disabled when the flash is used. Close the flash.
●●You can use this function only in Manual Exposure Mode.
105
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed
Checking the effects of the aperture value and shutter speed
(Preview Mode)
Recording mode:
You can use Preview Mode to check the effects of the selected aperture value and shutter
speed.
••Checking the effect of the selected aperture value: This enables you to check the
depth of field (focus range) by physically narrowing the lens aperture blades to the
aperture value used for the actual recording.
••Checking the effect of the selected shutter speed: This allows you to check motion
in a scene by displaying the screen at the shutter speed used for the actual recording.
When the shutter speed is increased, the screen is displayed like a frame dropping.
Use this function to check the effect when you want to capture an image in a scene by
stopping the motion, for example, when you take a picture of water flowing.
1
Assign [Preview] to the function button (→70)
2
Press the [Fn3] button to switch the confirmation screen
•• The following step is an example of assigning [Preview] to the [Fn3] button.
•• Every time you press the [Fn3] button, the screen switches.
Normal recording screen
Aperture effect preview
screen
Effect of aperture value: ○
Effect of shutter speed: –
Fn3 Shtr Speed Effect added.
106
Shutter speed effect
preview screen
Effect of aperture value: ○
Effect of shutter speed: ○
Fn3 Preview completed.
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed
Depth of field characteristic
Recording
conditions
Aperture value
Small
Large
Focal length
Telephoto
Wide-angle
Distance to a subject
Depth of field
(Focus range)
Close
Shallow (narrow)
Example:
To take a picture by
deliberately blurring the
background
Far
Deep (wide)
Example:
To take a picture by adjusting
the focus while including the
background
●●You can take a picture even when Preview Mode is activated.
●●The range in which you can check the effect of a selected shutter speed is between 8 seconds
and 1/16000 seconds.
●●This mode cannot be used with [
107
] ([4K Pre-Burst]) of 4K Photo.
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed
Easily set aperture / shutter speed for suitable exposure
(One Push AE)
Recording mode:
When the exposure setting is too bright or too dark, you can use one push AE to achieve
a suitable exposure setting.
How to tell if the exposure is not adequate
••If the aperture values and shutter speed blink red when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
••If the Manual Exposure Assistance is anything other than [
] when in Manual
Exposure Mode. For details about the Manual Exposure Assistance, refer to (→104).
1
2
Assign [One Push AE] to the function button (→70)
(When exposure is not adequate) Press the function button
Blinks red
Exposure meter
15
30
60
125
250
2.8
4.0
5.6
Change to appropriate
exposure
•• The exposure meter is not displayed in Creative Control Mode.
•• In the following cases, suitable exposure cannot be set.
–– When the subject is extremely dark and it is not possible to achieve adequate exposure by
changing the aperture value or shutter speed
–– When recording using the flash
–– Preview Mode (→106)
108
SQW0550
Recording mode
Recording panorama pictures
(Panorama Shot Mode)
Recording mode:
Consecutive photos taken while the camera is moved are combined to form a panorama.
1
2
3
Set mode dial to [
]
Press the shutter button halfway to focus
Press the shutter button fully and pan the camera in a small
circular motion to the recording direction to start recording
Taking pictures from left to right
Horizontal/vertical
guide line
Image size: [STANDARD]
Image size: [WIDE]
Recording direction and
progress status (approximate)
•• Pan the camera at a constant speed.
•• You may not be able to take pictures successfully if you move the camera too quickly or too
slowly.
4
109
Press the shutter button fully again to end recording
••You can also end recording if you stop panning the camera while taking pictures.
••Recording can also be ended by moving the camera to the end of the guide.
SQW0550
Recording mode
Recording panorama pictures (Panorama Shot Mode)
■■Changing the recording direction and angle of view (image size) of panorama
pictures
→
[Rec] → [Panorama Settings]
[Direction]
Sets the recording direction.
]/[
]/[ ]/[ ]
[
[Picture Size]
Sets the angle of view (image size).
[STANDARD]: Gives priority to the image quality.
[WIDE]: Gives priority to the angle of view.
•• When the same angle of view is recorded, [STANDARD] results in a larger
number of recording pixels.
••The number of recording pixels per horizontal line and vertical line of a panorama
picture varies depending on the picture size, recording direction and number of
stitched pictures. The maximum number of recording pixels is as follows:
Image size
[STANDARD]
[WIDE]
Recording direction
Horizontal
Resolution
Vertical Resolution
Horizontal
8176 pixels
1920 pixels
Vertical
2560 pixels
7680 pixels
Horizontal
8176 pixels
960 pixels
Vertical
1280 pixels
7680 pixels
Tips
●●Pan the camera in the recording direction as steadily as possible.
(If the camera shakes too much, it may not be able to take pictures or may end up
creating a narrow (small) panorama picture.)
Pan the camera to a point slightly ahead of the
point that you want to take.
(However, the last frame is not recorded to the
end.)
110
SQW0550
Recording mode
Recording panorama pictures (Panorama Shot Mode)
■■About panorama picture playback
Pressing will start scrolling playback automatically in the
same direction as the recording.
••The following operations can be performed during
scrolling playback.
Start panorama playback / Pause*
Stop
*When the playback is paused, you can scroll forwards and backwards by dragging the screen.
When the scroll bar is touched, the playback position jumps to the touched position.
●●The zoom position is fixed to the W end.
●●The focus, exposure and White Balance are all fixed to optimal values for the first picture.
If the focusing or brightness of pictures recorded as part of a panorama picture after the first
picture are significantly different from those of the first picture, the panorama picture as a whole
(when all pictures are stitched together) may not have consistent focus and brightness.
●●Since several pictures are stitched together to create a panorama picture, some subjects may be
distorted or the joining portions of successively taken pictures that are stitched may be noticeable.
●●[Shutter Type] is fixed to [Electronic Shutter].
●●Panorama pictures may not be created or pictures may not be recorded properly when taking
pictures of the following subjects or when taking pictures in the following recording conditions:
•• Subjects that have a continuous monotone or pattern (sky, beach, etc.)
•• Moving subjects (person, pet, vehicle, waves, or flowers swaying in the wind, etc.)
•• Subjects whose colours or patterns change quickly (such as an image appearing on a display)
•• Dark locations
•• Locations with a flickering light source (fluorescent lamp, candle light, etc.)
111
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures according to the scene
(Scene Guide Mode)
Recording mode:
If you select a scene to suit the subject and recording conditions with reference to the
example images, the camera will set optimal exposure, colour, and focus, allowing you to
record in a manner appropriate to the scene.
1
2
Set mode dial to [
3
Press [MENU/SET]
Press
]
to select the scene
••The scene can also be selected by dragging an
example image or the slide bar.
●●It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording mode icon in recording screen.
●●Depending on the [Menu Guide] setting in the [Custom] menu,
50
8
either the selection screen or the recording screen is displayed
when the Mode Dial is switched. (→116)
■■Switching the scene selection screen display
Press the [DISP.] button to switch the display
•• When it is set to the guide display, detailed explanations and tips for each scene are displayed.
Normal display
112
Guide display
List display
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)
●●In the following scene, the recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay
compared to normal recording.
[Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Soft Image of a Flower]
●●To change the Scene Guide Mode, select the [ ] tab on the menu screen, select [Scene
Switch], and then press [MENU/SET]. You can return to step 2 on (→112).
●●The following items cannot be set in Scene Guide Mode because the camera automatically
adjusts them to the optimal setting.
–– Items other than the picture quality adjustment in [Photo Style], ISO sensitivity, [Metering Mode],
[Highlight Shadow]*, [HDR] and [Multi Exp.]*
*
TZ100/TZ101
●● TZ100/TZ101
Although White Balance is fixed to [AWB] for certain types of scene, you can fine tune the White
Balance or use White Balance bracketing by pressing the cursor button on the recording
screen. (→137, 138)
●●
TZ80/TZ81
Although White Balance is fixed to [AWB] for certain types of scenes, you can fine tune the White
Balance or use White Balance bracketing by pressing [MENU/SET], going to the [Rec] menu, and
selecting [White Balance]. (→137, 138)
For the setting procedures for the Scene Guide Mode, refer to (→112)
1: [Clear Portrait]
●●The more the zoom is drawn towards T side and the closer the camera is brought to the subject, the
greater the effect will be.
2: [Silky Skin]
●●The more the zoom is drawn towards T side and the closer the camera is brought to the subject, the
greater the effect will be.
●●If a part of the background etc. is a colour close to skin colour, this part is also smoothed.
●●This mode may not be effective when there is insufficient brightness.
3: [Backlit Softness]
4: [Clear in Backlight]
●● TZ100/TZ101
Open the flash.
●●White saturation can occur if the subject is too close.
●●Flash pictures taken closer or beyond the flash’s rated distance may appear too bright or too dark.
113
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)
For the setting procedures for the Scene Guide Mode, refer to (→112)
5: [Relaxing Tone]
6: [Sweet Child’s Face]
●●When you touch the face, a still picture is recorded with the focus and exposure set for the touched
location.
●●The more the zoom is drawn towards T side and the closer the camera is brought to the subject, the
greater the effect will be.
7: [Distinct Scenery]
8: [Bright Blue Sky]
9: [Romantic Sunset Glow]
10: [Vivid Sunset Glow]
11: [Glistening Water]
●●Star filter used in this mode may cause glistening effects on the objects other than water surface.
12: [Clear Nightscape]
●●Tripod, self-timer recommended.
●●The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a
malfunction.
●●Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.
13: [Cool Night Sky]
●●Tripod, self-timer recommended.
●●The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a
malfunction.
●●Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.
114
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)
For the setting procedures for the Scene Guide Mode, refer to (→112)
14: [Warm Glowing Nightscape]
●●Tripod, self-timer recommended.
●●The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a
malfunction.
●●Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.
15: [Artistic Nightscape]
●●Tripod, self-timer recommended.
●●The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a
malfunction.
●●Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.
16: [Glittering Illuminations]
●●Tripod, self-timer recommended.
●●The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a
malfunction.
●●Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.
17: [Handheld Night Shot]
●●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.
●●The angle of view becomes narrow slightly.
18: [Clear Night Portrait]
●● TZ100/TZ101
Open the flash.
●●Tripod, self-timer recommended.
●●When [Clear Night Portrait] is selected, keep the subject still for about 1 second after taking the
picture.
●●The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a
malfunction.
●●Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.
19: [Soft Image of a Flower]
●●Tripod, self-timer recommended.
●●For close-up recording, we recommend that you avoid using the flash.
●●When a subject is close to the camera, the effective focus range is significantly narrowed. Therefore,
if the distance between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the subject, it may
become difficult to focus on it again.
●●When you take pictures at close range, the resolution of the periphery of the picture may decrease
slightly. This is not a malfunction.
115
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)
For the setting procedures for the Scene Guide Mode, refer to (→112)
20: [Appetizing Food]
●●The more the zoom is drawn towards T side and the closer the camera is brought to the subject, the
greater the effect will be.
●●Tripod, self-timer recommended.
●●For close-up recording, we recommend that you avoid using the flash.
21: [Cute Dessert]
●●The more the zoom is drawn towards T side and the closer the camera is brought to the subject, the
greater the effect will be.
●●Tripod, self-timer recommended.
●●For close-up recording, we recommend that you avoid using the flash.
22: [Freeze Animal Motion]
●●Default [AF Assist Lamp] setting is [OFF]. (→164)
23: [Clear Sports Shot]
24: [Monochrome]
Displaying/not displaying the selection screen when the mode dial is
switched to [ ]/[ ]
→
[Custom] → [Menu Guide]
[ON]:Displays the selection screen.
[OFF]:Displays the recording screen of the currently selected mode.
116
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking Pictures with different picture effects
(Creative Control Mode)
Recording mode:
This mode records with additional picture effects. You can set the effects to be applied to
a picture by selecting a sample picture and checking them simultaneously on the screen.
1
2
Set mode dial to [
Press
(filters)
Preview display
]
to select the picture effect
••You can also select the picture effects (filters) by
touching the example images.
3
Press [MENU/SET]
●●It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording mode icon in recording screen.
●●Depending on the [Menu Guide] setting in the [Custom] menu,
50
either the selection screen or the recording screen is displayed
when the Mode Dial is switched. (→116)
■■Switching the display of a selection screen for applying picture effects (Filter)
Press the [DISP.] button to switch the display
•• When it is set to the guide display, explanations for each picture effect are displayed.
Normal display
117
Guide display
List display
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)
●●In the following picture effect, the recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight
delay compared to normal recording.
[Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],
[Sunshine]
●●[White Balance] will be fixed to [AWB] and ISO sensitivity to [AUTO].
●●The following menu items can be set in the [ ] menu.
–– [Filter Effect]: Allows you to set the picture effect (filter). (→131)
–– [Simultaneous record w/o filter]: Allows you to set the camera to take a
picture with and without an picture effect simultaneously. (→132)
Adjusting the picture effects according to your preferences
You can easily adjust the setting conditions (such as degree and colouring of an effect) of
the picture effects according to your preferences.
1
2
Press
to display the setting screen
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to adjust the setting conditions of
the picture effects
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to adjust the setting conditions
of the picture effects
•• The settings that can be adjusted vary depending on the selected
picture effect.
•• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.
] appears on the screen.
•• When you select picture effects, [
•• If you do not want to change the current setting, select the centre
point (standard) in the adjustment level bar.
Picture effect
[Expressive]
[Retro]
[Old Days]
[High Key]
[Low Key]
118
Items that can be set
Subdued colouring
Yellowish colouring
Low contrast
Pinkish colouring
Reddish colouring
Vividness
Colouring
Contrast
Colouring
Colouring
Gaudy colouring
Reddish colouring
High contrast
Light-bluish colouring
Bluish colouring
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)
Picture effect
[Sepia]
[Monochrome]
[Dynamic Monochrome]
[Rough Monochrome]
[Silky Monochrome]
[Impressive Art]
[High Dynamic]
[Cross Process]
Items that can be set
Low contrast
Yellowish colouring
Low contrast
Contrast
Colouring
Contrast
High contrast
Bluish colouring
High contrast
Grainy picture effect
Strong grainy picture effect
Weak grainy picture effect
Degree of defocusing
Strong defocusing
Slight defocusing
Black & white
Black & white
Vividness
Vividness
Gaudy colouring
Gaudy colouring
Colouring
Greenish colouring / Bluish colouring /
Yellowish colouring / Reddish colouring
•• TZ100/TZ101
Select the desired colour tone by rotating
the rear dial, and press [MENU/SET].
•• TZ80/TZ81
Select the desired colour tone by rotating
the control dial, and press [MENU/SET].
[Toy Effect]
[Toy Pop]
[Bleach Bypass]
[Miniature Effect]
Orangish colouring
Colouring
Bluish colouring
Range in which peripheral brightness is reduced
Large
Small
Low contrast
Subdued colouring
Contrast
Vividness
High contrast
Gaudy colouring
•• For details about [Miniature Effect] (→122)
[Soft Focus]
[Fantasy]
119
Degree of defocusing
Strong defocusing
Slight defocusing
Subdued colouring
Vividness
Gaudy colouring
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)
Picture effect
[Star Filter]
[One Point Color]
Items that can be set
Length of the rays of light
Rays of light is short
Rays of light is long
Number of the rays of light
Smaller
Larger
Angle of the rays of light
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right
Amount of colour retained
Leaves a large amount of
Leaves a small amount of
colour
colour
•• For details about [One Point Color] (→123)
[Sunshine]
Colouring
Yellowish colouring / Reddish colouring /
Bluish colouring / Whitish colouring
•• TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to select colouring,
and press [MENU/SET].
•• TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to select colouring,
and press [MENU/SET].
•• For details about [Sunshine] (→123)
120
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)
Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus control function)
You can easily set the blurriness of the background while checking the screen.
1 Press to display the setting screen
•• Each press of switches between brightness (exposure) setting operation (below), blur control
operation, and operation finish.
2
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to set
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to set
250
•• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.
•• Pressing [Q.MENU/ ] button on the blurriness setting screen
will cancel the setting.
125
60
30
15
2.8
4.0
5.6
8.0
●●This function is not available in the following case:
•• [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
Setting brightness (exposure)
1
2
Press
to display the setting screen
•• Each press of switches between brightness (exposure) setting operation, blur control
operation (above), and operation finish.
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to set
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to set
■■Change the settings by using the touch screen
Touch [ ]
Touch the item you want to set
[ ]: Adjusting the picture effect
[ ]: Degree of defocusing
[ ]: Brightness (exposure)
Drag the slide bar to set
•• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.
121
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)
[Miniature Effect]
■■Defocusing a picture
You can create the impression of a diorama by intentionally creating a blurred area and
focusing area using [Miniature Effect]. You can set the recording direction (direction of
blurred area), position and size of the focusing area.
After touching [
Press
or
], touch [ ]
to move the focusing area (frame)
•• You can also move the in-focus portion by touching the screen on
the recording screen.
] allows you to set the recording orientation
•• Touching [
(defocus orientation).
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to select the size of the focusing area
(frame)
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to select the size of the focusing
area (frame)
•• On the touch screen, spread (pinch out) your 2 fingers to zoom
in, and pinch (pinch in) your 2 fingers to zoom out. (→61)
•• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is
restored.
Press [MENU/SET]
●●No audio is recorded for motion pictures.
●●When a motion picture is recorded, the finished recording will be approximately 1/8th of the actual
recorded time period. (If you record a motion picture for 8 minutes, the resulting motion picture
recording time will be approximately 1 minute.) The recordable time displayed on the camera is
approx. 8 times of the actual recording time. When the Recording mode is changed, be sure to
check the recordable time.
●●If you stop recording motion pictures too soon, the camera may continue recording until a certain
time. Hold the camera until the camera stops recording.
●●If [MF] is selected for the focus mode, move the focusing area to the position at which the focus
has been adjusted.
122
SQW0550
Recording mode
Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)
[One Point Color]
■■Select the colour to be retained
After touching [ ], touch [ ]
Select the colour to be retained with
[MENU/SET]
and press
•• You can also select it by touch operations.
•• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is
restored.
●●The selected colour may not be retained for some subjects.
[Sunshine]
■■Setting the light source
After touching [ ], touch [ ]
Press
to move the centre of the light source to a different position
•• The position of the light source can also be moved by touching the screen.
Tips on positioning the centre of the light source
You can move the centre of the light source to a point outside the image to obtain a
more natural finish.
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to adjust the size of the light source
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to adjust the size of the light source
•• On the touch screen, spread (pinch out) your 2 fingers to zoom in, and pinch (pinch in) your 2
fingers to zoom out.
•• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is restored.
Press [MENU/SET]
123
SQW0550
Recording mode
Recording motion pictures by setting the aperture
value/shutter speed (Creative Video Mode)
Recording mode:
You can record motion pictures by manually setting the aperture value and shutter speed.
1
2
3
Set mode dial to [
]
Set the menu
→
Press
[Motion Picture] → [Exposure Mode]
to select [P], [A], [S] or [M], and press [MENU/SET]
••The operation for changing the aperture value or shutter speed is the same as the
operation for setting the mode dial to [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ].
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording mode icon in recording screen.
4
5
50
Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to start
recording
Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to stop
recording
●●About aperture value
•• To record motion pictures with a sharp focus on both subject and background, set the aperture
value to a higher number. To record motion pictures with a defocused background, set a lower
number.
●●About the shutter speed
•• To record a sharp motion picture of a fast-moving subject, set a faster shutter speed. To record
a motion picture with a trailing effect for a subject’s movements, set a slower shutter speed.
•• When you manually set a faster shutter speed, the screen noise may increase due to the higher
sensitivity.
•• When you record a subject in an extremely bright place or under fluorescent or LED lighting
fixtures, etc., the colours and screen brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear
on the screen. If this happens, we recommend changing the Recording mode or manually
adjusting the shutter speed to 1/60 seconds or 1/100 seconds.
●● TZ100/TZ101
When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M], [AUTO] of the ISO sensitivity will switch to [125].
●●
TZ80/TZ81
When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M], [AUTO] of the ISO sensitivity will switch to [80].
●●Drive mode settings are disabled.
124
SQW0550
Recording mode
Recording motion pictures by setting the aperture value/shutter speed (Creative Video Mode)
Recording Slow Motion Pictures ([High Speed Video])
Slow motion pictures can be recorded by performing recording at a super high speed.
When these recordings are played back, the motion is displayed slowly.
••To record pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→37)
1 Set mode dial to [ ]
2
3
Set the menu
→
TZ100/TZ101
Use
to select [ON], and press [MENU/SET]
[100fps/FHD]
TZ80/TZ81
Use
4
5
[Motion Picture] → [High Speed Video]
Recording is done at 100 frames/second with [FHD] in [MP4].
to select motion picture quality, and press [MENU/SET]
[200fps/VGA]
Recording is done at 200 frames/second with [VGA] in [MP4].
•• The angle of view becomes narrower.
[100fps/HD]
Recording is done at 100 frames/second with [HD] in [MP4].
Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to start recording
Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to stop recording
●●No sound is recorded.
●●Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 7 minutes and 29 seconds or
the file size exceeds 4 GB. (Recording can be performed up to 29 minutes and 56 seconds if
converted to playback time.)
●●The settings for the focus, zoom, exposure and White Balance are fixed to the settings specified
when recording was started.
●●Flickering or horizontal stripes may appear while recording under fluorescent lighting.
125
SQW0550
Recording mode
Recording motion pictures by setting the aperture value/shutter speed (Creative Video Mode)
Minimising operational sounds during motion picture
recording
The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is
operated during the recording of a motion picture. Using touch icons allows silent
operation while recording motion pictures.
1 Set the menu
→
2
3
4
5
Use
[Motion Picture] → [Silent Operation]
to select [ON]
Start recording
Touch [
]
Touch icon
Zoom
Aperture value
Shutter speed
Exposure Compensation
ISO sensitivity
6
7
Drag the slide bar to set
•• The speed of the operation varies depending on the position
you touch.
[
]/[
]
Changes the setting slowly
[
]/[
]
Changes the setting quickly
Stop recording
●●Cannot be used during [High Speed Video] recording.
126
SQW0550
Recording mode
Registering your own settings and recording
(Custom Mode)
Recording mode:
You can register the current camera settings as custom settings. If you then record in
Custom Mode, you can use the registered settings.
••Initial setting of the Programme AE Mode is registered as the custom settings initially.
Registering your own settings ([Cust.Set Mem.])
To allow recording using the same settings, up to 3 sets of current camera settings can be
registered using [Cust.Set Mem.]. ([
], [
], [
])
Preparations
Select the recording mode you wish to register and set the [Rec] menu, [Motion Picture] menu,
[Setup] menu, etc.
1
Set the menu
→
[Custom] → [Cust.Set Mem.]
to select custom set for registration and press [MENU/SET]
2 Use
●●The following menu items are not registered as custom settings.
[Rec] menu
•• Data registered with [Face Recog.]
•• The [Profile Setup] setting
[Custom] menu
•• [Touch Scroll]
•• [Menu Guide]
127
[Setup] menu
•• All menus
[Playback] menu
•• [Rotate Disp.]
•• [Picture Sort]
SQW0550
Recording mode
Registering your own settings and recording (Custom Mode)
Recording using registered custom set
1
Set mode dial to [
]
•• The custom set you used last time will be called up.
■■To change a custom set
Set mode dial to [ ]
Press [MENU/SET] to bring up the menu
Press
to select the custom set you want to use, and press [MENU/SET]
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording mode icon in recording screen.
•• The settings are switched to those settings you selected for the
custom set.
50p
50p
Changing the registered content
Even if the menu settings are changed temporarily when the mode dial has been set to
[ ], the currently registered settings will remain unchanged.
To change the currently registered settings, overwrite the registered data using [Cust.Set
Mem.] on the [Custom] menu.
128
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Adjusting the picture quality with effects
[Photo Style]
Recording mode:
You can adjust the colours and picture quality according to the concept of the picture that
you want to create.
→
[Rec] → [Photo Style]
[Standard]
Standard setting.
[Vivid]*
Setting with slightly high contrast and saturation.
[Natural]*
Setting with slightly low contrast.
[Monochrome]
Setting that creates a picture using monochrome shades of grey only,
such as black and white.
[Scenery]*
Setting that creates a picture using vivid colours for the blue sky and
green.
[Portrait]*
Setting that produces the look of a healthy complexion.
[Custom]*
Setting for using colours and picture quality that were registered in
advance.
* This setting is not available in Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.
●●In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, the setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched
to another Recording mode or this unit is turned on and off.
●●Only picture quality adjustment can be set in the Scene Guide Mode.
129
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Adjusting the picture quality with effects [Photo Style]
■■Adjusting the picture quality
••Picture quality cannot be adjusted in the Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.
Press
to select the type of Photo Style
Press
to select an item and press
[Contrast]
[Sharpness]
[Noise Reduction]
[Saturation]*1
[Color Tone]*1
[Filter Effect]*2
Standard
to adjust
[+]
[–]
[+]
[–]
Increases the contrast in a picture.
Decreases the contrast in a picture.
Enhances the outlines in a picture.
Softens the outlines in a picture.
Increases the noise reduction effect to reduce noise.
[+]
This setting may slightly lower the resolution.
Lowers the noise reduction effect to achieve a picture
[–]
quality with clearer resolution.
[+]
Gaudy colouring
[–]
Subdued colouring
[+]
Bluish colouring
[–]
Yellowish colouring
Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: Low)
[Yellow]
Records a blue sky clearly.
Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: Medium)
[Orange]
Records a blue sky with vibrant colours.
Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: High)
[Red]
Records a blue sky with even more vibrant colours.
Applies subdued colouring for the skin and lips of a
[Green] person. Emphasises green leaves and makes them
brighter.
[Off]
—
*1[Color Tone] is displayed only when [Monochrome] is selected. Otherwise, [Saturation] is
displayed.
*2 Displayed only when [Monochrome] is selected.
•• When the picture quality is adjusted, [+] will be displayed in the [Photo Style] icon.
Press [MENU/SET]
■■Registering the setting for the adjusted picture quality to [Custom]
Perform the picture quality adjustment in Step
press the [DISP.] button
130
of “Adjusting the picture quality” and
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Taking pictures using picture effects
[Filter Settings]
Recording mode:
You can apply picture effects (filters) that are available for Creative Control Mode to
images in other modes, such as Aperture-Priority AE Mode or Panorama Shot Mode. For
details (→117).
→
[Rec] → [Filter Settings] → [Filter Effect]
[ON]
Record with the set picture effect added.
[OFF]
Record without adding picture effect.
[SET]
Set picture effect. (→117)
■■Change the settings by using the touch screen
Touch [ ]
Touch the item you want to set
[ ]: Picture effects ON or OFF
[ ]: Picture effects (Filter)
[ ]: Adjusting the picture effect
EXPS
●●Cannot be used during [High Speed Video] recording.
●●[Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect]*, [Soft Focus], [Star Filter] and
[Sunshine] are not available in the following cases.
•• Creative Video Mode
•• During motion picture recording
–– [Toy Effect] and [Toy Pop] also cannot be used when [4K Live Cropping] is set.
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
*In Creative Video Mode or when recording motion pictures, this item is not available only if the
motion picture size is [4K] in [Rec Quality].
●●The following functions are not available in Panorama Shot Mode.
–– [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect], [Sunshine]
●●When recording panorama pictures, the following effects are not applied to the recording screen.
–– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter]
●●When recording a panorama picture in a scene with low brightness, you may not be able to
achieve the desired results if [High Key] is used in the Panorama Shot Mode.
●●The available ISO sensitivity settings will be limited up to [3200]. The ISO sensitivity for [High
Dynamic] will be fixed to [AUTO].
●●Settings will be stored even if the recording mode is changed or the camera is turned off.
131
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Taking pictures using picture effects [Filter Settings]
Taking two still pictures with and without picture effects
([Simultaneous record w/o filter])
You can take two still pictures at the same time by pressing the shutter button once; one
with effects and one without effects.
→
[Rec] → [Filter Settings] → [Simultaneous record w/o filter]
Settings: [ON] / [OFF]
•• When [ON] is set, the camera will take a still picture with the effects applied and then a still picture
without the effects.
•• After taking the picture, [Auto Review] will display only the still picture with the effects applied.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• When [Filter Effect] of [Filter Settings] is set to [OFF]
•• Panorama Shot Mode
•• When using [Burst]
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When using [Auto Bracket]
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
•• During motion picture recording
•• Taking still pictures while a motion picture is being recorded.
], [
] or [ ]
•• When [Quality] is set to [
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When using [Stop Motion Animation]
132
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
TZ100/TZ101
Adjusting highlights and shadows
[Highlight Shadow]
Recording mode:
You can adjust the highlights and shadows in a picture while confirming the brightness of
these areas on the screen.
1
Set the menu
2
Press
→
[Rec] → [Highlight Shadow]
to select the item
([Standard])
No adjustments.
([Higher contrast])
Makes the highlighted areas brighter and shadowed areas
darker.
([Lower contrast])
Makes the highlighted areas darker and shadowed areas
brighter.
([Brighten shadows])
/
3
4
/
Makes the shadowed areas brighter.
You can set a custom registration shape.
(Custom)
Rotate the control ring to adjust the
brightness of the highlighted areas
and rotate the rear dial to adjust the
brightness of the shadowed areas
••To register your preferred settings, press to select
the registration target icon (Custom 1, Custom 2, and
Custom 3).
••Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.
Press [MENU/SET]
Highlighted area
Shadowed area
Preview display
●●You can press the [DISP.] button on the brightness adjustment screen to switch the screen display.
●●The settings registered in [
●●The settings adjusted in [
camera is turned off.
133
], [ ], or [ ] will be retained even if the camera is turned off.
], [ ], [ ], or [ ] will be restored to the default settings when the
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Adjusting the White Balance
Recording mode:
In sunlight, under incandescent lights or in other such conditions where the colour of
white takes on a reddish or bluish tinge, this item adjusts to the colour of white which is
closest to what is seen by the eye in accordance with the light source.
1
TZ100/TZ101
Press [
] button (
)
TZ80/TZ81
Set the menu
→
2
[Rec] → [White Balance]
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to select the White Balance
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to select the White Balance
[AWB]
]/[
Adjust to the colour under a clear sky.
]
[
]
Adjust to the colour under a cloudy sky.
[
]
Adjust to the colour in the shade.
[
]
Adjust to the colour under incandescent lights.
Adjust to the colour that is optimal for taking pictures using
the flash.
]*1
[
[
Automatic adjustment in accordance with the light source.
[
]*2/[
]/[
[
]
]*2
Use the White Balance value that was set manually.
(→136)
Use the preset colour temperature setting. (→136)
*1The [AWB] setting is applied while recording motion pictures, recording 4K photos, or
*2
3
134
recording in [Post Focus].
TZ100/TZ101
Press [MENU/SET] to finalise the setting
••You can also press the shutter button halfway to set the White Balance.
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Adjusting the White Balance
Under fluorescent lighting, LED lighting fixtures, etc., the optimal White Balance will
vary depending on the lighting type, so use [AWB], [ ], [ ], [ ]* or [ ]*.
* TZ100/TZ101
●●The White Balance may not operate correctly if you take pictures using a flash or the subject is
recorded outside of the effective flash range (→242).
●●In Scene Guide Mode, changing the scene or recording mode will return White Balance settings
(including the White Balance fine adjustment setting) back to [AWB].
●●In the Scene Guide Mode, settings suitable for each scene are made.
■■Auto White Balance
When [AWB] (Automatic White Balance) is set, the colouring is adjusted in accordance
with the light source. However, if the scene is too bright or too dark or if other extreme
conditions apply, the pictures may appear reddish or bluish. The White Balance may
not operate correctly if there is a multiple number of light sources. In that case, set the
[White Balance] to settings other than [AWB] to adjust the colouring.
: [AWB] operational range
10000K
9000K
Blue sky
8000K
7000K
6000K
5000K
4000K
3000K
2000K
Cloudy sky (rain)
Shade
Sunlight
White fluorescent lighting
Incandescent lighting
Sunset/sunrise
Candlelight
K=Kelvin Colour Temperature
135
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Adjusting the White Balance
Setting the White Balance manually
Take a picture of a white object under the target light source to adjust colours.
1 - 2 of “Adjusting White Balance,” (→134) select [ ], [ ], [
1 In steps
[ ]*1 and press
*1 TZ100/TZ101
2
]*1 or
Point the camera at a white object such as a piece of paper, ensuring that it is
inside the frame at the centre of the screen, and press the shutter button
•• This will set the White Balance and return you to the recording screen.
•• The same operation can be performed by pressing [MENU/SET].
●●It may not be possible to set the correct White Balance if subjects are too bright or too dark. In this
case, adjust the brightness and try to set the White Balance again.
Setting the White Balance using colour temperature
You can set the White Balance using colour temperature. Colour temperature is a
numeric value that expresses the colour of light (unit: K*2). A picture becomes bluish
when the colour temperature value is higher, and reddish when the temperature value is
lower.
*2 Kelvin
1
2
In steps 1 - 2 of “Adjusting White Balance,” (→134) select [
3
Press [MENU/SET] to finalise the setting
136
] and press
Use
to select the colour temperature value and
press [MENU/SET]
•• You can set the colour temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].
•• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set the White
Balance.
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Adjusting the White Balance
Performing White Balance fine adjustments
White Balance settings can be individually fine-tuned if colours still do not appear as
anticipated.
1 In steps 1 - 2 of “Adjusting White Balance,” (→134)
select the White Balance and press
to perform White Balance fine
2 Use
adjustments
: A (amber: orangish colours)
: G (green: greenish colours)
3
4
: B (blue: bluish colours)
: M (magenta: reddish
colours)
•• You can also make fine adjustments by touching the White
Balance graph.
•• Pressing [DISP.] button resets the position back to the centre.
Press [MENU/SET]
Press [MENU/SET] to finalise the setting
•• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set the White Balance.
●●When you perform fine adjustments of the White Balance toward the A (amber) or B (blue) side,
the colour of the White Balance icon displayed on the screen will change to the fine-tuned colour.
●●When you perform fine adjustments of the White Balance toward the G (green) or M (magenta)
side, [+] (green) or [-] (magenta) will be displayed in the White Balance icon on the screen.
●●Settings remain applied when using flash.
●●When you set a new White Balance value by selecting [ ], [ ], [ ]* or [ ]*, or change the
], the White Balance fine adjustment level will be returned to
colour temperature by selecting [
the standard setting (centre point).
*
137
TZ100/TZ101
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Adjusting the White Balance
Bracket recording using White Balance
Bracket settings are performed based on the fine adjustment values for White Balance,
and three pictures with different colouring are automatically recorded when the shutter
button is pressed once.
1
TZ100/TZ101
Perform fine adjustments of the White Balance in
step 2 of “Performing White Balance fine adjustments”
(→137) and rotate the rear dial to perform the Bracket
setting
BKT
TZ80/TZ81
Perform fine adjustments of the White Balance in
step 2 of “Performing White Balance fine adjustments”
(→137) and rotate the control dial to perform the
Bracket setting
2
3
Clockwise: Horizontal ([A] to [B])
Counterclockwise: Vertical ([G] to [M])
•• You can also set the bracket by touching [
]/[
].
Press [MENU/SET]
Press [MENU/SET] to finalise the setting
•• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set the White Balance.
●●When the White Balance Bracket is set, [BKT] appears on the White Balance icon.
●● TZ100/TZ101
When the camera is turned off (Including [Sleep Mode]), the White Balance Bracket setting is
cancelled.
●●
TZ80/TZ81
When the camera is turned off (Including [Auto Power Off]), the White Balance Bracket setting is
cancelled.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• Panorama Shot Mode
•• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft Image of a Flower]
(Scene Guide Mode)
•• When using [Burst]
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When using [Auto Bracket]
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
•• When taking still pictures while a motion picture is being recorded
], [
] or [ ]
•• When [Quality] is set to [
•• When [HDR] is set to [ON]
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
138
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Setting the picture quality and size
Changing the aspect ratio of the still pictures
Recording mode:
This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback
method.
→
[Rec] → [Aspect Ratio]
[4:3]
Aspect ratio of a 4:3 TV
[3:2]
Aspect ratio of standard film cameras
[16:9]
Aspect ratio of high-definition TV, etc.
[1:1]
Aspect ratio of a square image
●● TZ100/TZ101
If you use the HDMI output during recording, the setting is fixed to [16:9]. (→232)
Setting the picture size
Recording mode:
The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the detail of the pictures will appear even
when they are printed onto large sheets.
→
[Rec] → [Picture Size]
TZ100/TZ101
[Aspect Ratio]
4:3
[L] 17.5M
[Picture Size]
[
3:2
[L] 20M
4864×3648
M] 9M
3456×2592
[
S] 4.5M
2432×1824
5472×3648
[
1:1
[L] 13.5M
5472×3080
3648×3648
M] 10M
[
M] 8M
[
S] 5M
[
S] 2M
[
3888×2592
[
16:9
[L] 17M
2736×1824
3840×2160
1920×1080
M] 6.5M
2592×2592
S] 3.5M
1824×1824
TZ80/TZ81
[Aspect Ratio]
4:3
[L] 18M
[Picture Size]
16:9
[L] 13.5M
1:1
[L] 13.5M
[
4896×3672
4896×3264
[
M] 9M
[
M] 8M
[
M] 8M
S] 4.5M
[
S] 4M
[
S] 2M
3456×2592
[
3:2
[L] 16M
2400×1800
3456×2304
2400×1600
4896×2752
3664×3664
3840×2160
1920×1080
M] 7M
2592×2592
[
S] 3.5M
1824×1824
●●When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH], [Picture Size] is fixed to [S].
●●The picture size will be fixed to [4K] ([4:3]: 3328×2496; [3:2]: 3504×2336; [16:9]: 3840×2160; [1:1]:
2880×2880) when recording 4K photos or recording in Post Focus.
139
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Setting the picture quality and size
Setting the compression rate of pictures ([Quality])
Recording mode:
Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.
→
[Rec] → [Quality]
Settings
[
]
[
]
JPEG
[
]
[
]
[
]
File format
Description
Gives priority to picture quality and saves pictures in JPEG file
format.
Saves pictures in JPEG file format using standard picture quality.
This setting is useful when you want to increase the number of
recordable pictures without changing the number of pixels.
] or [
]) in addition to the
RAW + JPEG
Saves pictures in JPEG file format ([
RAW file format.*1
RAW
Saves pictures in the RAW file format.*2
[ ] images are recorded with a smaller data volume than [
].
[
] or
*1 If you delete a RAW file from the camera, the corresponding JPEG file is also deleted.
*2 Regardless of the aspect ratio of the picture during recording, a RAW still picture is always
recorded at the following aspect ratio.
TZ100/TZ101 : [3:2] (5472×3648)
TZ80/TZ81 : [4:3] (4896×3672)
About RAW file
In RAW file format the data is saved without any picture processing by the camera. To
play back and edit RAW file pictures, you must use this unit or dedicated software.
You can perform advanced editing of RAW file pictures, such as correcting the White
Balance of pictures recorded previously, and save the pictures in file formats that can be
displayed on a PC. This format delivers a higher picture quality than the JPEG format, but
the amount of data is greater.
•• TZ100/TZ101
You can develop the RAW file pictures using [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu.
(→284)
••To develop and edit RAW file pictures on a PC, use the software (Ichikawa Soft
Laboratory’s “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”). To get this software, download it from the
supplier’s website and install it on your PC. (→353)
140
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Setting the picture quality and size
●●When you play back a picture recorded with [
], the grey area is displayed according to the
aspect ratio of the picture during recording.
●●The setting is fixed to [ ] when recording 4K photos or recording in [Post Focus].
●●The following effects cannot be used on RAW file pictures.
•• Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
•• Creative Control Mode
•• White Balance
•• [Photo Style]*1, [Aspect Ratio], [Highlight Shadow]*1, *2, [i.Dynamic]*1, [Red-Eye Removal]*3,
[i.Resolution]*1, [Diffraction Compensation]*3, [Color Space]*1, *2 ([Rec] menu)
], [
] or [ ] in the following cases:
●●You cannot set to [
•• Panorama Shot Mode
•• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
*1TZ100/TZ101
When you use [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu, adjustments are made from the settings
at the time of recording. Therefore, you can output a JPEG format picture with the settings at the
time of recording.
*2 TZ100/TZ101
*3TZ100/TZ101
If corrections are made at the time of recording, the corrected JPEG format picture is output when
[RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu is used.
141
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Using the picture correction functions effectively
Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the conditions.
Correcting contrast and exposure ([i.Dynamic])
Recording mode:
Automatically adjusts contrast and exposure to give more lifelike colours when there is
significant contrast between background and subject.
→
[Rec] → [i.Dynamic]
Settings: [AUTO] / [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [LOW] / [OFF]
●●This function is not available in the following case:
•• When [HDR] is set to [ON]
•• TZ100/TZ101
When [Sensitivity] is set to [H.16000], [H.20000] or [H.25600]
•• TZ80/TZ81
When [Sensitivity] is set to [H.4000], [H.5000] or [H.6400]
Enhancing the impression of high-resolution ([i.Resolution])
Recording mode:
You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution technology to record still pictures with
sharper outlines and clearer resolution.
→
[Rec] → [i.Resolution]
Settings: [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [LOW] / [EXTENDED] / [OFF]
●●When [EXTENDED] is set, you can take more natural pictures with the impression of highresolution.
●●The [EXTENDED] setting will automatically change to the [LOW] setting while recording motion
pictures, recording 4K photos, or recording in [Post Focus].
142
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Using the picture correction functions effectively
Combining still pictures with different exposures ([HDR])
Recording mode:
The camera can combine 3 still pictures taken at different exposures into a single
properly exposed picture with rich gradation. The individual pictures used to create the
HDR picture are not saved. You can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas and
dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is
large.
A combined HDR picture is saved in JPEG format.
→
[Rec] → [HDR]
[ON]
Creates a combined HDR picture.
[OFF]
Does not create a combined HDR picture.
[Dynamic
Range]
[AUTO]:Takes pictures after automatically setting the adjustment range
of the exposure based on the contrast of a subject.
[±1EV] / [±2EV] / [±3EV]: Takes pictures using the adjustment range of
the exposure being set.
[Auto Align]
[ON]:Automatically adjusts the displacement of pictures caused by
jitter, etc. We recommend using this setting to take pictures with a
handheld camera.
[OFF]:Does not adjust the displacement of pictures. We recommend
using this setting when you use a tripod.
[SET]*
*
TZ100/TZ101
●●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.
●●Since a burst of still pictures are combined after they have been recorded, it will be a few
moments before you will be able to record another picture.
●●A subject that was in motion when it was recorded may be recorded as an afterimage.
●● TZ100/TZ101
When [Auto Align] is set to [ON], the angle of view narrows slightly.
●●When you take pictures using a flash, the flash mode is fixed to [ ] (Forced Flash Off).
●●This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• When using [Burst]
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When using [Auto Bracket]
•• TZ100/TZ101 During T (Time) recording
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
], [
] or [ ]
•• When [Quality] is set to [
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]
143
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Using the picture correction functions effectively
TZ100/TZ101 Suppressing the noise of a long exposure
([Long Shtr NR])
Recording mode:
The camera can automatically eliminate the noise made when taking pictures with a
slower shutter speed (e.g. to record night scenes) in order to take sharp pictures.
→
[Rec] → [Long Shtr NR]
Settings: [ON] / [OFF]
●●While the camera eliminates the noise, [Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] is displayed for the
same period as the shutter speed for the signal processing time.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• During motion picture recording
•• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
•• When using the electronic shutter
Raising the resolution when the aperture is closed
([Diffraction Compensation])
Recording mode:
The camera raises the resolution by correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction when
the aperture is closed.
→
[Rec] → [Diffraction Compensation]
Settings: [AUTO] / [OFF]
●●Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
144
SQW0550
Picture Quality and colouring Settings
Using the picture correction functions effectively
TZ100/TZ101
Setting the colour space
Recording mode:
You can set the method for reproducing the colours to correctly display the recorded
pictures on the screens of a PC or printer, etc.
→
[Rec] → [Color Space]
[sRGB]
Sets the sRGB colour space. This setting is widely used for devices such as PCs.
[AdobeRGB]
Sets the AdobeRGB colour space.
AdobeRGB colour space has a wider colour reproduction range than sRGB
colour space. Therefore, AdobeRGB colour space is mainly used for business
applications such as commercial printing.
●●Select [sRGB] if you do not have expert knowledge about AdobeRGB colour space.
●●The setting is fixed to [sRGB] while recording motion pictures, recording 4K photos, or recording
in [Post Focus].
145
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Recording mode:
Recording mode:
By setting the optimum Focus Mode or Auto Focus Mode for the subject or recording
condition, you can let the camera automatically adjust focus in various scenes.
1
2
Press [
] button (
)
Press
to select [AF] and press
[MENU/SET]
••Set the focusing action when the shutter is pressed
halfway (→148)
••Switch the Auto Focus mode (→149)
3
146
TZ100/TZ101
Press the shutter button halfway
••Two “beep” sounds are heard and Auto Focus is
activated.
Four “beep” sounds when focus is not aligned.
••When you take a picture in a dark location, [ ] is
displayed for the focus display and it may take longer
to adjust focus than usual.
•• TZ100/TZ101
If the camera detects stars in the night sky after
displaying [ ], Starlight AF will be activated. When
focus is achieved, the focus indication [ ] and AF
areas in focus are displayed.
(Detection with Starlight AF works only for
approximately 1/3 of the centre area of the screen.)
TZ80/TZ81
Focus display
(When focus is aligned:
illuminated
When focus is not aligned:
flashing)
AF area
(When focus is aligned:
green)
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
●●When the [AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu is set to [AFF] or [AFC].
•• A beep will be emitted when focus is first achieved during the pressing halfway.
•• TZ100/TZ101
If Auto Focus Mode is set to [
] or to a Custom Multi setting like [
], the AF area will be
displayed momentarily only the first time the picture is focused while the button is pressed
halfway.
•• TZ80/TZ81
If Auto Focus Mode is set to [
], the AF area will be displayed momentarily only the first time
the picture is focused while the button is pressed halfway.
●●Subjects/environments which may make focusing difficult:
••Fast-moving or extremely bright objects, or objects with no colour contrast.
••Taking pictures through glass or near objects emitting light.
••In the dark, or with significant jitter.
••When too close to object or when taking pictures of both distant and close
objects together in the same picture.
147
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
Set the focusing operation to be performed when the shutter
button is pressed halfway (AFS, AFF, AFC)
Recording mode:
→
Settings
[Rec] → [AFS/AFF/AFC]
The movement of the
subject and the scene
(recommended)
Description
[AFS]
Subject is still
(Scenery, anniversary
photograph, etc.)
“AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Single”. Focus
is set automatically when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
Focus will be fixed while it is pressed halfway.
[AFF]
Movement cannot be
predicted (Children,
pets, etc.)
“AFF” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Flexible”. In this
mode, focusing is performed automatically when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
If the subject moves while the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the focus is corrected to match the movement
automatically.
Subject is moving
(Sport, trains, etc.)
“AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Continuous”. In
this mode, while the shutter button is pressed halfway,
focusing is constantly performed to match the movement
of the subject. When the subject is moving, the focusing is
performed by predicting the subject position at the time of
recording. (Movement prediction)
[AFC]
When recording using [AFF], [AFC]
●●Focusing may take time if the zoom is suddenly changed from max. Wide to max. Tele,
or if you suddenly move closer to a subject from a greater distance.
●●Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.
●●While the shutter button pressed halfway, shake may be seen on the screen.
●●If the light on a subject is insufficient when using [AFF] or [AFC], the camera performs the same
focusing operation as [AFS]. In this case, the indication on the screen will change to yellow [AFS].
●●[AFF] or [AFC] in [AFS/AFF/AFC] operates as [AFS] in the following case:
•• When recording with [
] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) of the 4K Photo function.
●●It is fixed to [AFS] when panorama mode is set.
●●[AFF] is not available when recording 4K photos. Continuous AF works during recording.
●●This setting cannot be used when recording using [Post Focus].
148
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
Switching [AF Mode]
Recording mode:
This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be
selected.
1 Set the menu
→
2
[Rec] → [AF Mode]
Press
to select Auto Focus mode and press
[MENU/SET]
•• TZ100/TZ101
If you press when [ ], [
], [
], or [
] is selected, or
touch the screen, the AF area setting screen appears.
(→157, 159)
•• TZ80/TZ81
If you press when [ ], [
] or [
] is selected, or touch the
screen, the AF area setting screen appears. (→157)
●●In Intelligent Auto Mode and Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, [ ] or [ ] can be set.
●●Auto Focus is fixed to [ ] (1-area-focusing) in the following cases:
•• When using the Digital Zoom
•• [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
●●Setting cannot be made during recording in [Post Focus] or when [4K Live Cropping] is set.
149
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
Taking front-on pictures of people
(Face/Eye Detection)
The camera automatically detects the faces and eyes of subjects. The camera adjusts
the focus on the eye that is closer to the camera and the exposure using the face (when
[Metering Mode] is set to [ ] (Multi Metering)).
••The camera can detect up to 15 faces. The camera can detect only the eyes of faces to
be focused on.
When the camera recognised a face, the AF area and eye
used for focusing are displayed.
Yellow:When the shutter button is pressed halfway and the
subject is focused, the frame turns green.
White:Displayed when more than one face is detected.
Other faces that are the same distance away as faces
within the yellow AF area are also focused.
Eye used for focusing
■■Changing the eye to be in focus
Touch the eye to be used for focusing
If you touch a location outside the yellow frame, the AF area setting
screen will be displayed. (→157)
•• If you touch [ ] or press [MENU/SET], the eye focus setting will
be cancelled.
•• If the yellow frame moves to another face or the frame disappears
after you change the composition or do something similar, the eye
focus setting will be cancelled.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape],
[Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Appetizing Food], [Cute Dessert] (Scene Guide
Mode)
●●The Eye Detection cannot be changed when [4K Live Cropping] is set.
●●If conditions prevent the face from being recognised, such as when the movement of the subject is
] (49-area-focusing).
too rapid, the AF Mode setting switches to [
150
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
Automatically locking the focus on a moving subject
(tracking)
With cursor button operations
Align the AF Tracking frame with the subject and press
the shutter button halfway
When the subject is recognised, the AF Tracking frame changes from
white to yellow, and the subject is automatically kept in focus.
•• To release AF Tracking → Press [MENU/SET].
]
•• Focus range: same as macro recording [
AF Tracking frame
With touch screen operations
Touch the subject
Perform these operations with the touch shutter function released.
The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked.
•• To release AF Tracking → Touch [ ].
●●If AF Lock fails, a red frame flashes for a while and then turns off. Retry the locking operation.
●●When you set [Metering Mode] to [ ] (Multi Metering), the camera adjusts the exposure using a
locked subject. (→183)
●●Under certain recording conditions, such as when the subject is small or dark, [
] may not
] (1-area-focusing).
operate correctly. When [ ] does not work, focus will be on [
●●This function is not available in the following case:
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
●●In the following cases, [ ] performs the operation of [ ] (1-area-focusing).
•• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Soft Image of a Flower], [Monochrome]
(Scene Guide Mode)
•• [Sepia], [Monochrome], [Dynamic Monochrome], [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome],
[Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
•• [Monochrome] ([Photo Style])
151
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
Subject not centred in picture
(49-area-focusing)
Focuses on the subject in the wide range area (up to 49-areafocusing) on the recording screen.
●●You can select the focusing area. (→158)
152
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
TZ100/TZ101
Setting the shape of an AF area
, etc. (Custom Multi)
You can set the preferred shape of an AF area by selecting 49 points in the AF area,
based on the subject.
1 Set the menu
→
[Rec] → [AF Mode]
2
Select a Custom Multi icon ([
3
Use
•• When you press
to select the setting item
([Horizontal
Pattern])
Horizontal line shape
Ideal shape for panning,
etc.
([Vertical
Pattern])
Vertical line shape
Ideal shape for recording
structures, etc.
([Central
Pattern])
Shape distributed over
the centre
Ideal shape for focusing
around the centre.
/
/
(Custom)
4
153
], etc.), and press
, the AF area setting screen appears.
Current AF area shape
You can set a custom registration shape.
Press
•• The AF area setting screen appears.
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
5
Select the AF area
]/[
When selecting [
]/[
]
You can set the size and position of the area in the vertical direction
] is selected, in the horizontal direction when [
] is
when [
] is selected.
selected, and in all directions when [
Operation
Touch
operation
Description
Touch
Moves position
Pinch out /
Pinch in
[DISP.]
When selecting [
Changes the size (3 stages)
Restores to the initial
settings
[Reset]
]/[
Selected AF area
]/[
]
With cursor button operations
Use
to select AF area and press [MENU/SET] to set
(repeat)
•• If you press [MENU/SET] again, the setting will be cancelled.
•• To cancel all the settings, press the [DISP.] button.
With touch screen operations
Touch the parts you want to set as AF areas
•• If you touch one of the selected AF areas, the selection of the
area will be cancelled.
6
Press [Fn2] button
■■Registering the set AF area in [ ], [ ] and [
Press on the screen of step 4 on (→153)
Use
] (Custom)
to select the registration target icon and press [MENU/SET]
●●The settings registered in [
●●The settings adjusted in [
camera is turned off.
], [
], [
] and [
] will be retained even if the camera is turned off.
] or [
] will be restored to the default settings when the
●●If you press the cursor button when [Direct Focus Area] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the
AF area setting screen will appear.
154
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
Determined position for focus
(Pinpoint-focusing)
(1-area-focusing) /
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Determined position for focus
(1-area-focusing)
(1-area-focusing)
Focuses on AF area in centre of picture. (Recommended when focus is difficult to align)
••You can change the position and size of the AF area. (→157)
Locking the focus
If a subject you want to record is not in the centre,
follow the steps below. (Only when [AFS/AFF/AFC]
in [Rec] menu is set to [AFS].)
Align the AF
1 Adjust focus according to
area with the
subject
Focus display
(When focus is aligned: illuminated
When focus is not aligned: flashing)
subject
Hold down
halfway
2
AF area
(When focus is aligned: green)
Return to desired composition
Press fully
TZ100/TZ101
(Pinpoint-focusing)
Enables more precise focusing on a smaller point than [
] (1-area-focusing).
●●You can set the focus position using the enlarged screen. (→159)
●●When you press the shutter button halfway, an enlarged display of the focus position appears.
●●You can set the timeout for the enlarged display using [Pinpoint AF Time] in the [Custom] menu.
(→160)
] (Pinpoint-focusing) is selected while recording motion pictures or 4K photos, the setting is
] (1-area-focusing).
changed to [
●●Cannot set to [ ] (Pinpoint-focusing) in the following case:
•• When [AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu is set to [AFF] or [AFC]
●●If [
155
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
Changing the position and size of the AF area
Recording mode:
TZ100/TZ101
When [ ], [ ], [ ], or [
and size of the AF area.
TZ80/TZ81
When [ ], [ ] or [
size of the AF area.
] in Auto Focus Mode is selected, you can change the position
] in Auto Focus Mode is selected, you can change the position and
●●Perform these operations with the touch shutter function released.
●●When setting with touch operation, set [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom]
menu to [AF]. (→61)
Enabling/disabling use of cursor button to move the AF area
→
[Custom] → [Direct Focus Area] → [ON] / [OFF]
TZ100/TZ101
When [ ], [ ], or [ ] is selected, you can move the AF area and when [
selected, you can move the enlarged position.
TZ80/TZ81
When [
], [
], or [
] is
] is selected, you can move the AF area.
••Use the Quick menu (→68) to set functions to be assigned to the cursor button, such as
Drive mode and Exposure Compensation.
●●When you set [Metering Mode] (→183) to [
] (spot-focusing), the metering target will move
along with the AF area. When the AF area is moved to the edges of the screen, the metering
operation may be affected by the surrounding brightness.
●●[Direct Focus Area] is fixed to [OFF] in the following cases:
•• [Glistening Water] (Scene Guide Mode)
•• Creative Control Mode
•• When [4K Live Cropping] is set
●●The position and size of the AF area cannot be changed in the Digital Zoom range.
156
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
■■When selecting [
]/[ ]
You can change the position and size of the AF area.
Set the menu
→
[Rec] → [AF Mode]
Select [
] or [
] and press
•• The AF area setting screen appears.
•• You can also display the AF area setting screen by touching
the screen.
To change the AF area
Operation
Touch operation
Touch
—
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
[DISP.]
Description
To move the position of the AF area.
Pinch out /
Pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the AF area in small steps.
—
Enlarges/reduces the AF area in large steps.
[Reset]
Resets the AF area back to the centre.
•• If you press the button again, the frame size will
be reset to the initial setting.
•• If you set the AF area to an eye in the yellow frame when [
for focusing will be changed.
] is selected, the eye to be used
Press [MENU/SET]
•• AF area with the same function as [ ] is displayed in the touched position, when the [
] is
selected. Setting of the AF area is cleared when [MENU/SET] is pressed or [ ] is touched.
157
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
■■When selecting [
]
You can set the focus position by selecting an AF area group. The
AF area, which is configured with 49 points, is divided into groups
consisting of 9 points each (6 points or 4 points for the groups
located at the edges of the screen).
Set the menu
→
[Rec] → [AF Mode]
Select [
Examples of group
] and press
•• The AF area setting screen appears.
Press
to select an AF area group
•• You can also select a group by touching the screen.
Press [MENU/SET]
•• Only the [+] indications (centre points of the selected group) remain on
the screen.
•• Setting of the AF area is cleared when [MENU/SET] is pressed or [ ]
is touched.
158
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
■■ TZ100/TZ101
When selecting [ ]
You can enlarge the screen to perform more precise settings of the focus position.
••You cannot set the focus position at the edges of the screen.
Set the menu
→
[Rec] → [AF Mode]
Select [ ] and press
Use
to set the focus position and press
[MENU/SET]
•• The enlarged assist screen will appear for setting the focus
position.
•• The assist screen can also be displayed by touching the
subject.
Move [+] to the focus position with
Operation
Touch operation
Touch
—
Description
Moves [+].
Pinch in / Pinch out
Enlarges/reduces the AF area in small steps.
—
Enlarges/reduces the AF area in large steps.
Switches the enlarged display. (windowed/full
screen)
—
[DISP.]
[Reset]
Resets [+] back to the centre.
•• The image of a part of the screen can be enlarged or reduced approximately 3 to 6 times. The
image of the entire screen can be enlarged or reduced approximately 3 to 10 times.
•• If you use the HDMI output during recording, the screen cannot be enlarged in windowed
mode.
•• On the assist screen, it is also possible to record a picture by touching [ ].
159
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
TZ100/TZ101
Changing the display of the assist screen
→
[Custom] → [Pinpoint AF Display]
[FULL]:Enlarges the assist screen using the entire screen.
[PIP]:Enlarges the assist screen on part of the screen.
••The display of the assist screen can also be switched by touching [
TZ100/TZ101
].
Setting the timeout for the enlarged display
→ [Custom] → [Pinpoint AF Time] →
[LONG] (approx. 1.5 seconds) / [MID] (approx. 1.0 second) /
[SHORT] (approx. 0.5 seconds)
160
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
Setting the AF area position with the touch pad
Recording mode:
You can move the AF area displayed on the viewfinder by touching the monitor.
•• TZ100/TZ101
If you touch the monitor when the Auto Focus Mode is set to [Custom Multi] such as
[
], the AF area setting screen will be displayed. (→153)
→
[Custom] → [Touch Settings] → [Touch Pad AF]
[EXACT]
Moves the AF area of the viewfinder by
touching a desired position on the touch
pad.
[OFFSET]
Moves the AF area of the viewfinder
according to the distance you drag the
touch pad (→61).
[OFF]
—
••Press the shutter button halfway to determine the focus position. If you press the
[DISP.] button before determining the focus position, the focus position returns to the
centre.
••To cancel the settings for the AF area when the Auto Focus Mode (→149) is set to
[ ] (Face/Eye Detection), [ ] (tracking), or [ ] (49-area-focusing), press [MENU/
SET].
●●The Touch Shutter function (→63) is disabled when using [Touch Pad AF].
●●The [Touch Pad AF] does not function in the following cases:
•• When [4K Live Cropping] is set
•• When [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]
161
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
Optimising the focus and brightness for a touched position
Recording mode:
You can optimise the focus and brightness for the position you have touched.
1 Set the menu
→
2
3
[Custom] → [Touch Settings] → [Touch AF] → [AF+AE]
Touch the subject you want to optimise the brightness
for
•• The AF area setting screen appears. (→157)
•• The brightness optimisation position is displayed on the centre of
the AF area. The position follows the movement of the AF area.
], which is used exclusively for the
•• [Metering Mode] is set to [
[Touch AE].
•• Touching [Reset] returns the brightness optimisation position and
the AF area to the centre.
Reset
Set
Touch [Set]
•• The AF area with the same function as [
] is displayed on the touched position.
•• If you touch [ ], the Metering Mode returns to the original setting, and the brightness
optimisation position is cancelled. The AF area setting is also cancelled.
•• If you touch [ ], the Metering Mode returns to the original setting, and the brightness
optimisation position is cancelled.
When the background has become too bright, etc.,
the brightness contrast with the background can be
adjusted by compensating the exposure.
●●When recording with the Touch Shutter, the focus and brightness are optimised for the touched
position before recording takes place.
●●At the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by the brightness around the touched
location.
●●The [AF+AE] does not function in the following cases:
•• When using the Digital Zoom
•• When the AF area has been set by using the cursor button
•• When [4K Live Cropping] is set
162
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
Setting your preferred focusing method
You can use the [Custom] menu to set the focusing method in detail.
Enabling/disabling focus adjustment when the shutter button is
pressed halfway
→
[Custom] → [Shutter AF] → [ON] / [OFF]
Enabling/disabling shutter release when the shutter button is
pressed halfway
→
[Custom] → [Half Press Release] → [ON] / [OFF]
TZ100/TZ101
Focusing using the [AF/AE LOCK] button
You can use the [AF/AE LOCK] button instead of the shutter button to focus on a subject.
1 Set the menu
→
[Custom] → [Shutter AF] → [OFF]
→
[Custom] → [AF/AE Lock] → [AF-ON]
2
Press the [AF/AE LOCK] button
3
Press the shutter button to take a picture
3
•• The camera focuses on a subject.
•• The camera takes a picture by adjusting the exposure.
2
Enabling/disabling pre-adjustment of focus
→
[Custom] → [Quick AF] → [ON] / [OFF]
The focus is automatically adjusted when camera blurring is small even when the shutter
button is not pressed. (Increases battery consumption)
●●Press shutter button halfway if focus is difficult to align.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
••Preview Mode
••When the lighting is low
163
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Auto Focus
Turning on/off the AF Assist Lamp
→
[Custom] → [AF Assist Lamp] → [ON] / [OFF]
Illuminates the AF Assist Lamp when the shutter button is pressed halfway when it is too
dark to facilitate focusing. (A large AF area is displayed based on recording conditions.)
●●The AF Assist Lamp has an effective distance of 1.5 m (4.9 feet).
●●AF Assist Lamp is effective for a subject at the centre of the screen.
●●If you do not want to illuminate the AF Assist Lamp when you take a picture in a dark
location (e.g. taking a picture of an animal in the dark), set this function to [OFF]. When
the AF Assist Lamp is set to [OFF], sharper focusing will become difficult.
●●The setting is fixed to [OFF] in the following cases:
••[Distinct Scenery], [Bright Blue Sky], [Romantic Sunset Glow], [Vivid Sunset Glow],
[Glistening Water], [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape],
[Artistic Nightscape], [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
••When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
Enabling/disabling recording when a subject is out of focus
→
[Custom] → [Focus/Release Priority]
[FOCUS]: Recording is disabled unless the focusing is performed properly.
[RELEASE]:Recording is performed when you fully press the shutter button to
place priority on the shutter release timing that helps to avoid missed
opportunities.
Enabling/disabling manual focus adjustment after AF
→
[Custom] → [AF+MF] → [ON] / [OFF]
TZ100/TZ101
You can manually perform fine focusing during AF Lock (pressing the shutter button
halfway when [AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu is set to [AFS] or setting AF Lock using the
[AF/AE LOCK] button).
TZ80/TZ81
You can manually perform fine focusing during AF Lock (pressing the shutter button
halfway when [AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu is set to [AFS]).
164
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking close-up pictures
(Macro recording)
Recording mode:
This mode allows you to take close-up pictures of a subject, e.g. when taking pictures of
flowers.
1
Press [
] button (
)
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
2
165
Press
to select the item and press
[MENU/SET]
[
]
([AF Macro])
You can take pictures of a subject as close as TZ100/TZ101 5 cm
(0.16 feet), TZ80/TZ81 3 cm (0.098 feet) from the lens by rotating the
zoom lever upmost to Wide (1x).
]
[
([Macro Zoom])
Use this setting to get close to the subject and then further enlarge
when taking the picture. You can take a picture with the Digital
Zoom up to 3x while maintaining the distance to the subject for the
extreme Wide position ( TZ100/TZ101 5 cm (0.16 feet), TZ80/TZ81 3 cm
(0.098 feet)).
•• Note that enlarging will decrease picture quality.
•• Zoom range will be displayed in blue. (digital zoom range)
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking close-up pictures (Macro recording)
●●When recording a subject close to the camera, we recommend taking a picture without using the
flash.
●●A picture may be out of focus when the subject is out of focus range, even if the focus display is lit.
●●When a nearby subject is to be recorded
•• Using a tripod and [Self Timer] (→208) is recommended.
•• The effective focus range (depth of field) is significantly narrowed. Therefore, if the distance
between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the subject, it may become
difficult to focus on it again.
•• Resolution may be slightly reduced around the edges of the picture. This is not a malfunction.
●●Cannot set to [Macro Zoom] in the following cases:
•• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
•• Panorama Shot Mode
•• During [High Speed Video] recording
•• [Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
•• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]
•• When [HDR] is set to [ON]
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
], [
] or [ ]
•• When [Quality] is set to [
166
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Manual Focus
Recording mode:
Manual Focus is convenient when you want to lock the focus to take pictures or when it is
difficult to adjust focus using Auto Focus.
1
2
3
Press [
] button (
)
TZ100/TZ101
Press
to select [MF] and press
[MENU/SET]
Touch the screen twice, set the focus
position with
, and press
[MENU/SET]
TZ80/TZ81
••The screen changes to the assist screen and an
enlarged display appears. (MF Assist)
••You can also enlarge the area by pinching out (→61)
the screen.
••You can also adjust the focus position by dragging
(→61) the screen.
••If you press [DISP.] button, the area to be enlarged will
be reset to the centre.
••If you turn the control ring, you can perform Step 4.
However, you will not be able to select the focus
position.
167
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Manual Focus
4
Turn the control ring to adjust focus
TZ100/TZ101
Turning the control ring to the right:
Focusing on a nearby subject
Turning the control ring to the left:
Focusing on a distant subject
TZ80/TZ81
••Colour is added to the portions of the image that are in
focus. (Peaking) (→172)
••About the MF Guide (→171)
MF Assist
(Enlarged screen)
Peaking
MF Guide
168
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Manual Focus
Operation
Touch operation
Drag
—
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Description
Moves the enlarged area.
Pinch in /
Pinch out
Enlarges/reduces the AF area in small steps.
—
Enlarges/reduces the AF area in large steps.
Switches the enlarged display. (windowed/full screen)
—
[DISP.]
[Reset]
Resets the area to be enlarged back to the centre.
••The image of a part of the screen can be enlarged or reduced approximately 3 to
6 times. The image of the entire screen can be enlarged or reduced approximately
3 to 10 times.
•• TZ100/TZ101
If you use the HDMI output during recording, the screen cannot be enlarged in
windowed mode.
Changing the MF Assist display
→
[Custom] → [MF Assist Display]
[FULL]: Enlarges the assist screen using the entire screen.
[PIP]: Enlarges the assist screen on part of the screen.
••The display of the assist screen can also be switched by touching [
5
].
Press the shutter button halfway
••The assist screen will close. The recording screen will be displayed.
••You can also exit MF Assist by pressing [MENU/SET].
●●If you press the cursor button when [Direct Focus Area] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the
setting screen for the enlarged position appears.
●●MF Assist is not displayed in the following cases:
•• During motion picture recording
] ([4K Pre-Burst]) of the 4K Photo function
•• When recording with [
•• When using the Digital Zoom
169
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Manual Focus
Quickly adjusting the focus using Auto Focus
In Manual Focus, the focus can be set on the subject through Auto Focus. (One shot AF)
1
Touch [
]
●●Auto Focus is activated at the centre of the frame.
●●When Auto Focus is activated on the MF Assist screen, the camera will adjust the focus at the
centre of the MF Assist screen.
●●Auto Focus also works with the following operations.
•• TZ100/TZ101
Pressing the [AF/AE LOCK] button to which [AF-ON] is assigned (→173)
•• Pressing the function button to which [AF-ON] is assigned
•• Dragging the monitor and releasing your finger at the position you want to focus on
●●One-shot AF cannot be used when [4K Live Cropping] is set.
170
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Manual Focus
Technique for Manual Focus
1
2
3
Turn the control ring to focus on the
subject
Rotate it a little more
1
Finely focus on the subject by rotating
it slowly in reverse
2
3
●●TZ100/TZ101
After cancelling [Sleep Mode], be sure to readjust the focus.
●● TZ80/TZ81
After cancelling [Auto Power Off], be sure to readjust the focus.
●●When a nearby subject is to be recorded (→166)
Setting the display method of MF Assist
→
[Custom] → [MF Assist] → [ON] / [OFF]
When [MF Assist] is set to [ON] in the [Custom] menu and you perform the Manual Focus
operation, an enlarged display of the MF area (the position to be focused on) appears.
••Shortly after you stop operating Manual Focus, the display switches to normal.
Enabling/disabling MF Guide display
→
[Custom] → [MF Guide] → [ON] / [OFF]
When [MF Guide] on the [Custom] menu is set to [ON] and
you focus manually, the MF guide is displayed on the screen.
You can check whether the point of focus is to the near side
or the far side.
171
Indicator for
(infinity)
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Manual Focus
Enabling/disabling [Peaking] to add colour to the portions of the
image that are in focus
→
[Custom] → [Peaking]
●●[Peaking] functions during Manual Focus or when you are adjusting focus manually
using [AF+MF].
[ON]
Colour is added to the portions of the image that are in focus.
[OFF]
The portions of the image that are in focus are not displayed.
[Detect
Level]
The detection level for in-focus portions is set.
Settings: [HIGH] / [LOW]
When [HIGH] is set, portions to be highlighted are reduced, allowing you to
achieve a more precise focus.
•• The detection level setting does not affect the focus range.
Sets the highlighting colour used for [Peaking].
Settings
Changing the [Detect Level] setting also changes the [Display Color]
setting as follows.
[SET]
[Display
Color]
[Detect Level]
[Display Color]
[HIGH]
[LOW]
[
] (Light blue)
[
] (Blue)
[
] (Yellow)
[
] (Orange)
[
] (Yellow Green)
[
] (Green)
[
] (Pink)
[
] (Red)
[
] (White)
[
] (Grey)
●●When [Peaking] is set to [ON], [
] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) or [
] ([Detect Level]:
[LOW]) will be displayed.
●●Each time [ ] in [ ] is touched, the setting is switched in order of [ON] ([Detect Level]: [LOW]) →
[ON] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) → [OFF].
●●When [Fn Button Set] (→70) in the [Custom] menu is set to [Peaking], you can switch the setting
in the following order every time the assigned function button is pressed: [ON] ([Detect Level]:
[LOW]) → [ON] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) → [OFF].
●●Since portions with clear outlines on the screen are highlighted as in-focus portions, portions to be
highlighted vary depending on the recording conditions.
●●The colour used for highlighting does not affect recorded pictures.
●●This function is not available in the following case:
•• [Rough Monochrome] (Creative Control Mode)
172
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
TZ100/TZ101
exposure
Taking pictures by locking the focus and/or
(AF/AE Lock)
Recording mode:
The AF/AE Lock function is convenient, for example, when there is too much contrast with
the subject and you cannot get appropriate exposure (AE Lock) or when you want to take
a still picture composed with the subject outside the AF area (AF Lock).
1
2
Point the camera at the subject
Lock the focus and/or exposure while you
press and hold the [AF/AE LOCK] button
50p
••When you release the [AF/AE LOCK] button, the focus
and/or exposure lock is cancelled.
••Only the exposure is locked at the time of purchase.
3
While you press and hold the
[AF/AE LOCK] button, move the camera to
compose the picture you want to take and
fully press the shutter button
:
Exposure is locked
(AE Lock)
••When [AE LOCK] is set, press the shutter button
halfway to focus, then press it fully.
Setting the function of the [AF/AE LOCK] button
→
[Custom] → [AF/AE Lock]
[AE LOCK]
[AF LOCK]
[AF/AE LOCK]
[AF-ON]
Locks exposure only.
•• [AEL], aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the correct
exposure is achieved.
Locks focus only.
•• [AFL], focus, aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the subject
comes into focus.
Locks focus and exposure.
•• [AFL], [AEL], focus, aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the
subject is in focus and the correct exposure is achieved.
Auto Focus is activated.
Maintaining/not maintaining the lock when [AF/AE LOCK] button is
released
→
173
[Custom] → [AF/AE Lock Hold] → [ON] / [OFF]
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
TZ100/TZ101
Taking pictures by locking the focus and/or exposure (AF/AE Lock)
●●AF Lock only is effective in the following case:
•• Manual Exposure Mode
●●During Manual Focus, only AE Lock can be used.
●●The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway, even when AE is locked.
●●Programme Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
174
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
TZ80/TZ81
exposure
Taking pictures by locking the focus and/or
(AF/AE Lock)
Recording mode:
The AF/AE Lock function is convenient, for example, when there is too much contrast with
the subject and you cannot get appropriate exposure (AE Lock) or when you want to take
a still picture composed with the subject outside the AF area (AF Lock).
Preparation
To execute the AF/AE Lock function, it is necessary to register [AF/AE LOCK] to the function button.
(→70)
1
2
3
Point the camera at the subject
Lock the focus and/or exposure while you press and hold the
function button
••When you release the function button, the focus and/or exposure lock is
cancelled.
While you press and hold the function button, move the
camera to compose the picture you want to take and fully
press the shutter button
••When [AE LOCK] is set, press the shutter button halfway to focus, then press it
fully.
Setting the function of the function button where [AF/AE LOCK] is
registered
→
[Custom] → [AF/AE Lock]
[AE LOCK]
[AF LOCK]
[AF/AE LOCK]
[AF-ON]
Locks exposure only.
•• [AEL], aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the correct
exposure is achieved.
Locks focus only.
•• [AFL], focus, aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the subject
comes into focus.
Locks focus and exposure.
•• [AFL], [AEL], focus, aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the
subject is in focus and the correct exposure is achieved.
Auto Focus is activated.
Maintaining/not maintaining the lock when the function button where
[AF/AE LOCK] is registered is released
→
175
[Custom] → [AF/AE Lock Hold] → [ON] / [OFF]
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
TZ80/TZ81
Taking pictures by locking the focus and/or exposure (AF/AE Lock)
●●AF Lock only is effective in the following case:
•• Manual Exposure Mode
●●During Manual Focus, only AE Lock can be used.
●●The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway, even when AE is locked.
●●Programme Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
176
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Exposure Compensation
Recording mode:
Corrects the exposure when there is a backlight or when the subject is too dark or too
bright.
1
2
Press [
] button (
)
TZ100/TZ101
TZ100/TZ101
Rotate the rear dial to compensate the
exposure
TZ80/TZ81
Rotate the control dial to compensate the
exposure
TZ80/TZ81
Exposure compensation
value
Optimum
exposure
Under-exposed
Adjust the
exposure to the [+]
direction
Over-exposed
Adjust the
exposure to the [-]
direction
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Adjust the exposure to the [+] direction
Adjust the exposure to the [-] direction
177
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Taking pictures with Exposure Compensation
3
Press [MENU/SET] to set
••You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
●●You can set the exposure compensation value in the range between –5 EV and +5 EV.
Settings can be made within a range of – 3 EV to +3 EV while recording motion pictures, recording
4K photos, or recording in [Post Focus].
●●Depending on the brightness, this may not be possible in some cases.
●●The set Exposure Compensation value is stored even if the camera is turned off. (When [Exposure
Comp. Reset] (→85) is set to [OFF])
178
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Setting the ISO Sensitivity
Recording mode:
Set ISO sensitivity (sensitivity to lighting) manually.
We recommend higher settings to take clear pictures in darker locations.
1
2
Set the menu
→
[Rec] → [Sensitivity]
TZ100/TZ101
Select the ISO sensitivity by rotating the
rear dial
TZ80/TZ81
3
Select the ISO sensitivity by rotating the
control dial
ISO sensitivity
Press [MENU/SET]
••You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
AUTO
(Intelligent ISO)
ISO sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200 ( TZ80/TZ81
flash on: 1600)*1 depending on the brightness of a subject.
with the
ISO sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200 ( TZ80/TZ81 with the
flash on: 1600)*1 depending on the movement and brightness of a subject.
•• The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
It is continuously changing to match the movement of the subject until the
shutter button is pressed fully.
TZ100/TZ101
80*2/100*2/125/
200/400/800/
1600/3200/6400/
12800/25600*2
TZ80/TZ81
ISO sensitivity is fixed at the selected setting.
•• When [ISO Increments] is set to [1/3EV], more ISO sensitivity settings can
be selected. (→181)
80/100/200/400/
800/1600/3200/
6400*2
*1When [ISO Limit Set] (→181) is set to other than [OFF], the ISO sensitivity is automatically set in
the range up to the [ISO Limit Set] setting value.
*2 Only when [Extended ISO] is [ON].
179
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Setting the ISO Sensitivity
Setting guide
TZ100/TZ101
ISO sensitivity
Location
(recommended)
[125]
[12800]
Bright
(outdoors)
Dark
Shutter speed
Slow
Fast
Interference
Low
High
Subject blur
High
Low
[80]
[3200]
Bright
(outdoors)
Dark
TZ80/TZ81
ISO sensitivity
Location
(recommended)
Shutter speed
Slow
Fast
Interference
Low
High
Subject blur
High
Low
●●For details on the available flash range used when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], refer to
(→242).
●●Cannot select [
] in the following cases:
•• Shutter-Priority AE Mode
•• Manual Exposure Mode
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
●● TZ100/TZ101
When [Multi Exp.] is set, the maximum setting is [3200].
●●You can use the following settings in the Creative Video Mode or when recording 4K photos.
–– TZ100/TZ101
[AUTO], [125] - [6400]
–– TZ80/TZ81
[AUTO], [80] - [3200]
180
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Setting the ISO Sensitivity
Setting the upper limit of ISO Sensitivity
Recording mode:
You can set the upper limit of ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] or
[
].
→
[Rec] → [ISO Limit Set]
•• TZ100/TZ101
Settings: [200] / [400] / [800] / [1600] / [3200] / [6400] / [12800] / [OFF]
•• TZ80/TZ81
Settings: [200] / [400] / [800] / [1600] / [3200] / [OFF]
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• TZ100/TZ101
[Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Handheld Night Shot]
(Scene Guide Mode)
•• TZ80/TZ81
[Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape],
[Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
•• During motion picture recording
Setting the incremental value of ISO Sensitivity
Recording mode:
You can change the setting to increase ISO sensitivity by 1 EV or 1/3 EV.
→
[Rec] → [ISO Increments]
TZ100/TZ101
[1/3EV]
[L.80]* / [L.100]* / [125] / [160] / [200] / [250] / [320] / [400] / [500] / [640] / [800] /
[1000] / [1250] / [1600] / [2000] / [2500] / [3200] / [4000] / [5000] / [6400] / [8000] /
[10000] / [12800] / [H.16000]* / [H.20000]* / [H.25600]*
TZ80/TZ81
[80] / [100] / [125] / [160] / [200] / [250] / [320] / [400] / [500] / [640] / [800] / [1000] /
[1250] / [1600] / [2000] / [2500] / [3200] / [H.4000]* / [H.5000]* / [H.6400]*
TZ100/TZ101
[1 EV]
[L.80]* / [L.100]* / [125] / [200] / [400] / [800] / [1600] / [3200] / [6400] / [12800] /
[H.25600]*
TZ80/TZ81
[80] / [100] / [200] / [400] / [800] / [1600] / [3200] / [H.6400]*
* Only when [Extended ISO] is [ON].
●●When this setting is changed from [1/3EV] to [1 EV], the setting for ISO sensitivity may be
changed. (The closest ISO sensitivity that can be set for [1 EV] will be used.)
181
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Setting the ISO Sensitivity
Extending the ISO Sensitivity setting
Recording mode:
You can extend the numeric values that can be set for ISO Sensitivity.
→
[Rec] → [Extended ISO]
Settings: [ON] / [OFF]
●●The setting cannot be made during 4K photo recording or recording in [Post Focus].
182
SQW0550
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Setting the metering mode
Recording mode:
You can change the metering method used for measuring brightness.
→
[Rec] → [Metering Mode]
[Metering Mode]
(Multiple)
(Centre weighted)
Brightness measurement position
Conditions
Whole screen
Normal usage
(produces balanced pictures)
Centre and surrounding area
Subject in centre
Centre of [+] (spot metering target)
(Spot)
183
Great difference between
brightness of subject and
background
(e.g. person in spotlight on stage,
backlighting)
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
Recording mode:
You can select the desired moment from a burst of 4K photos taken at 30 frames/second
and save that moment as a picture of approx. 8 million pixels.
Record a 4K photo
Select and save pictures
The picture is complete
••To record pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→37)
••When recording 4K photos, the angle of view becomes narrower.
1
Press [
] button
TZ100/TZ101
••The same operation can be performed by pressing
the [
] button ( ), using
to select a 4K photo
icon ([
], etc.), and pressing . (→201)
TZ80/TZ81
2
Press
to select the recording method
and press [MENU/SET]
••The recording method can also be set from [4K
PHOTO] in the [Rec] menu.
184
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
[4K Burst]
(→187)
For capturing the best shot of a fast-moving
subject (e.g., sports, aeroplanes, trains)
Burst recording is performed while the shutter button
is pressed and held. The shutter sound will be heard
repeatedly.
Press and hold
Recording is performed
Continuous recording length:
Up to 15 minutes
[4K Burst(S/S)]
(→188)
“S/S” is an
abbreviation of
“Start/Stop”.
For capturing unpredictable photo opportunities
(e.g., plants, animals, children)
Burst recording starts when the shutter button is
pressed and stops when pressed again. Start and
stop tones will be heard.
Start (First)
Stop (Second)
Recording is performed
Continuous recording length:
Up to 15 minutes
[4K Pre-Burst]
(→189)
Audio recording: None
Audio recording: Available*
For recording as needed whenever a photo
opportunity arises (e.g. the moment when a ball is
thrown)
Burst recording is performed for approximately
1 second before and after the moment that the
shutter button is pressed. The shutter sound will be
heard only once.
Approximately 1 second
Recording is performed
Recording length:
Approximately 2 seconds
Audio recording: None
*Audio is not played back when you perform playback with the camera.
185
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
3
Record a 4K photo
••Recording with [ ] ([4K Burst]) (→187)
••Recording with [ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) (→188)
••Recording with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) (→189)
••When you perform 4K burst photo recording, a 4K burst file will be saved in the
MP4 format.
••When [Auto Review] is enabled, the picture selection screen will be displayed
automatically. To continue recording, press the shutter button halfway to display
the recording screen.
••When using [Light Composition] (→287), it is recommended to use a tripod or use
a smartphone instead of the shutter and do remote recording (→312) to control
camera shaking.
■■To cancel the 4K Photo functions
In step 2, select [
].
••The operation can be cancelled by pressing the [
[ ] ([Single]) or [
].
] button (
) and then selecting
Battery drainage and camera temperature
●●If the surrounding temperature is high, or 4K photos are recorded continuously, or the
temperature of the camera rises, [ ] may be displayed and recording may be stopped
halfway through to protect the camera. Wait until the camera cools down.
●●When [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) is set, the battery drains faster and the camera
temperature rises. Select [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) only when recording.
186
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
Recording with [4K Burst]
1
2
Select [
3
Press and hold the shutter button fully for as long as you want to perform
recording
] ([4K Burst]) (→184)
50p
Press the shutter button halfway
Available recording time
•• Recording will start approximately 0.5 seconds after you press the shutter button fully. Therefore,
press the button fully as soon as possible.
•• A 4K burst file will be recorded while the shutter button is pressed and held.
•• If you are using Auto Focus, continuous AF will work while recording. Focus will be adjusted
continuously.
•• For information on how to select and save pictures from recorded 4K burst files, refer to (→190).
●●Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 15 minutes.
When you are using an SDHC memory card, you can continue recording without interruption even
if the file exceeds 4 GB, but the motion picture file will be recorded and played back in separate
files.
If using an SDXC Memory Card, you can record a motion picture in a single file even if the size is
greater than 4 GB.
●●If you remove your finger from the shutter button immediately after the start of recording, up to a
period of approximately 1.5 seconds after the moment that the finger has been removed may be
recorded.
187
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
Recording with [4K Burst(S/S)]
1
2
Select [
3
Press the shutter button fully again
] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) (→184)
50p
Press the shutter button fully
•• Recording will start.
•• If you are using Auto Focus, continuous AF will work while
recording. Focus will be adjusted continuously.
Available recording time
•• Recording will stop.
Recording tips
Adding markers to select and save pictures
When you press the [Fn1] button while recording, you can add a marker. (Up to 40
markers for each recording.) When selecting and saving pictures from a 4K burst file,
you can skip to the positions where you added markers.
•• For information on how to select and save pictures from recorded 4K burst files, refer to (→190).
●●Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 15 minutes.
When you are using an SDHC memory card, you can continue recording without interruption even
if the file exceeds 4 GB, but the motion picture file will be recorded and played back in separate
files.
If using an SDXC Memory Card, you can record a motion picture in a single file even if the size is
greater than 4 GB.
188
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
Recording with [4K Pre-Burst]
1
Select [
2
Press the shutter button fully
] ([4K Pre-Burst]) (→184)
50p
•• When you press the shutter button halfway, the aperture value
and shutter speed are displayed.
•• Recording of a 4K burst file will be performed for approximately
1 second before and after the moment that the shutter button is
pressed.
Number of recordings that
can be made
Recording tips
Focus and exposure
Auto Focus adjusts focus continuously, and except in Manual Exposure Mode, it also
adjusts exposure continuously.
••Focus cannot be adjusted at the desired timing by pressing the shutter button
halfway or operating other controls.
••In situations where you want to lock focus and exposure, such as when the subject
is not at the centre, use [AF/AE LOCK]. (→173, 175)
•• For information on how to select and save pictures from recorded 4K burst files, refer to (→194).
●●When recording with [
] ([4K Pre-Burst]), images may not be displayed as smoothly as when
recording with the normal recording screen.
189
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
Selecting pictures from 4K burst file and saving
••The picture will be saved in JPEG format.
••The picture will be saved with recording information (Exif information), including its
shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity information.
Setting [Playback Mode] in the [Playback] menu to [4K PHOTO] enables you to
play back only 4K burst files and pictures created from them.
4K burst files recorded with [
1
2
] ([4K Burst]) or [
] ([4K Burst(S/S)])
Select a 4K burst file on the playback screen, and
press
•• [
] is displayed on a 4K burst file.
].
•• The same operation can be performed by touching [
•• The slide view screen for selecting pictures will be displayed. It
takes a few seconds until the screen is displayed.
Touch and drag the frames to select the frame you
want to save as a picture
•• You can also perform the same operation by pressing
.
When you select pictures from a 4K burst file with a long burst time, we
recommend that you make a rough selection of scenes using the 4K burst
playback screen (→193) first, and then select the frame to be saved as a picture
using the slide view screen.
190
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
<Slide view screen>
Position of the
displayed frame
Operation
Touch operation
TZ100/TZ101
Touch → Drag
TZ80/TZ81
Displays the previous or next frames in slide view
•• The previous or next 45 frames (burst time of
approximately 1.5 seconds) will replace 45 of the
frames that are currently displayed in slide view.
•• Pressing the same button again will display
the frames following the next ones or the ones
preceding the previous ones.
Select
with
→ [MENU/SET]
—
Description
Selects a frame
•• You can select a frame from 60 frames
(continuous burst time of approximately 2
seconds).
Touch / Drag
Pinch out /
Pinch in
Drag
Selects the frames to be displayed
•• Frames preceding and following the selected
frame will be displayed in slide view.
Enlarges/reduces the display
Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display)
[Fn2]
Displays the 4K burst playback screen
[Fn1]
Switches to marker operation
] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) only)
([
[MENU/SET]
Saves the picture
•• If the burst time was short, a smaller number of frames are displayed in slide view. [
cannot be selected.
191
] and [
]
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
•• During marker operation, you can skip to the markers that you added or the beginning or end of
the 4K burst file. Press [Fn1] button again to return to the original operation.
Operation
Touch operation
Description
Moves to the next marker.
Moves to the previous marker.
•• When you have selected frames that are not currently displayed in slide view, such as when you
have selected [ ] or [ ], it may take a few seconds until the slide view frames are displayed.
192
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
<4K burst playback screen>
During pause
Operation
During continuous playback
Touch operation
Description
Continuous playback
Continuous rewind
•• Frames are rewound in approximately 0.5 second
intervals at a faster speed than that of continuous
playback.
Pause (during continuous playback/rewind)
Fast forward playback
TZ100/TZ101
Single-frame forward (while paused)
Fast rewind playback
TZ80/TZ81
Single-frame rewind (while paused)
—
Touch / Drag
Pinch out /
Pinch in
Drag
193
Enlarges/reduces the display (while paused)
Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display)
[Fn2]
Displays the slide view screen (while paused)
[Fn1]
Switches to marker operation
] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) only)
([
[MENU/SET]
3
Selects the frames to be displayed (while paused)
Saves the picture (while paused)
Press [MENU/SET] to save the picture
•• Pause the playback to perform this operation when using the 4K burst playback screen.
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
4K burst files recorded with [
1
2
] ([4K Pre-Burst])
Select a 4K burst file on the playback screen, and
press
•• [
] is displayed on a 4K burst file.
].
•• The same operation can be performed by touching [
•• The slide view screen for selecting pictures will be displayed. It
takes a few seconds until the screen is displayed.
Touch and drag the frames to select the frame you
want to save as a picture
•• You can also perform the same operation by pressing
Operation
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Touch operation
Touch / Drag
Pinch out /
Pinch in
Drag
[MENU/SET]
3
194
.
Description
Selects a frame
Enlarges/reduces the display
Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display)
Saves the picture
Press [MENU/SET] to save the picture
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
■■Selecting and saving pictures on the TV screen
Preparation
Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] (→83) to [AUTO] or [4K].
•• When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture, select [AUTO].
Connect this unit to a TV using an HDMI micro cable and display the playback
screen (→348)
•• If you want to select and save pictures while the camera is connected to a TV with the HDMI
micro cable, set [VIERA Link] of [TV Connection] in the [Setup] menu to [OFF].
•• If you connect the camera to a TV with an HDMI micro cable and display 4K burst files on the
TV, they will be displayed only on the 4K burst playback screen.
The 4K burst playback screen for playing back 4K burst files recorded with [ ] ([4K Burst]) or
] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) is displayed, and the slide view screen is not displayed.
[
•• Even if you insert the SD card to a 4K-compatible TV with an SD card slot, you cannot play
back 4K burst files recorded with [Aspect Ratio] set to an option other than [16:9].
To play them back, connect the camera and a 4K-compatible TV with an HDMI micro cable.
(As of January 2016)
•• Depending on the TV to be connected, 4K burst files may not be played back correctly.
●●If you display the playback screen when the camera contains many picture files, the acquiring
] or [
] may be displayed for a long time. In this case, you
information icon [
cannot play back 4K burst files recorded with the 4K Photo function. Wait until the icon disappears.
●●If you touch the slide view screen or 4K burst playback screen twice, the screen will be enlarged.
To return to the original display, touch the enlarged screen twice.
●●To select and save pictures from 4K burst files on a PC, use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
Download the software from the website (→353) and install it on your PC. Please note that it is not
possible to edit a 4K burst file as a motion picture.
●●4K burst files recorded on other devices may not be played back correctly on this unit.
195
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
Notes on the 4K Photo function
■■To change the aspect ratio
Selecting [Aspect Ratio] in the [Rec] menu allows you to change the aspect ratio for 4K
photos.
■■To record the subject with reduced blur
You can reduce the blur of the subject by setting a faster shutter speed.
Set mode dial to [ ]
TZ100/TZ101
Set the shutter speed by rotating the rear dial
TZ80/TZ81
Set the shutter speed by rotating the control dial
•• Approximate shutter speed for outdoor recording in fine weather conditions: 1/1000 seconds
or faster.
•• If you increase the shutter speed, the ISO sensitivity becomes higher, which may increase the
noise on the screen.
■■Shutter sound for 4K photo recording
When using [ ] ([4K Burst]) or [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]), recording is performed with the
electronic shutter. You can change the electronic shutter sound settings in [Shutter Vol.]
and [Shutter Tone]. (→78)
When recording with [ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)]), you can set the start/stop tone volume in
[Beep Volume].
••You can perform high speed burst recording quietly using the 4K Photo function in
combination with [Silent Mode].
■■Scenes not suitable for the 4K Photo function
Recording indoors
When recording under fluorescent lighting or LED lighting fixtures, etc., the colours and
brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen. The striping
may be reduced by setting a slower shutter speed.
Fast-moving subjects
Subjects moving fast may appear distorted when recorded.
196
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
■■Limitations on the 4K Photo function
To optimise settings for 4K photo recording, certain limitations apply to some recording
functions, menu items and other settings.
••The following settings are fixed.
[4K] (8M)
•• Following picture sizes will be applied:
[3:2]: 3504×2336
[4:3]: 3238×2496
[16:9]: 3840×2160
[1:1]: 2880×2880
[Picture Size]
[Quality]
]
[
[Shutter Type]
[ESHTR]
[Rec Quality]*
[4K/100M/30p]
[Rec Format]*
[MP4]
[Continuous AF]*
[ON]
*Settings in the [Motion Picture] menu are not applied to 4K burst files recorded with the 4K
Photo function.
••The following limitations apply to the recording functions indicated below.
[
[
] ([4K Burst])/
] ([4K Burst(S/S)])
Programme Shift
] ([4K Pre-Burst])
–
Exposure compensation
–3 EV to +3 EV
Shutter speed
1/30 to 1/16000
[AFS/AFF/AFC]
AFS
TZ100/TZ101
[AF Mode] ([
[MF Assist]
ISO sensitivity
Flash
–
])
White Balance ([ ]),
White Balance Bracket
197
[
○
–
–
TZ100/TZ101 [AUTO], 125 to 6400
TZ80/TZ81 [AUTO], 80 to 3200
–
SQW0550
Recording 4K Photos
Recording 4K Photos
••The following menu items are disabled:
Applicable to [ ] ([4K Burst])/[ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)])/[
] ([4K Pre-Burst])
[Rec]
[Picture Size], [Quality], [AFS/AFF/AFC], [iHandheld Night Shot], [iHDR],
[HDR], [Panorama Settings], [Shutter Type], [Flash]*1, [Flash Adjust.]*2,
[Extended ISO], [Long Shtr NR]*1, [Color Space]*1, [Face Recog.], [Profile
Setup]
[Custom]
[Rec Area]
*1
*2
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Only [
[Setup]
] ([4K Pre-Burst])
[Economy]
●●The following changes occur when recording 4K photos:
•• The [i.Resolution] setting changes from [EXTENDED] to [LOW].
•• [Destination] in [Travel Date] cannot be recorded.
•• [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is not available.
•• It is not possible to use the HDMI output.
●●When recording using the [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) function, Step Zoom does not operate.
●●Scene Detection in Intelligent Auto Mode works the same way as when recording motion pictures.
●●The 4K Photo function is disabled when using the following settings:
•• [Clear in Backlight], [Glistening Water], [Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld
Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait], [Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)
•• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
•• During motion picture recording
•• TZ100/TZ101 During T (Time) recording
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When using [Stop Motion Animation]
198
SQW0550
Shutter and Drive Settings
Setting the Shutter Type
Recording mode:
You can take pictures using two types of shutter modes: the mechanical shutter and
electronic shutter.
Mechanical shutter
Starts the exposure electronically
and ends the exposure using the
mechanical shutter.
Description
Flash
Electronic shutter
Starts and ends the exposure
electronically.
○
TZ100/TZ101
Shutter Speed
(seconds)
T (Time)*1,
60 - 1/2000
TZ80/TZ81
4*2 - 1/2000
Mechanical shutter sound*3
+
Electronic shutter sound*4
Shutter sound
–
TZ100/TZ101
1 - 1/16000
TZ80/TZ81
1*2 - 1/16000
Electronic shutter sound*4
*1This setting is available only in Manual Exposure Mode. (→103)
*2Varies depending on the setting of ISO sensitivity. (→179)
*3You cannot turn off the mechanical shutter sound.
*4You can use [Shutter Vol.] and [Shutter Tone] to adjust the volume of the electronic shutter sound.
(→78)
1
199
Set the menu
→
[Rec] → [Shutter Type]
[AUTO]
The shutter mode automatically switches based on the recording conditions
and shutter speed.
•• The mechanical shutter mode has higher priority over the electronic
shutter mode because the mechanical shutter has less function-related
restrictions when recording with a flash, etc.
[MSHTR]
Uses only the mechanical shutter mode to take a picture.
[ESHTR]
Uses only the electronic shutter mode to take a picture.
SQW0550
Shutter and Drive Settings
Setting the Shutter Type
●●In the following cases, recording is performed with an electronic shutter.
•• [ ] is displayed on the screen
•• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
•• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
●●If you take a picture of a moving subject using the electronic shutter, the subject in the
picture may be skewed in some cases.
●●When you take a picture under a fluorescent or LED lighting fixture using the electronic
shutter, the recorded picture may have horizontal stripes. If you use a slower shutter
speed, the horizontal stripes may be reduced. (→102)
200
SQW0550
Shutter and Drive Settings
Selecting a Drive Mode
Recording mode:
You can switch the operation to be performed when you press the shutter button.
1
2
Press [
] button (
)
TZ100/TZ101
Press
to select the drive mode and
press [MENU/SET]
[Single]
When the shutter button is pressed,
only one picture is recorded.
[Burst] (→202)
The pictures are recorded in succession
while the shutter button is pressed.
[4K PHOTO]
(→184)
When the shutter button is pressed, a
4K photo is recorded.
[Auto
Bracket]*
(→206)
When the shutter button is pressed,
the pictures are recorded with different
exposure settings based on the
Exposure Compensation range.
[Self Timer]
(→208)
When the shutter button is pressed,
recording takes place after the set time
has elapsed.
TZ80/TZ81
Drive Mode
* Cannot be set when using Intelligent Auto Mode.
••To cancel drive mode, select [ ] ([Single]) or [
].
••When you press , you can change the settings of each drive mode. Note,
however, that you cannot change the settings of [Single].
201
SQW0550
Shutter and Drive Settings
Burst function
Recording mode:
The pictures are recorded in succession while the shutter button is pressed.
••Pictures that are taken while the burst speed is set to [SH] are recorded together as a
single burst group (→275).
1
2
Press
to select an item ([
and press
3
Press
to select the burst speed and
press [MENU/SET]
Press [
] button (
)
], etc.)
TZ100/TZ101
Speed
(pictures/
sec.)
[SH]
(Super high
speed)*1
[H]
(High speed)
[AFS]
50
10
6
2
[AFF] / [AFC]
―
6
6
2
None
None
Available
Live View during burst
recording
Number of With RAW files
recordable Without RAW
pictures*2 files
202
[M]
(Middle
speed)
[L]
(Low speed)
Available
―
12*
60
Depends on the capacity of the card*3
3
SQW0550
Shutter and Drive Settings
Burst function
TZ80/TZ81
Speed
(pictures/
sec.)
[SH]
(Super high
speed)*1
[H]
(High speed)
[M]
(Middle
speed)
[L]
(Low speed)
[AFS]
40
10
5
2
[AFF] / [AFC]
―
5
5
2
None
None
Available
Live View during burst
recording
Number of With RAW files
recordable Without RAW
pictures*2 files
Available
―
12*
60
Depends on the capacity of the card*3
3
*1The electronic shutter starts working, and the [Picture Size] is set to [S].
*2The number of burst pictures is limited by the picture-taking conditions and the type and/or
status of the card used.
*3Pictures can be taken until the card becomes full. However, the burst speed will become
slower halfway through the recording. The exact time when the slower burst speed will start
depends on the settings of the aspect ratio, picture size, and quality as well as the type of
card used.
••The burst speed may become slower depending on the following settings:
–– [Picture Size] (→139), [Quality] (→140), ISO sensitivity (→179), [AFS/AFF/AFC]
(→148), [Focus/Release Priority] (→164)
••Burst speed can also be set with [Burst Rate] in the [Rec] menu.
••For information about RAW files, refer to (→140).
4
Focus on the subject and take a picture
■■To cancel burst
In step 2, select [
203
] ([Single]) or [
50p
].
SQW0550
Shutter and Drive Settings
Burst function
Focusing in burst mode
Focusing varies depending on the [AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu (→148) and the setting
of [Focus/Release Priority] (→164) in the [Custom] menu.
If the focus mode is [MF], the focus is set manually.
[AFS/AFF/AFC]
[AFS]
[AFF] / [AFC]*1
[Focus/Release Priority]
[FOCUS]
[RELEASE]
[FOCUS]
[RELEASE]
Focus
At the first picture
Normal focusing*2
Predicted focusing*3
*1Focus is fixed in the first picture when dark subjects are recorded or the burst speed is set to [SH].
*2Since the camera records a burst of pictures while it adjusts the focus, the burst speed may be
slower.
*3The camera predicts the focus within a possible range by giving higher priority to the burst speed.
204
SQW0550
Shutter and Drive Settings
Burst function
●●When the burst speed is set to [H] and if many burst pictures are taken, the burst speed may be
reduced while burst pictures are being taken.
●●When the burst speed is set to [SH] or [H] ([AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu is set to [AFS] or the
focus mode is set to [MF]), and the exposure and White Balance are fixed to those of the first
picture.
When the burst speed is set to [H] ([AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu is set to [AFF] or [AFC]), [M], or
[L], and the exposure and White Balance are adjusted individually for each still picture.
●●Burst speed may be reduced if shutter speed (pictures/sec.) is reduced in darker locations.
●●With repeated recordings, it may take a while between recordings, depending on the usage
conditions.
●●It may take a while to store still pictures that were taken using the burst function. If you
continue to record while storing, the number of burst pictures that can be taken will be
reduced. A high-speed card is recommended when recording using the burst function.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft Image of a Flower]
(Scene Guide Mode)
•• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
•• During motion picture recording
•• When recording using the flash
•• TZ100/TZ101 During T (Time) recording
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
●●[SH] in Burst Mode cannot be used In the following cases:
], [
] or [ ]
•• When [Quality] is set to [
•• When using [Stop Motion Animation]
205
SQW0550
Shutter and Drive Settings
Recording while exposure is changed automatically
[Auto Bracket]
Recording mode:
Each time the shutter button is pressed, recordings are made of up to 7 pictures with
different exposure settings based on the Exposure Compensation range.
] and [Sequence]
Example of Auto Bracket recording when [Step] is set to [
is set to [0/–/+]
1st picture
2nd picture
3rd picture
±0 EV
–1/3 EV
+1/3 EV
1
2
Press
to select an item ([
and press
3
Press
to select the compensation
range and press [MENU/SET]
Press [
••
4
] button (
], etc.)
TZ80/TZ81
You can also set the amount of compensation by going
to the [Rec] menu and choosing [Auto Bracket].
Focus on the subject and take a picture
50p
••If you press and hold the shutter button, a burst of
pictures can be recorded.
••The display of Auto Bracket flashes until all of the burst
pictures you have set are recorded.
••The camera restarts recording from the first still picture
if you change the Auto Bracket settings or turn off the
camera before all of the burst pictures you have set
are recorded.
■■To cancel [Auto Bracket]
In step 2, select [ ] ([Single]) or [
206
)
].
SQW0550
Shutter and Drive Settings
Recording while exposure is changed automatically [Auto Bracket]
■■ TZ100/TZ101
Changing the Single/Burst setting, compensation range, and recording
sequence of Auto Bracket
Set the menu
→
[Rec] → [Auto Bracket]
Press
to select [Single/Burst Settings], [Step] or [Sequence] and press
[MENU/SET]
Press
to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]
[Single/Burst
Settings]
(single)
(burst)
3·1/3
3·2/3
3·1
5·1/3
[Step] 5·2/3
5·1
7·1/3
7·2/3
7·1
(3 pictures)
(3 pictures)
(3 pictures)
(5 pictures)
(5 pictures)
(5 pictures)
(7 pictures)
(7 pictures)
(7 pictures)
[Sequence]
0/–/+
–/0/+
●●When you take pictures using Auto Bracket after performing Exposure Compensation, the camera
will take pictures using the corrected exposure value as a reference.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft Image of a Flower]
(Scene Guide Mode)
•• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
•• During motion picture recording
•• When recording using the flash
•• TZ100/TZ101 During T (Time) recording
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]
207
SQW0550
Shutter and Drive Settings
Taking pictures with self-timer
Recording mode:
We recommend using a tripod. This is also effective for preventing jitter when pressing
the shutter button, by setting the self-timer to 2 seconds.
1
2
Press
to select an item ([
and press
3
Press
to select the self-timer
operation setting and press [MENU/SET]
Press [
] button (
)
], etc.)
The shutter is activated after 10 seconds.
The shutter is activated after 10 seconds and three
pictures are taken at intervals of approximately
2 seconds.
The shutter is activated after 2 seconds.
••You can also set the time for the self-timer using
[Self Timer] in the [Rec] menu.
208
SQW0550
Shutter and Drive Settings
Taking pictures with self-timer
4
Press the shutter button halfway to focus,
and press it fully to start recording
••The focus and exposure are fixed when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
••After the self-timer indicator flashes, recording will
start.
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
■■To cancel self-timer
In step 2, select [ ] ([Single]) or [
].
••You can cancel the self-timer by turning off the camera. (When [Self Timer Auto Off]
(→85) is set to [ON].)
●●If you take a picture with a flash when [
] is set, the flash output may not be stable in some
cases.
●●It cannot be set to [ ] in the following cases:
•• When White Balance Bracket is set
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
•• TZ100/TZ101 During T (Time) recording
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
•• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• During motion picture recording
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]
209
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Saving a picture by selecting a focus point after
recording [Post Focus]
Recording mode:
You can record bursts of photos with the same quality as a 4K photo while automatically
changing the focus point ([Post Focus] recording). After recording, you can select a point
on the screen to save a picture with that point as the focus point.
This function is best for non-moving subjects.
4K burst recording
Touch the desired focus
Finished picture has the
with automatic focus
point
desired focus point
shift
••To record pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→37)
••During recording, the angle of view will be narrower.
Recording using [Post Focus]
1
2
Press [
] button
Press
to select [ON] and press [MENU/SET]
3
Determine the composition and press the shutter button halfway
[Post Focus] icon
•• It can also be set by going to the [Rec] menu and selecting [ON]
for [Post Focus].
•• Auto Focus activates and automatically detects the focus point on the screen.
•• If there is no focus point on the screen, the Focus indicator ( ) blinks and you cannot record.
From halfway pressing the shutter button to completion of recording
•• Do not change the distance to subject or the composition.
210
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Saving a picture by selecting a focus point after recording [Post Focus]
4
Press the shutter button fully to start recording
Recording progress bar
•• The focus point changes automatically while recording. When the
recording progress bar disappears, recording automatically ends.
•• A motion picture will be recorded in MP4 format. (No audio is
recorded.)
•• If Auto Review is set, a screen will automatically appear that lets
you select the focus point. Refer to (→214).
To record continuously, press the shutter button halfway to
display the recording screen.
Recording in post focus
••To learn how to save pictures from images recorded using [Post Focus], refer to
(→214).
■■Cancelling [Post Focus]
Select [OFF] in step 2.
•• You can also cancel the [Post Focus] by selecting [OFF] of [Post Focus] in [Rec] menu.
About camera temperature
If the surrounding temperature is high, or [Post Focus] recording is performed
continuously, or the temperature of the camera rises, [
] may be displayed and
recording may be stopped halfway through to protect the camera. Wait until the camera
cools down.
■■Limitations in [Post Focus] recording
Certain limitations apply to some recording functions, menu items and other settings.
••The following settings are fixed.
[4K] (8M)
[Picture Size]
[Quality]
[Shutter Type]
[
]
[ESHTR]
[Rec Format]
[MP4]
[Rec Quality]
[4K/100M/30p]
[Continuous AF]
211
•• Following picture sizes will be applied:
[4:3]: 3328×2496
[3:2]: 3504×2336
[16:9]: 3840×2160
[1:1]: 2880×2880
[ON]
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Saving a picture by selecting a focus point after recording [Post Focus]
••The following limitations apply to the recording functions indicated below.
Programme Shift
×
Exposure compensation
–3 EV to +3 EV
Shutter speed
1/30 to 1/16000
[AFS/AFF/AFC]
[AF Mode]
Manual Focus operation
–
]),
White Balance ([
White Balance Bracket
TZ100/TZ101 [AUTO], 125 to 6400
TZ80/TZ81 [AUTO], 80 to 3200
ISO sensitivity
Flash
Motion picture recording
Drive Mode
–
[Single], [Self Timer] ([
] or [
])
••The following menu items are disabled.
[Rec]
[Picture Size], [Quality], [AF Mode], [AFS/AFF/AFC], [iHandheld Night
Shot], [iHDR], [HDR], [Panorama Settings], [Shutter Type], [Flash]*1, [Flash
Adjust.]*2, [Extended ISO], [Long Shtr NR]*1, [Digital Zoom],
[Color Space]*1, [Face Recog.], [Profile Setup]
[Motion Picture]
All items
[Custom]
[Shutter AF], [Focus/Release Priority], [Rec Area], [Remaining Disp.]
*1
*2
212
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Saving a picture by selecting a focus point after recording [Post Focus]
●●The following changes occur when [Post Focus] recording:
•• The [i.Resolution] setting changes from [EXTENDED] to [LOW].
•• [Destination] in [Travel Date] cannot be recorded.
•• [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is not available.
•• It is not possible to use the HDMI output.
●●Scene Detection in Intelligent Auto Mode works the same way as when recording motion pictures.
●●The [Post Focus] function is disabled when using the following settings:
•• [Clear in Backlight], [Glistening Water], [Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld
Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait], [Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)
•• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When using [Stop Motion Animation]
213
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Saving a picture by selecting a focus point after recording [Post Focus]
Select the focus point and save the picture
1
On the playback screen, select the image with the
[
] icon and press
•• The same operation can be performed by touching [
2
].
Select the focus point by touching it
•• The picture will be displayed with the focus on the selected point.
•• If there are no pictures with the focus on the selected point, a red
frame will be displayed, and pictures cannot be saved.
•• The edge of the screen cannot be selected.
•• To make slight adjustments to focus, refer to (→215).
Operation
Touch operation
TZ100/TZ101
Touch
TZ80/TZ81
Description
Select focus point
•• No selection can be made while display is
enlarged.
Enlarge display
Shrink display (when in enlarged display)
[Fn2]
[MENU/SET]
3
Touch [
Highlight in-focus portion with colour (peaking)
(→215)
Save picture
] to save the picture
•• The picture will be saved in JPEG format.
•• After saving, return to step 2.
●●You cannot choose and save the picture from a TV screen even if the camera is connected to a
TV through an HDMI micro cable.
214
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Saving a picture by selecting a focus point after recording [Post Focus]
Making fine adjustments to focus
You can enlarge and make fine adjustments to the focus of the picture that you touched
to display in Step 2 of “Select the focus point and save the picture”(→214)
1
Touch [
2
Drag the slide bar to make fine adjustments to focus
3
Touch [
]
•• The picture can be enlarged.
•• The same operation can be performed using
.
] to save the picture
•• The screen returns to step 1.
Highlight in-focus portion with colour (peaking)
You can check the degree of focus by setting the detection level for the in-focus portion
and highlighting it with colour.
]
1 Touch [
•• Each time the icon is touched, the setting is switched in order of
] ([Detect Level]: [LOW]) → [
] ([Detect Level]:
[
[HIGH]) → [OFF].
•• The display colour will be the same as set in [Peaking] under the
[Custom] menu. (→172)
215
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Taking pictures automatically at set intervals
[Time Lapse Shot]
Recording mode:
You can preset data such as recording start time and time lapse to take still pictures
automatically. This setting is convenient for taking pictures at constant intervals for
landscape scenes, observation of the gradual changes in animals/plants, and other
applications. The pictures are recorded as a set of group pictures (→275). When [Time
Lapse Video] in the [Playback] menu is used, you can create a motion picture. (→293)
••Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→42)
1
Set the menu
2
Press
→
[Start Time]
[Rec] → [Time Lapse Shot]
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
[Now]
Starts the recording by fully-pressing the shutter button.
[Start Time Set the time to start recording. Any time up to 23 hours
Set]
59 minutes ahead can be set.
Press
and
[Shooting
Interval] /
[Image
Count]
to select the item (hour and/or minute),
to set the start time, and press [MENU/SET]
The recording interval and the number of pictures can be set.
: Select the item (minute/second/number of pictures)
: Setting
[MENU/SET]: Set
•• You can set the interval from 1 second to 99 minutes 59 seconds in
1-second intervals.
•• You can set the number of pictures to be recorded from 1 picture to 9,999
pictures.
•• Be sure to use an interval setting that is longer than the exposure time
(shutter speed) . (Illustration below)
If the interval setting is shorter than the exposure time (shutter speed)
(e.g. recording at night), it may cause the recording to skip.
First
Second
Third
•• The camera may not be able to record using the preset interval and number
of pictures to be recorded under some recording conditions.
3
216
Press
to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Taking pictures automatically at set intervals [Time Lapse Shot]
4
Press the shutter button fully
••The recording starts automatically.
••During recording standby, the camera turns off automatically when no operation
is performed for a preset interval. The [Time Lapse Shot] recording will continue
even if the camera is turned off, and the camera is automatically turned on at the
recording start time. If you want to turn on the camera manually, press the shutter
button halfway.
••Operations during recording standby (The camera is turned on)
Operation
Touch
operation
[Fn1]
5
Select the motion picture creation method
••[Rec Format]: [MP4]
[Rec Quality]
6
217
Description
Displays a selection screen that lets you pause or stop the
recording
Displays a selection screen that lets you resume or stop the
recording (during pause)
Sets the picture quality of the motion picture.
[4K/25p] / [4K/24p]*1 / [FHD/50p] / [FHD/25p] / [HD/25p] / [VGA/25p]
*1
TZ100/TZ101
[Frame Rate]
Set the number of frames per second. When you set a higher number, you
can create a more seamless animation.
[50fps]*2 / [25fps] / [12.5fps] / [8.3fps] / [6.25fps] / [5fps] / [2.5fps] / [1fps]
*2 Only available with [FHD/50p] setting
•• TZ100/TZ101
You can set the number of frames to [24fps], [12fps], [8fps], [6fps], [4.8fps],
[2.4fps], or [1fps] when [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/24p].
[Sequence]
[NORMAL]: Stitches the still pictures in the recording sequence.
[REVERSE]: Stitches the still pictures in the reverse order of recording.
Use
to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]
••You can also create a motion picture using [Time Lapse Video] in the [Playback]
menu. (→293)
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Taking pictures automatically at set intervals [Time Lapse Shot]
●●This function is not intended for application-specific systems (monitoring cameras).
●●If you leave the camera unattended during [Time Lapse Shot] recording, make sure that the
camera is not stolen.
●●Exercise caution when you perform [Time Lapse Shot] recording for a long period of time
in cold regions or in a low-temperature or high-temperature/high-humidity environment,
since such use could cause malfunctions.
●●Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).
●●When using zoom, the camera could tilt when the lens barrel extends. Make sure to secure the
camera in place with a tripod or by other means.
●●[Time Lapse Shot] is paused in the following cases:
•• When the remaining battery power runs out
•• Turning the camera off
If this occurs during [Time Lapse Shot] recording, you can restart the operation by replacing the
battery or card in the pause state and turning the camera on. (Note, however, that the pictures
recorded after restarting the operation are saved as a separate set of group pictures.) When you
replace the battery or card, turn the camera off.
●●Do not connect the HDMI micro cable or USB connection cable during [Time Lapse Shot]
recording.
●●When you select the picture quality for an aspect ratio that is different from the original picture, the
picture will be displayed with a black band on the upper/lower side or the left/right side of a stop
motion animation.
●●If the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or AC adaptor disconnection while a motion
picture is being recorded using the AC adaptor (optional), that motion picture will not be recorded.
●● TZ100/TZ101
When creating motion pictures at a picture quality setting of [4K/25p] or [4K/24p], recording times
are limited to 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
●●
TZ80/TZ81
When creating motion pictures at a picture quality setting of [4K/25p], recording times are limited
to 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
●●If using an SDHC Memory Card, you will not be able to create motion pictures with a file size
greater than 4 GB. With an SDXC Memory Card, you can create motion pictures with a file size
greater than 4 GB.
●●When creating a motion picture with a picture quality setting of [FHD/50p], [FHD/25p], [HD/25p],
or [VGA/25p], you will be unable to create it if the recording time is more than 29 minutes and
59 seconds or the file size is greater than 4 GB.
●●If only one still picture is recorded, it will not be recorded as a group picture.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
•• When using [Stop Motion Animation]
218
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Creating stop motion animation
[Stop Motion Animation]
Recording mode:
You can stitch still pictures to create stop motion animation.
••Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→42)
••Still pictures that were captured using frame-by-frame recording are grouped into a
single picture group. (→275)
Before creating stop motion animation
When you use [Stop Motion Animation] to record still pictures by moving a subject such
as a doll little by little and then stitching those pictures, you can create a stop motion
animation as if the subject is moving.
●●To create stop motion animation using this camera, it is necessary to record 1 to
50 frames of still pictures for every 1 second of motion picture.
●●To produce smooth movement of the subject, record the motion using as many frames
as possible and set a higher number of frames per second (frame rate) when you
create a stop motion animation.
1
Set the menu
2
Press
to select the recording method, and press
[MENU/SET]
3
219
→
[Rec] → [Stop Motion Animation]
[Auto
Shooting]
[ON]
Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.
[OFF]
Takes pictures manually, one frame at a time.
[Shooting
Interval]
(Only when [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON])
Set the interval used for [Auto Shooting]. You can set the interval from 1 second
to 60 seconds in 1-second intervals.
Press
to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]
4
5
6
Press
to select [New] and press
[MENU/SET]
Press the shutter button fully
••Up to 9,999 frames can be recorded.
Move the subject to decide on the
composition
••Repeat the recording of still pictures in the same way.
••When you turn off the camera during recording, a message to restart recording
will appear when you turn on the camera. To start recording from the next still
picture, select [Yes].
How to create stop motion animation effectively
●●Up to two previously recorded pictures are displayed on the recording screen.
Check this screen as a guideline for determining the amount of required motion.
●●You can press the Playback button to check the recorded pictures. Press the
[Q.MENU/ ] button to delete unnecessary pictures. To return to the recording
screen, press the Playback button again.
7
220
Touch [
] to end the recording
••You can also end the recording by selecting [Stop
Motion Animation] in the [Rec] menu, and then
pressing [MENU/SET].
••When [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON], select [End] on
the confirmation screen. (If you select [Pause], press
the shutter button fully to resume recording.)
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]
8
Select a method to create a stop motion animation
••[Rec Format]: [MP4]
[Rec Quality]
9
Sets the picture quality of the motion picture.
[4K/25p] / [4K/24p]*1 / [FHD/50p] / [FHD/25p] / [HD/25p] / [VGA/25p]
*1
TZ100/TZ101
[Frame Rate]
Set the number of frames per second. When you set a higher number, you
can create a more seamless animation.
[50fps]*2 / [25fps] / [12.5fps] / [8.3fps] / [6.25fps] / [5fps] / [2.5fps] / [1fps]
*2 Only available with [FHD/50p] setting
•• TZ100/TZ101
You can set the number of frames to [24fps], [12fps], [8fps], [6fps], [4.8fps],
[2.4fps], or [1fps] when [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/24p].
[Sequence]
[NORMAL]: Stitches the still pictures in the recording sequence.
[REVERSE]: Stitches the still pictures in the reverse order of recording.
Press
to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]
••You can also create a stop motion animation using [Stop Motion Video] in the
[Playback] menu. (→293)
■■Adding pictures to an already recorded stop motion animation group
When you select [Additional] in step 4, group pictures recorded using [Stop Motion
Animation] are displayed. Select a set of group pictures and press [MENU/SET]. Then,
select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
221
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]
●●[Auto Shooting] may not be performed according to the preset interval because recording could
take time under some recording conditions, such as when pictures are taken using a flash.
●●When you select the picture quality for an aspect ratio that is different from the original picture, the
picture will be displayed with a black band on the upper/lower side or the left/right side of a stop
motion animation.
●●Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).
●●If the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or AC adaptor disconnection while a motion
picture is being recorded using the AC adaptor (optional), that motion picture will not be recorded.
●● TZ100/TZ101
When creating motion pictures at a picture quality setting of [4K/25p] or [4K/24p], recording times
are limited to 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
●●
TZ80/TZ81
When creating motion pictures at a picture quality setting of [4K/25p], recording times are limited
to 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
●●If using an SDHC Memory Card, you will not be able to create motion pictures with a file size
greater than 4 GB. With an SDXC Memory Card, you can create motion pictures with a file size
greater than 4 GB.
●●When creating a motion picture with a picture quality setting of [FHD/50p], [FHD/25p], [HD/25p],
or [VGA/25p], you will be unable to create it if the recording time is more than 29 minutes and
59 seconds or the file size is greater than 4 GB.
●●If only one still picture is recorded, it will not be recorded as a group picture. You cannot select
only one recorded still picture using [Additional].
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
●●[Auto Shooting] in [Stop Motion Animation] cannot be used in the following case:
•• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
222
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
TZ100/TZ101
picture
Performing multiple exposures for a single
[Multi Exp.]
Recording mode:
You can create an effect similar to the operation of up to four times of exposure on a
single picture.
1
Set the menu
2
3
Press
→
[Rec] → [Multi Exp.]
to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]
Decide on your composition and take the
first picture
••After recording the first picture, press the shutter
button halfway to proceed to the next recording.
••Press
to select the item and press [MENU/SET].
You can perform the following operations.
–– [Next]: Proceed to the next recording.
–– [Retake]: Delete the result of the last shot and take
another picture.
–– [Exit]: E
xit Multi Exposure and save the picture that
was taken.
4
Exit
Record the second, third, and fourth
pictures
••When you press [Fn1] button while taking pictures, the
pictures that you took are saved and Multi Exposure
is closed.
5
Next
Retake
Press to select [Exit] and press
[MENU/SET]
Retake
Exit
••You can also end the operation by pressing the shutter
button halfway.
223
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
TZ100/TZ101
Performing multiple exposures for a single picture [Multi Exp.]
■■About the automatic gain compensation setting
Select [Auto Gain] on the screen in step 2 of “Performing multiple exposures for a
single picture” (→223).
••[ON]: C
ombines several pictures into one by automatically adjusting the brightness in
accordance with the number of pictures taken.
••[OFF]:Combines several pictures into one by simply overlapping the exposure
results of all pictures, as is. Perform the Exposure Compensation based on
the requirements of a subject.
■■To overlay the pictures on the RAW file picture in a card
Set [Overlay] to [ON] on the screen in step 2 of “Performing multiple exposures for a
single picture” (→223). After selecting [Start], the pictures on a card will be displayed.
Select the RAW file pictures and press [MENU/SET] to continue recording.
••You can perform [Overlay] on RAW file pictures recorded using this camera only.
●●Pictures are not saved in memory until Multi Exposure is ended.
●●Information for the picture taken last will be used as recording information of pictures taken using
Multi Exposure.
●●While [Multi Exp.] recording is being performed, you cannot set items displayed in grey on the
menu screen.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When using [Stop Motion Animation]
224
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Disabling the beeps and flash at the same time
[Silent Mode]
Recording mode:
This mode is useful when you are taking pictures in a quiet environment or public facilities
or when you take pictures of a subject such as a baby or animal.
1
Set the menu
→
[Custom] → [Silent Mode]
Settings: [ON] / [OFF]
••This mode will mute beeps, set the flash to [ ] (Forced Flash Off), and disable
AF Assist Lamp. The settings for the following functions are fixed:
–– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]
–– Flash: [ ] (Forced Flash Off)
–– [AF Assist Lamp]: [OFF]
–– [Beep Volume]: [ ] (Off)
–– [Shutter Vol.]: [ ] (Off)
●●Even when this mode is set to [ON], the following lamps/indicators will light or flash.
•• Self-timer indicator
•• Wi-Fi connection lamp
●●The operation sounds of this camera such as the lens aperture sound are not muted.
●●If you take a picture of a moving subject using the electronic shutter, the subject in the
picture may be skewed in some cases.
●●When you take a picture under a fluorescent or LED lighting fixture using the electronic
shutter, the recorded picture may have horizontal stripes. If you use a slower shutter
speed, the horizontal stripes may be reduced. (→102)
225
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Recording with the Face Recognition function
[Face Recog.]
Recording mode:
The Face Recognition function recognises a face similar to a registered face and
automatically adjusts focus and exposure for the face with higher priority. Even if a person
you want to focus on is standing at the back or corner in a group photo, the camera will
automatically recognise the person and record this person’s face clearly.
1
Set the menu
→
[Rec] → [Face Recog.]
Settings: [ON] / [OFF] / [MEMORY]
Default [Face Recog.] setting is [OFF].
When the face pictures are registered, the setting will be [ON] automatically.
■■How the Face Recognition function works
During recording
••The camera recognises a registered face and adjusts
focus and exposure.
••When registered faces that have set names are
recognised, the names are displayed (max. 3 people).
During playback
••The name and age are displayed (if information is
registered).
••The names that have been set for the recognised faces
are displayed (max. 3 people).
••Only pictures of the selected registered people are played
back ([Category Play]).
●●[Face Recog.] functions only when Auto Focus mode is set to [ ].
●●Only the first picture of the burst recording will contain Face Recognition information.
●●The name of the person recognised in the first picture is displayed in the case of group pictures.
●●Face Recognition may take more time to select and recognise distinctive facial features than
regular Face/Eye Detection.
●●Face Recognition searches for faces similar to those registered, but there is no guarantee it
will always recognise these faces. In some cases, the camera cannot recognise or incorrectly
recognises even registered people depending on their expression or the environment.
●●Even if Face Recognition information is registered, pictures recorded when the name is [OFF] are
not categorised for Face Recognition in [Category Play].
●●Even if Face Recognition information is changed, Face Recognition information for
previously recorded pictures is not changed. (→228)
For example, if a name is changed, pictures recorded before the change are not categorised for
Face Recognition in [Category Play].
●●To change name information for pictures already recorded, perform a [REPLACE] (→299) in [Face
Rec Edit].
226
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Recording with the Face Recognition function [Face Recog.]
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
•• During motion picture recording
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
Registering face pictures
Up to 6 people’s face pictures can be registered along with such information as name and
birthdate.
Good example for registering
■■Recording tips when registering face pictures
••Make sure the subject’s eyes are open and mouth closed; a face
have the subject face the camera directly, and make sure
the outline of the face, the eyes and eyebrows are not
hidden by hair.
••Make sure there are no heavy shadows on the face.
(During registration, the flash is not used.)
■■If the camera seems to have difficulty recognising faces when recording
••Register additional pictures of the same person’s face, indoors and outdoors or with
different expressions or angles.
••Register additional pictures at the place you are recording.
••If a registered person is no longer recognised, re-register that person.
1
2
3
227
Use
to select [MEMORY] and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select [New] and press [MENU/SET]
•• If 6 people are already registered, first delete a registered
person. (→228)
1
New
2
3
5
6
KEN
4
Align the face with the guide and record
•• Faces of subjects other than people (e.g. pets) cannot be
registered.
•• When is pressed or [ ] is touched, an explanation is
displayed.
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Recording with the Face Recognition function [Face Recog.]
4
Use
to select the item for editing and press [MENU/SET]
[Name]
Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]
Enter the name (See “Entering Text”: (→87))
[Age]
Set the birthdate.
Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select year, month and day, set with
[MENU/SET]
[Add Images]
, and press
Up to 3 face pictures of the person can be registered.
Use
to select [Add] and press [MENU/SET]
•• If only one picture is registered, you can skip the cursor button operation.
Just press [MENU/SET] to register an additional face picture.
•• When a registered face picture is selected with cursor button, a screen to
confirm deletion is displayed. Select [Yes] to delete the face picture.
Record the picture (step 3 (→227))
Editing or deleting information about registered persons
1
2
3
Use
to select [MEMORY] and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select the picture of the person to be edited or deleted and
press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
[Info Edit]
228
Edit name or other registered information. (Step 4 above)
[Priority]
Set priority order for focus and exposure.
Use
to select the registration order and press [MENU/SET]
[Delete]
Delete information and face pictures of registered persons.
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Setting the profile for a baby or pet to record in a
picture
Recording mode:
You can set a name or birthday of a baby or pet before taking a picture to record the
name or age in months/years in the picture.
■■Setting the name and age in months/years
Set the menu
→
[Rec] → [Profile Setup]
Settings: [
] ([Baby1]) / [
] ([Baby2]) / [
] ([Pet]) / [OFF] / [SET]
Use
Use
Use
Use
to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]
to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and press [MENU/SET]
to select [Age] or [Name] and press [MENU/SET]
to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select [Exit] and press [MENU/SET] to finish
Age: Use
to select year, month and day, set with
Name: (See “Entering Text”: (→87))
, and press [MENU/SET]
■■Cancelling the display of the name and age in months/years
Select [OFF] in step
.
●●[Name] and [Age] print settings can be made on your computer using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
software, which you download from a website (→353). Text may also be stamped onto the still
picture using the camera’s [Text Stamp].
●●[Profile Setup] is not available for 4K photo recording or recording in [Post Focus].
●●You cannot record the name or age in months/years in the following cases:
•• During motion picture recording
•• Still pictures that are taken while recording motion pictures (→261)
229
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Displaying the appropriate screen for specific
recording conditions
Checking the area where overexposure may occur ([Zebra Pattern])
Recording mode:
You can check the area in a picture that is brighter than a certain brightness, which could
result in overexposure, by displaying such an area using a zebra pattern. You can also
set the brightness to be represented by the zebra pattern.
→
[Custom] → [Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1]
Displays an area brighter than a certain brightness using a
right-leaning zebra pattern.
[ZEBRA2]
Displays an area brighter than a certain brightness using a
left-leaning zebra pattern.
[OFF]
—
Sets the brightness to be displayed for each zebra pattern.
[Zebra 1] / [Zebra 2]
[SET]
1
Use
to select the brightness and press [MENU/SET]
•• The range of brightness you can select from is [50%] to [105%]. The [OFF]
setting is available for [Zebra 2]. When [100%] or [105%] is selected, only the
overexposed areas are displayed with the zebra pattern. When a smaller numeric
value is set, the range of brightness to be displayed by each zebra pattern will
increase.
●●If there is overexposure, we recommend taking pictures using a lower exposure value (→177),
using the histogram (→55) as a guideline.
●●The displayed zebra pattern is not recorded.
●●If you set [Zebra Pattern] to [Fn Button Set] (→70) in the [Custom] menu, every time you press
the assigned function button the setting will switch in the following order: [Zebra 1] → [Zebra 2]
→ [Zebra OFF]. When [Zebra 2] is set to [OFF], you can switch the setting quickly in the following
order: [Zebra 1] → [Zebra OFF].
230
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Displaying the appropriate screen for specific recording conditions
Setting a monochrome display for the recording screen
([Monochrome Live View])
Recording mode:
You can display the recording screen in black and white. This function is useful when a
black and white screen will make it easier to adjust focus in Manual Focus mode.
→
[Custom] → [Monochrome Live View]
Settings: [ON] / [OFF]
•• TZ100/TZ101
Even if you use the HDMI output during recording, this function will not work for the
connected device.
••This does not affect recorded pictures.
231
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
TZ100/TZ101
Recording while monitoring camera images
Recording mode:
When using the HDMI output, you can take pictures while
monitoring the camera image on a TV, etc.
■■To connect with an HDMI micro cable
Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong
direction, the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation.) Also, do not
insert into the wrong socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.
[HDMI] socket
To HDMI video/audio input socket
HDMI micro cable
Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo. Cables that do not
comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D-Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)
■■Switching the information displayed
You can change the display shown during HDMI output using [HDMI Info Display (Rec)]
(→83) in [TV Connection] on the [Setup] menu.
[ON]: The camera display is output as is.
[OFF]: Only images are output.
232
SQW0550
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
TZ100/TZ101
Recording while monitoring camera images
●●When using the Auto Focus Mode [
] or MF assist, the screen cannot be enlarged in windowed
mode.
●●[Aspect Ratio] in the [Rec] menu is fixed to [16:9].
●●An electronic sound or shutter sound will not sound.
●●If you set up a Wi-Fi connection while using the HDMI output, no image will be displayed on the
camera monitor.
●●The scene selection screen in Scene Guide Mode is not output through the HDMI connection.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• During motion picture recording
•• During panorama picture recording
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
233
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Correcting jitter
Recording mode:
Automatically detects and prevents jitter.
1
Set the menu
2
Use
→
(Normal)
(Panning)
[OFF]
[Rec] → [Stabilizer]
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
Corrects vertical and horizontal jitter.
Corrects vertical jitter. This setting is ideal for panning (technique of
recording a subject by matching the camera movement with the movement
of a subject going in a specific direction). We recommend using the
Viewfinder.
[Stabilizer] does not work.
To prevent jitter
If a warning is displayed about jitter, use [Stabilizer], a tripod,
or [Self Timer].
●●Shutter speed will be slower particularly in the following
cases. Keep the camera still from the moment the shutter
button is pressed until the picture appears on the screen.
We recommend using a tripod.
50p
••[Slow Sync.]
••[Slow Sync./Red-Eye]
••[Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic
Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Clear Night Portrait] (Scene Guide Mode)
••When the shutter speed is slowed
234
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Correcting jitter
●●When you use a tripod, we recommend setting [Stabilizer] to [OFF]. [
] is displayed on the
screen at that time.
●●[Stabilizer] cannot be used by selecting [ ] (Normal) in Panorama Shot Mode.
●●In the following cases, the [Stabilizer] will switch to [ ] (Normal), even if it is set to [ ]
(Panning):
•• During motion picture recording
•• When 4K Photo function has been set
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
●●[Stabilizer] cannot be used when recording high-speed motion pictures.
●●The 5-axis Hybrid Image Stabiliser function automatically functions while recording motion
pictures. This decreases the jitter of the image when recording motion pictures while zooming or
walking, etc.
•• The recording range may become narrower.
•• If you record an [MP4] motion picture with the [Rec Quality] set to [VGA/4M/25p], the stabiliser
function may be weaker compared to other picture quality settings.
•• TZ100/TZ101
The 5-axis Hybrid Image Stabiliser function is not available when recording motion pictures for
which [Rec Quality] is set to either [4K/100M/25p] or [4K/100M/24p].
•• TZ80/TZ81
The 5-axis Hybrid Image Stabiliser function is not available when recording motion pictures for
which [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/100M/25p].
●●Cases where the stabiliser function may be ineffective:
•• When there is a lot of jitter
•• When the zoom magnification is high (also in the Digital Zoom range)
•• When taking pictures while following a moving subject
•• When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places
●●The panning effect by selecting [ ] is not fully achieved in the following cases:
•• Bright summer days or other bright locations
•• When the shutter speed is higher than 1/100 seconds
•• When the motion of a subject is slow and the speed with which the camera is moved is too slow
(a nice background blur is not achieved)
•• When the camera is not adequately tracking the motion of a subject
235
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Using Zoom
Zoom types and use
The zoom ratio changes when the picture size is changed.
Optical Zoom
Recording mode:
You can zoom in without degrading the picture quality.
Maximum magnification: TZ100/TZ101 10x
TZ80/TZ81 30x
●●This function is not available in the following case:
•• When recording with [Macro Zoom]
Extra optical zoom
Recording mode:
This function works when picture sizes with [ ] have been selected in [Picture Size]
(→139). Extra optical zoom allows you to zoom in using a higher zoom ratio than Optical
Zoom, without degrading the picture quality. The maximum zoom ratio varies depending
on the picture size.
Maximum magnification: TZ100/TZ101 20x
TZ80/TZ81 61.2x
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop] (Creative Control Mode)
•• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]
•• When [HDR] is set to [ON]
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
•• When [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON]
•• When [iHDR] is set to [ON]
], [
] or [ ]
•• When [Quality] is set to [
•• When recording with [Macro Zoom]
•• During motion picture recording
236
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Using Zoom
To increase the zoom ratio further, the following zoom can be used in combination.
[i.Zoom]
Recording mode:
You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution technology to increase the zoom ratio up
to 2x higher than the original zoom ratio with limited deterioration of picture quality.
→
[Rec] /
[Motion Picture] → [i.Zoom] → [ON] / [OFF]
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• [Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop] (Creative Control Mode)
•• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
•• During [Macro Zoom] recording
•• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]
•• When [HDR] is set to [ON]
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
•• When [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON]
•• When [iHDR] is set to [ON]
], [
] or [ ]
•• When [Quality] is set to [
237
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Using Zoom
[Digital Zoom]
Recording mode:
Zoom 4x further than Optical/Extra optical zoom. When [Digital Zoom] is used
simultaneously with [i.Zoom], you can only increase the zoom ratio up to 2x.
(TZ100/TZ80)
Zoom 2x further than Optical/Extra optical zoom when [i.Zoom] is set to [OFF]. When
[i.Zoom] is set to [ON], [Digital Zoom] is cancelled. (TZ101/TZ81)
Note that, with Digital Zoom, enlarging will decrease picture quality.
→
[Rec] /
[Motion Picture] → [Digital Zoom] → [ON] / [OFF]
●●When using [Digital Zoom], we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (→208) for taking
pictures.
●●The AF area is largely displayed at the centre in the Digital Zoom range.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• [Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
•• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
•• When recording with [High Speed Video]
•• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]
•• When [HDR] is set to [ON]
•• TZ100/TZ101 When [Multi Exp.] is set
], [
] or [ ]
•• When [Quality] is set to [
The illustration is an example of when using Optical Zoom, [i.Zoom], and [Digital Zoom] in Programme
AE Mode. (TZ100/TZ80)
Focus range
Optical Zoom range
i.Zoom range
Digital Zoom range
Current zoom position (Focal lengths the same as those of a 35 mm film camera)
238
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Using Zoom
Changing the zoom operation settings
→
[Custom] → [Zoom lever]
The zoom operates in the normal way.
Each time zoom is operated, the zoom stops at the position for
one of the preset focal lengths.
(Zoom)
(Step Zoom)
•• This setting does not work when
recording motion pictures or 4K
] ([4K Pre-Burst]).
photos with [
Current zoom position
Focus range
••The zoom or step zoom setting can be assigned to the control ring. (→74, 75)
Retaining / not retaining the zoom position when the camera is
turned off
→
239
[Custom] → [Zoom Resume] → [ON] / [OFF]
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Using Zoom
Using the zoom by performing touch operations (Touch zoom)
1
2
Touch [ ]
3
Perform zoom operations by dragging the slide
bar
Touch [
]
•• The slide bar is displayed.
•• The zoom speed varies depending on the touched position.
[
]/[
]
Slow zooming
[
]/[
]
Fast zooming
•• Touch [
] again to end touch zoom operations.
●●When the zoom operation of the [Zoom lever] is set to Step Zoom (→239), a slide bar for step
zoom appears.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• When [High Speed Video] is set
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
240
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Taking pictures with flash
Recording mode:
With the flash you can take pictures in dark places or adjust the entire contrast of a
picture by illuminating a subject with a bright background.
■■ TZ100/TZ101
Open/Close the built-in flash
To open the flash
Slide the flash open lever.
•• Be careful when opening the flash as the flash
will jump out.
To close the flash
Press the flash until it clicks.
•• Be careful not to catch a finger or any other
part of your body or any object when you close
the flash.
•• Forcibly closing the flash can damage the camera.
•• Be sure to close the built-in flash when not in use.
] while the flash is
•• The flash setting is fixed to [
closed.
■■
TZ80/TZ81 Use / Do not use flash
You can record with flash as appropriate to the recording mode.
Setting the way the flash works (→244)
If you do not wish to use flash,
press the [ ] button ( ) and select [ ] (Forced Flash Off).
●●The flash is fixed to [
] (Forced Flash Off) in the following cases:
•• During motion picture recording
•• When recording 4K photos
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
•• When using the electronic shutter
•• When [HDR] is set to [ON]
•• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
•• When a picture effect in [Filter Effect] of [Filter Settings] is set
241
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Taking pictures with flash
About [
] (Forced Flash Off)
●●When pictures cannot be taken using the flash because the flash is closed or during
motion picture recording, etc., [ ] (Forced Flash Off) is displayed on the recording
screen and the flash will not fire.
●●TZ100/TZ101
Close the flash in places where its use is prohibited so that it will not fire.
●● TZ80/TZ81
Press
fire.
and select [
] in places where its use is prohibited so that it will not
How to use the flash effectively
Taking a picture using the flash with the subject too close may cause overexposure.
When you set [Highlight] in the [Custom] menu to [ON], the overexposed areas will flash
black and white during [Auto Review] or playback. If that happens, we recommend taking
the picture again, for example, after setting a lower flash output using [Flash Adjust.]
(→250).
■■The available flash range
Edges of a picture may become slightly dark if using flash at short distances without
using zoom (close to max. Wide). This may be remedied by using a little zoom.
Max. Wide
Max. Tele
TZ100/TZ101
Approx. 0.6 m - 8.0 m
(2.0 feet - 26 feet)
Approx. 0.7 m - 3.8 m
(2.3 feet - 12 feet)
TZ80/TZ81
Approx. 0.6 m - 5.6 m
(2.0 feet - 18 feet)
Approx. 2.0 m - 2.9 m
(6.6 feet - 9.5 feet)
••These ranges are obtained, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], and [ISO Limit Set] is
set to [OFF].
●●Avoid doing the following, as the heat or light could cause deformation or discolouration.
•• Putting the flash close to objects
•• Covering the flash with your hand as it is firing
•• TZ100/TZ101 Closing the flash as it is firing
●● TZ100/TZ101
Do not close the flash immediately after the preliminary flash is operated prior to taking pictures for
Forced ON/Red-Eye Reduction and other flash settings. If you close the flash immediately, it will
cause a malfunction.
●●Flash charging may take time if battery is low or if using flash repeatedly. When the flash is being
charged, the flash icon flashes red, and you cannot take a picture even when you fully press the
shutter button.
242
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Setting the Flash Functions
Changing Flash Mode
Set the flash to match the recording.
Recording mode:
Set the menu
TZ100/TZ101
1
2
→
Press
[Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Mode]
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
: [Forced Flash On]
: [Forced On/Red-Eye]*
: [Slow Sync.]
: [Slow Sync./Red-Eye]*
Always takes pictures using the flash.
•• Ideal for taking pictures with a backlight or when a
subject is located under bright lighting such as a
fluorescent light.
When taking pictures against a dark background
landscape, this feature will slow the shutter speed when
the flash is activated.
•• Ideal for taking pictures of people against a
nightscape.
•• Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. We
recommend using a tripod.
* Two flashes will be emitted. Do not move until after the second flash. Interval between
flashes varies according to brightness of subject.
•• The red-eye reduction effect varies depending on the subject and is affected by factors such
as distance from the subject and whether the subject is looking at the camera during the
preliminary flash. In some cases, red-eye reduction may be negligible.
243
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Setting the Flash Functions
TZ80/TZ81
1
2
Recording mode:
Press [ ] button (
Use
)
to select the desired type and press [MENU/SET]
: [Auto]
: iAuto*1
: [Auto/Red-Eye]*2
: [Forced Flash On]
: [Forced On/Red-Eye]*2
: [Slow Sync.]
: [Slow Sync./Red-Eye]*2
: [Forced Flash Off]
The flash is automatically activated when the recording
conditions make it necessary.
The flash fires automatically to control red eye according
to recording conditions
•• Use this when you take pictures of people in low
lighting conditions.
The flash is activated every time regardless of the
recording conditions.
•• Use this when your subject is back-lit or under
fluorescent light.
Takes brighter pictures such as pictures of subjects
against a nightscape by decreasing the shutter speed
when firing a flash.
•• Ideal for taking pictures of people against a
nightscape.
•• Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. We
recommend using a tripod.
The flash is not activated in any recording conditions.
•• Use this when you take pictures in places where the
use of the flash is not permitted.
*1 This can be set only in Intelligent Auto Mode [
] or [
]. The icon changes depending on the
type of subject and brightness.
*2 Two flashes will be emitted. Do not move until after the second flash. Interval between
flashes varies according to brightness of subject.
•• The red-eye reduction effect varies depending on the subject and is affected by factors such
as distance from the subject and whether the subject is looking at the camera during the
preliminary flash. In some cases, red-eye reduction may be negligible.
244
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Setting the Flash Functions
■■Reducing red-eye
Recording mode:
TZ100/TZ101
Automatically detects red-eye and corrects still picture data when recording with flash
red-eye reduction ([
], [
]).
TZ80/TZ81
Automatically detects red-eye and corrects still picture data when recording with flash
red-eye reduction ([
], [
] or [
]).
→
[Rec] → [Red-Eye Removal]
Settings: [ON] / [OFF]
●● TZ100/TZ101
When this function is set to [ON], the flash icon changes to [
●●
TZ80/TZ81
When this function is set to [ON], the flash icon changes to [
]/[
]/[
].
]/[
●●Depending on the circumstance, it may not be possible to correct red-eye.
245
].
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Setting the Flash Functions
■■ TZ100/TZ101
Flash settings for each Recording mode (○: Available, –: Not available)
Recording mode
–*
Intelligent Auto Mode
–*
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
Programme AE Mode
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
○
○
–
–
○
–
–
–
○
○
–
●
–
○
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
○
–
–
–
●
●
–
–
–
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
○
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
○
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
–
–
–
–
–
○
Manual Exposure Mode
Creative Video Mode
Panorama Shot Mode
Creative Control Mode
[Clear Portrait]
[Silky Skin]
[Backlit Softness]
[Clear in Backlight]
[Relaxing Tone]
[Sweet Child’s Face]
[Distinct Scenery]
[Bright Blue Sky]
[Romantic Sunset Glow]
[Vivid Sunset Glow]
[Glistening Water]
Scene Guide
[Clear Nightscape]
Mode
[Cool Night Sky]
(●: D
efault
[Warm Glowing Nightscape]
settings)
[Artistic Nightscape]
[Glittering Illuminations]
[Handheld Night Shot]
[Clear Night Portrait]
[Soft Image of a Flower]
[Appetizing Food]
[Cute Dessert]
[Freeze Animal Motion]
[Clear Sports Shot]
[Monochrome]
* The display will show [
] when the flash is in use. (→90)
●●When the built-in flash is closed, the display will show Forced Flash Off ([
]) regardless of
flash setting.
●●The Scene Guide Mode flash setting is returned to the initial value with each change of scene.
246
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Setting the Flash Functions
■■
TZ80/TZ81
Flash settings for each Recording mode (○: Available, –: Not available)
Recording mode
–*1
Intelligent Auto Mode
○
–*1
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
○
Programme AE Mode
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
○
○
–
–
○
○
–
–
–
○
○
–
●*2
–
○
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●*3
●*3
●*3
●*3
●*3
●*3
○
–
–
–
●*4
●*4
–
–
–
●*4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
○
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
○
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
–
–
–
–
–
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
●
○
●
○
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Manual Exposure Mode
Creative Video Mode
Panorama Shot Mode
Creative Control Mode
[Clear Portrait]
[Silky Skin]
[Backlit Softness]
[Clear in Backlight]
[Relaxing Tone]
[Sweet Child’s Face]
[Distinct Scenery]
[Bright Blue Sky]
[Romantic Sunset Glow]
[Vivid Sunset Glow]
[Glistening Water]
Scene Guide
[Clear Nightscape]
Mode
[Cool Night Sky]
(●: D
efault
[Warm Glowing Nightscape]
settings)
[Artistic Nightscape]
[Glittering Illuminations]
[Handheld Night Shot]
[Clear Night Portrait]
[Soft Image of a Flower]
[Appetizing Food]
[Cute Dessert]
[Freeze Animal Motion]
[Clear Sports Shot]
[Monochrome]
*1 The display will show [
*2 Default setting is [ ].
*3 Default setting is [ ].
*4 Default setting is [
].
] when the flash is in use. (→90)
●●The Scene Guide Mode flash setting is returned to the initial value with each change of scene.
247
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Setting the Flash Functions
■■Shutter speeds for each flash mode
Flash Mode
Shutter speed (seconds)
Flash Mode
Shutter speed (seconds)
1 - 1/16000
*1
1/60*2 - 1/2000
60*3 - 1/16000
*
1
*
*2
1
TZ80/TZ81
TZ100/TZ101
The shutter speed is set to 60 seconds in Shutter-Priority AE Mode and to T (Time) in Manual
Exposure Mode.
TZ80/TZ81
*3
The shutter speed is set to 4 seconds in Shutter-Priority AE Mode.
TZ100/TZ101
The shutter speed is set to T (Time) in Manual Exposure Mode.
••In Intelligent Auto Mode ([
detected scene.
248
] or [
]), the shutter speed changes depending on the
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Setting the Flash Functions
TZ100/TZ101
Setting the 2nd curtain sync
Recording mode:
2nd curtain sync is a recording method in which the flash fires just before the shutter
closes when you take a picture of a moving subject (such as a car) using the flash with a
slow shutter speed.
1 Set the menu
→
2
[Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Synchro]
Press
to select the setting item and press [MENU/SET]
[1ST]
1st curtain sync is the normal recording method
when using the flash.
[2ND]
The light source is captured in back of the subject
and this produces a picture that is vibrant and
lively.
●●If you set to [2ND], [2nd] will be displayed in the flash icon on the screen.
●●When a fast shutter speed is set, the [Flash Synchro] effect may not be sufficiently achieved.
●●When [2ND] is set, you cannot set the flash setting to [ ] or [ ].
249
SQW0550
Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Setting the Flash Functions
Adjusting the flash output
Recording mode:
Adjust the flash output if a picture taken using the flash is too bright or too dark.
1 Set the menu
TZ100/TZ101
→
[Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Adjust.]
TZ80/TZ81
→
2
Press
[Rec] → [Flash Adjust.]
to set the flash output and press [MENU/SET]
Settings: -2 EV to +2 EV (unit: 1/3 EV)
When you do not want to adjust the intensity of the flash, select [±0 EV].
●●When the intensity of the flash is adjusted, [+] or [-] is displayed on the flash icon.
250
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording motion pictures
Recording mode:
You can record full high-definition quality images that comply with the AVCHD standard,
as well as motion pictures recorded in MP4. You can also record a 4K motion picture in
MP4. (→254)
Audio is recorded in stereo.
1
2
Press the motion picture button to start
recording
••Recording of motion picture appropriate for each
motion picture mode is possible.
••Immediately release the motion picture button after
pressing it.
••While you are recording motion pictures, the recording
status indicator (red) will flash.
••With recording in a quiet environment, the
sound of aperture, focus and other actions may
be recorded in motion pictures. This is not a
malfunction.
The focus operation during recording of motion
pictures can be set to [OFF] in [Continuous AF].
(→257)
••If some information is no longer displayed on the
screen, press the [DISP.] button or touch the monitor.
••Still pictures can be taken during motion picture
recording. (→261)
Press the motion picture button again to
end recording
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Recording state
indicator
Elapsed recording time
Remaining recording time
251
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording motion pictures
Switching the angle of view setting used for recording still pictures
and motion pictures
→
[Custom] → [Rec Area] → [
] (Picture) / [
] (Motion picture)
●●If the aspect ratio is different for still pictures and motion pictures, the angle of view will
change when starting to record a motion picture.
When you set [Rec Area] to [ ], the angle of view setting used for recording motion
pictures is displayed.
●●[Rec Area] is not available for 4K photo recording or recording in [Post Focus].
About operation sound when recording ends
If the operation sound of the motion picture button pressed to end recording bothers you,
try the following:
●●Record the motion picture about three seconds longer, and then divide the last part of
the motion picture using [Video Divide] (→292) in the [Playback] menu.
252
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording motion pictures
●●If the surrounding temperature is high, or a motion picture is recorded continuously, [
] is
displayed and recording may be stopped halfway through to protect the camera. Wait until the
camera cools down.
●●If Extra optical zoom is used before pressing the motion picture button, these settings will be
cleared, and the recordable area will be changed significantly.
●●Note that if you perform operations such as zoom, using buttons or dials, while recording a motion
picture, operation noise may be recorded.
●●The zoom speed will be slower than normal during motion picture recording.
●●Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after
recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.
●●ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] (for motion pictures) while a motion picture is being recorded. Also
[ISO Limit Set] is disabled.
●●It is recommended to use a fully charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler
(optional) when recording motion pictures.
●●If while recording motion pictures using the AC adaptor (optional) and the power supply is cut off
due to a power outage or if the AC adaptor is disconnected etc., the motion picture being recorded
will not be recorded.
●●The below-mentioned motion picture recording modes are set in the following cases:
Selected Scene Guide Mode
Recording mode at the time of
recording motion pictures
[Clear in Backlight]
Portrait Mode
[Clear Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape],
[Handheld Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait]
Low Light Mode
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)
•• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Toy Effect]*1, [Toy Pop]*1, [Miniature Effect]*1, *2,
[Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
*1 When [4K Live Cropping] is set to [ON].
*2 When recording motion pictures with [Rec Quality] of [4K]
•• When recording using [Post Focus]
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When using [Stop Motion Animation]
253
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording motion pictures
Recording 4K motion pictures
Recording mode:
You can record high-resolution 4K motion pictures by setting [Rec Quality] to [4K].
••To record 4K motion pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→37)
••When you record 4K motion pictures, the angle of view will be narrower than motion
pictures of other sizes.
••Limitations on continuous recording (→41)
■■To record motion pictures in 4K
Select the recording mode (→49)
Set the [Rec Format] in the [Motion Picture] menu to [MP4] (→255)
TZ100/TZ101
Set [Rec Quality] in the [Motion Picture] menu to [4K/100M/25p] or [4K/100M/24p]
(→255)
TZ80/TZ81
Set [Rec Quality] in the [Motion Picture] menu to [4K/100M/25p] (→255)
Start recording by pressing the motion picture button
Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture button again
●●Recording is performed by reducing the Auto Focus speed in order to adjust the focus at high
precision. Sometimes focus adjustment with Auto Focus mode is difficult, but this is not a
malfunction.
254
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording motion pictures
Setting the format, picture size and recording frame rate
Recording mode:
1
Set the menu
2
Use
3
4
→
[Motion Picture] → [Rec Format]
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
[AVCHD]
This is a data format suitable for playback on high-definition TVs.
[MP4]
This data format is suited for playing back motion pictures on a computer and other
such devices.
Use
to select [Rec Quality] and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
When [AVCHD] is selected
[Rec Quality]
[FHD/28M/50p]*1
Picture size
Recording frame rate
Sensor output
Bit rate
1920×1080
50p
50 fps
Approx. 28 Mbps
[FHD/17M/50i]
1920×1080
50i
50 fps
Approx. 17 Mbps
[FHD/24M/25p]
1920×1080
50i
25 fps
Approx. 24 Mbps
1920×1080
24p
24 fps
Approx. 24 Mbps
Picture size
Recording frame rate
Sensor output
Bit rate
3840×2160
25p
25 fps
Approx. 100 Mbps
[FHD/24M/24p]*2
When [MP4] is selected
[Rec Quality]
[4K/100M/25p]
[4K/100M/24p]*2
3840×2160
24p
24 fps
Approx. 100 Mbps
[FHD/28M/50p]
1920×1080
50p
50 fps
Approx. 28 Mbps
[FHD/20M/25p]
1920×1080
25p
25 fps
Approx. 20 Mbps
[HD/10M/25p]
1280×720
25p
25 fps
Approx. 10 Mbps
[VGA/4M/25p]
640×480
25p
25 fps
Approx. 4 Mbps
*1 AVCHD Progressive
*2 TZ100/TZ101
255
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording motion pictures
••The quality becomes higher when the number of bit rate gets bigger. This unit uses the
“VBR” recording method, and the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the
subject to record. Therefore, the recording time is shortened when a subject with fast
movement is recorded.
••Limitations on continuous recording (→41)
■■About the compatibility of the recorded motion pictures
Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] or [MP4] may be played back with poor picture or
sound quality or playback may not be possible even when played back with equipment
compatible with these formats. Also, the recording information may not be displayed
properly.
•• TZ100/TZ101
When you play back and import motion pictures recorded with [FHD/28M/50p],
[FHD/24M/25p], or [FHD/24M/24p] in [AVCHD] using a device other than this unit, a
compatible Blu-ray disc recorder or PC installed with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software
downloaded from our website (→353) is required.
•• TZ100/TZ101
For details on motion pictures recorded with [4K/100M/25p] or [4K/100M/24p] in the
[MP4] format, refer to “Enjoying 4K motion pictures” (→346).
•• TZ80/TZ81
When you play back and import motion pictures recorded with [FHD/28M/50p], or
[FHD/24M/25p] in [AVCHD] using a device other than this unit, a compatible Blu-ray
disc recorder or PC installed with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software downloaded from
our website (→353) is required.
•• TZ80/TZ81
For details on motion pictures recorded with [4K/100M/25p] in the [MP4] format, refer
to “Enjoying 4K motion pictures” (→346).
256
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording motion pictures
Adjusting the focus while recording motion pictures
([Continuous AF])
Recording mode:
Focusing varies depending on the setting of [AFS/AFF/AFC] (→148) in the [Rec] menu
and the setting of [Continuous AF] in the [Motion Picture] menu.
If the focus mode is [MF], the focus can be set manually. (→167)
[AFS/AFF/AFC]
[AFS]/[AFF]/
[AFC]
[Continuous AF]
Setting
[ON]
Allow the focus to be constantly adjusted
automatically while recording motion pictures.
(→148)
[OFF]
Fix focus position at the start of motion picture
recording.
••When [AFS/AFF/AFC] is set to [AFS], [AFF], or [AFC], the camera will refocus if the
shutter button is pressed halfway while recording motion pictures.
••When Auto Focus is activated while you are recording motion pictures, the focusing
operation sound may be recorded under some conditions. If you want to suppress this
sound, we recommend taking pictures after setting [Continuous AF] to [OFF] in the
[Motion Picture] menu.
••When using zoom while recording motion pictures, it may take some time to focus.
••[Continuous AF] does not work while [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is in operation.
257
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording pans with little vibration or recording
motion pictures with zoom [4K Live Cropping]
Recording mode:
You can pan while recording subjects without horizontal shaking of the camera, and
you can zoom in and out during motion picture recording without using zoom. During
recording, you can crop your video down from the 4K angle of view (3840×2160) to Full
High Definition (1920×1080) by capturing the subject at a wide angle of view and setting
a crop start frame and crop end frame.
••Hold the camera firmly in place while recording.
••A motion picture will be recorded at [FHD/20M/25p] under [MP4].
Example of panning while recording.
Setting crop frames at 4K angle of
view
1
2
Set mode dial to [
3
Use
258
Screen moves from left to right without moving the
camera
]
Set the menu
→
[Motion Picture] → [4K Live Cropping]
to set panning or zooming time and press [MENU/SET]
Settings: [40SEC] / [20SEC] / [OFF]
••The angle of view narrows.
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording pans with little vibration or recording motion pictures with zoom [4K Live Cropping]
4
Set the crop start frame
Operation
Touch operation
Touch
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
5
Start
••When making settings for the first time, a crop start
frame of size 1920×1080 is displayed. (After setting
the crop start frame and end frame, the start frame
and end frame that you set immediately before will be
displayed.)
••The camera will remember the frame position and size
even when the camera is turned off.
[Reset]
[MENU/SET]
[Set]
Description
Enlarges/reduces the frame
(The range of settings allowed is from 1920×1080 to
3840×2160.)
The frame will return to the size of 1920×1080, with the
position of the frame as its centre.
Decides the position and size of the frame
Set the crop end frame
••Do the same as in step 4 to set the end frame position
and size,*1 making it coincide with the movement in
the image you wish to record (see below).
*1Press [DISP.] or touch [Reset] to return to the start frame
position and size.
Movement of the image
on the screen
End
Size
Set
Reset
Frame size
Start frame
Pan (move right and left)
End frame
Same
Zoom in
Large
Small
Zoom out
Small
Large
••The setting of [AF Mode] switches to [ ] (Face/Eye
Detection).*2 If a face is detected in the crop start
frame, a yellow or white AF area frame is displayed.
*2The Eye Detection cannot be used. If no face is recognised,
the camera switches to [
Set
Reset
Moves the frame
Pinch out /
Pinch in
[DISP.]
Size
] (49-area-focusing) (→150).
■■Changing the position and size of a crop frame
Crop start frame
Fn1 Adjust.
Crop end frame
Press [Fn1] button.
259
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording pans with little vibration or recording motion pictures with zoom [4K Live Cropping]
6
Press the motion picture button to start
recording
The display switches to the angle of view set in step 4
and the panning or zoom operation is displayed.
••Immediately release the motion picture button after
pressing it.
••When the set operating time has elapsed, recording
automatically ends.
••Zoom operation is not available.
••If a face is detected in the crop frame during recording,
the AF area frame is displayed, similar to step 5.
Elapsed recording time
Set operating time
■■To end [4K Live Cropping] recording midway
Press the motion picture button again during recording.
■■To cancel [4K Live Cropping] recording
Set [OFF] in step 3.
●●[4K Live Cropping] recording cannot be performed when [High Speed Video] is set.
●●Brightness is measured and focus is done in the crop start frame. During motion picture recording,
they are done in the crop frame.
●●The metering mode will be [Multi Metering].
●●If you assign [4K Live Cropping] in [Fn Button Set] (→70) under the [Custom] menu, you can
display a screen that lets you switch [4K Live Cropping] between [40 sec.], [20 sec.], and [OFF] by
pressing the assigned function button. If you select [40 sec.] or [20 sec.], you can set the crop start
frame by pressing the [Fn1] button.
•• TZ100/TZ101
You can do the same as above if you set [4K Live Cropping] via [CUSTOM] under [Q.MENU] on
the [Custom] menu (→69).
●●Touch AE is not available during recording with [4K Live Cropping].
●●[Touch AF] does not work during Auto Focus (→61).
●●1 Shot AF does not work during Manual Focus (→170).
260
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Taking still pictures while a motion picture is being
recorded
Recording mode:
1
Press the shutter button fully during the
motion picture recording
••Up to 30 pictures can be recorded.
••When you take a still picture, the simultaneous
still/motion picture recording icon is displayed.
••Recording with the Touch Shutter function (→63) is
also available.
●●The aspect ratio of a still picture is fixed to [16:9].
●●Takes a still picture using [Picture Size] [S] (2M). The picture quality may be different to [S] (2M) of
standard pictures.
●●Only pictures in JPEG file format are recorded when [Quality] is set to [
], [
], or [ ].
([Quality] is used with the [ ] setting when [ ] is set.)
●●When the Creative Control Mode is set to [Miniature Effect], a still picture may be taken with a
slight delay from the time you fully press the shutter button.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• TZ100/TZ101
When [Rec Format] is set to [MP4], [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/100M/25p], [4K/100M/24p], or
[VGA/4M/25p]
•• TZ80/TZ81
When [Rec Format] is set to [MP4], [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/100M/25p] or [VGA/4M/25p]
•• When [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]
261
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording Snap Movies
Recording mode:
You can specify the recording time in advance and record motion pictures casually like
you take snapshots. The function also allows you to shift a focus at the start of recording
and add fade in/out effects in advance.
••Motion pictures will be recorded with [FHD/20M/25p] in [MP4].
••Using the smartphone/tablet app “Panasonic Image App”, you can combine motion
pictures recorded with the camera. Music can be added and various editing operations
can be performed when you combine them. In addition, you can send the combined
motion picture to a web service. (→316)
1
2
3
4
5
6
262
Set the menu
→
[Motion Picture] → [Snap Movie]
Use
to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
[Record time]
Sets the recording time of motion pictures.
[8SEC] / [6SEC] / [4SEC] / [2SEC]
[Pull Focus]
Allows dramatic imaging expression by shifting focus gradually at the start
of recording.
[ON] / [OFF]
•• For details (→264).
[Fade]
Adds a fade-in (gradual appearance) effect to an image and audio as
recording starts or adds a fade-out (gradual disappearance) effect to them
as recording ends.
[WHITE-IN] / [WHITE-OUT]:
Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a white screen.
[BLACK-IN] / [BLACK-OUT]:
Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a black screen.
[COLOR-IN] / [COLOR-OUT]:
Adds an effect that fades in from black-and-white to colour or an effect that
fades out from colour to black-and-white. Audio will be recorded normally.
[OFF]
Press [Q.MENU/ ] button
Press [MENU/SET]
Press
to select [ON] and press [MENU/SET]
••If [Pull Focus] is set to [ON], set its focus. (→264)
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording Snap Movies
7
Press the motion picture button to start
recording
Elapsed recording time
••Immediately release the motion picture button after
pressing it.
••You cannot stop motion picture recording in the
middle. The recording will stop automatically when the
set recording time has elapsed.
Set recording time
■■Deactivating Snap Movie
Select [OFF] in step 2.
●●Motion pictures recorded with [WHITE-IN] or [BLACK-IN] are displayed as all-white or all-black
thumbnails in Playback Mode.
●●If you assign [Snap Movie] to [Fn Button Set] (→70), you can display a screen that lets you switch
[Snap Movie] between [ON]/[OFF] by pressing the assigned function button. If you press [DISP.]
button while the screen is displayed, you can change the settings for Snap Movie.
●●[Snap Movie] will be set to [OFF] when you connect to Wi-Fi with [Remote Shooting & View].
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
•• When [4K PHOTO] is set
•• When [4K Live Cropping] is set
•• During [High Speed Video] recording
263
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Recording Snap Movies
Setting up [Pull Focus]
Set the frames that determine a focus start (first) position
and focus end (second) position. The camera then measures
its distance to the subjects and sets focus. When you start
motion picture recording, focus shifts from the first frame to
the second frame.
Touch operation
Touch a subject (first position), drag your finger to the desired location (second position),
and release the finger.
•• Auto Focus will work to set the start and end focus of [Pull Focus]. When the setup has failed, the
frame returns to the first position. Perform the setup again.
•• To cancel the frame settings, touch [ ].
Button operation
Assign [AF Mode] to a function button ([Fn1] - [Fn4]) (→70)
Press the function button that [AF Mode] has assigned to at step
Press
to move the frame, and press [MENU/SET] (First position)
•• If you press [DISP.] button before pressing [MENU/SET], the frame will return to the centre.
Repeat step
(Second position)
•• Auto Focus will work to set the start and end focus of [Pull Focus]. When the setup has failed, the
frame returns to the first position. Perform the setup again.
•• To cancel the frame settings, press [MENU/SET].
●●A greater effect can be achieved by creating a striking contrast of focus between
the start and end positions, for example by shifting focus from the background to
foreground, or vice versa.
●●After setting focus, try to keep the distance between the subject and the camera
constant.
●●When [Pull Focus] is set to [ON]
], a setting specially designed for [Pull Focus].
•• Auto Focus Mode will be switched to [
] will take place at the first frame position.
•• If you take a picture, the Auto Focus operation [
●●To re-adjust the focus while recording a motion picture, press the shutter button halfway after the
[Pull Focus] operation finishes.
●●Even when [Metering Mode] (→183) is set to [ ], the spot metering target does not move with
focus. The target is fixed at the start position (first position) of [Pull Focus].
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• In Manual Focus
•• When using the Digital Zoom
264
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Using the [Motion Picture] menu
For the setting procedures for the [Motion Picture] menu, refer to (→65)
••The [Motion Picture] menu is not displayed in the recording mode in which motion
pictures cannot be recorded.
[4K Live Cropping]
••For details (→258).
[Snap Movie]
••For details (→262).
[Rec Format]
••For details (→255).
[Rec Quality]
••For details (→255).
[Exposure Mode]
••For details (→124).
[High Speed Video]
••For details (→125).
265
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Using the [Motion Picture] menu
For the setting procedures for the [Motion Picture] menu, refer to (→65)
[Continuous AF]
••For details (→257).
[Level Shot]
Recording mode:
Level Shot function automatically detects the camera’s tilt while recording motion pictures,
and horizontally corrects the recording motion picture so it will not be tilted.
Settings: [ON] / [OFF]
●●If you record while walking, or if the camera’s tilt is large, it may not be possible to horizontally
correct the motion pictures.
●●When [Level Shot] is set to [ON]
•• The angle of view becomes slightly narrow when motion picture recording starts.
●●Still pictures taken while recording motion pictures will not be horizontally corrected.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• When recording with [High Speed Video]
•• When [Stabilizer] is set to [OFF]
•• TZ100/TZ101
When [Rec Format] is set to [MP4], and [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/100M/25p], [4K/100M/24p], or
[VGA/4M/25p]
•• TZ80/TZ81
When [Rec Format] is set to [MP4], and [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/100M/25p] or [VGA/4M/25p]
[Flkr Decrease]
Recording mode:
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the motion picture.
Settings: [1/50] / [1/60] / [1/100] / [1/120] / [OFF]
[Silent Operation]
••For details (→126).
266
SQW0550
Recording motion pictures
Using the [Motion Picture] menu
For the setting procedures for the [Motion Picture] menu, refer to (→65)
[Wind Noise Canceller]
Recording mode:
This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining
sound quality.
Settings: [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [OFF]
••[HIGH] effectively reduces the wind noise by minimising the low-pitched sound when a
strong wind is detected.
••[STANDARD] extracts and reduces only the wind noise without deteriorating the sound
quality.
●●You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
[Zoom Mic]
Recording mode:
Coupled to the zoom operation, it will more clearly record far sounds during enlarging
image, and surrounding sounds with wide-angle.
Settings: [ON] / [OFF]
●●When set to [ON] and performing zoom, the operation sound may be recorded enhanced in
accordance with the surrounding sounds. Also, audio recording level will be lower compared to
when [OFF].
●●The stereo effect of the audio is reduced during enlarging image.
267
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Viewing your pictures
1
2
Press the Playback button
TZ100/TZ101
Press
to select a picture to be
displayed
••When you press and hold
, the pictures are
displayed one after another.
•• TZ100/TZ101
Pictures can also be forwarded or rewound by rotating
the rear dial or dragging the screen horizontally (→61).
•• TZ80/TZ81
Pictures can also be forwarded or rewound by rotating
the control dial or dragging the screen horizontally
(→61).
••If you keep your finger touching the left or right edge of
the screen after scrolling the pictures, the pictures will
continue to be scrolled. (The pictures are displayed in
a reduced size.)
••The playback speed of pictures varies depending on
the playback conditions.
TZ80/TZ81
Switching the speed for forwarding or rewinding pictures
continuously
→
[Custom] → [Touch Scroll] → [H] (High speed) / [L] (Low speed)
Sending pictures to the WEB services
If you press while a single picture is being displayed, you can send the picture to the
WEB service quickly. (→330)
268
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Viewing your pictures
■■Ending Playback
Press the Playback button again or press the Motion picture button.
The Playback can also be ended by pressing the shutter button halfway.
●● TZ100/TZ101
The playback screen appears if the camera is turned on while pressing the Playback button.
●●
TZ80/TZ81
By holding down the Playback button while the camera is off, you can turn the camera on in
playback mode.
●●When the camera is switched to the playback screen from the recording screen, the lens barrel is
retracted after approx. 15 seconds.
●●This camera is compliant with the unified DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) standard
formulated by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA),
and with Exif (Exchangeable image file format).
Files that are not DCF-compliant cannot be played back.
●●It may not be possible to properly play back pictures taken using other cameras on this unit or it
may not be possible to use the functions of this unit for those pictures.
269
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Viewing motion pictures
This unit was designed to play motion pictures using the AVCHD and MP4 formats.
••Motion pictures are displayed with the motion picture icon ([ ]).
••4K burst files recorded with the 4K Photo function are displayed with [
].
To select and save a picture from 4K burst files, refer to (→190).
••The [Post Focus] icon ([
]) is shown on images recorded using [Post Focus]. To
save pictures with a selected focus point, refer to (→214).
1
Press
to start playback
••Touching [
] in the middle of the screen allows you
to play back motion pictures.
••Motion pictures recorded with [Snap Movie] are played
back automatically.
••Some information will not be displayed for motion
pictures recorded in [AVCHD].
Motion picture recording time
■■Operations during motion picture playback
Operation
Touch operation
Description
Play/pause
Fast rewind*1
Single-frame rewind*2 (while paused)
Stop
Fast forward*1
Single-frame forward (while paused)
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
/
Volume down / Volume up
*1The fast forward or rewind speed increases if you press
again.
*2Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] are rewound frame by frame approximately every
0.5 seconds.
••Control panel disappears when no operation is performed for some time. Touch the
screen to redisplay the control panel.
••If you press [MENU/SET] during a pause, you can create a picture from a motion picture.
(→271)
270
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Viewing motion pictures
■■Operations during automatic Snap Movie playback
Playback from the beginning
Returning to the previous picture
Scrolling to the next picture
••If you touch the screen, automatic playback will stop.
●●Motion pictures recorded with other devices can be played back on this camera but cannot be
edited with it.
●●Motion pictures recorded with this camera cannot be played back on other devices.
●●Motion pictures can be viewed on your computer using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (→353).
Capturing still pictures from motion pictures
Save a scene from a motion picture as a still picture.
1 Display the picture that you want to capture as a still
picture by pressing to pause a motion picture being
played back on the camera
•• If you press
while paused, you can make finer adjustments
to the positions in a motion picture.
2
Press [MENU/SET]
•• The same operation can be performed by touching [
].
•• The still picture is saved with aspect ratio of [16:9] and [Quality]
of [ ]. The picture size varies depending on the motion picture
being played back.
[Rec Quality]
[Picture Size]
[4K]
[M] (8M)
[FHD], [HD]
[S] (2M)
●●The picture quality becomes slightly lower depending on the [Rec Quality] setting of the original
motion picture.
●●When a still picture captured from a motion picture is played back, [ ] is displayed.
●●If you want to capture a still picture from a motion picture while the camera is connected to a TV
with the HDMI micro cable, set [VIERA Link] of [TV Connection] in the [Setup] menu to [OFF].
●●You cannot capture a still picture from the following motion pictures.
•• Motion pictures recorded in [MP4] using the [VGA/4M/25p] setting
271
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Switching the Playback Method
Zooming in and viewing “Playback Zoom”
1
Move the zoom lever toward T side
•• Each time you move the zoom lever toward the T side, the
magnification increases through four levels: 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, and
16x. (The picture quality displayed becomes successively lower.)
•• To reduce zoom → Move the zoom lever toward W side.
•• You can also enlarge/reduce the image by pinching out/pinching
in (→61) on the part you want to enlarge/reduce.
•• When you change the magnification, the zoom position indication
appears for about 1 second.
of the
•• You can move the enlarged part by pressing
cursor button or dragging the screen. (→61)
•• You can also zoom in by quickly touching the touch screen twice.
(If the display was enlarged, it returns to the same magnification
ratio.)
•• TZ100/TZ101
You can forward or rewind a picture while maintaining the same
zoom magnification and zoom position by rotating the rear dial
during Playback Zoom.
•• TZ80/TZ81
You can forward or rewind a picture while maintaining the same
zoom magnification and zoom position by rotating the control dial
during Playback Zoom.
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
Current zoom position
272
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Switching the Playback Method
Viewing a list of pictures “Multi Playback”
1
Move the zoom lever toward W side
•• Move the zoom lever toward the W side and you can switch the
display methods in the following order: 1-picture screen (fullscreen) → 12-picture screen → 30-picture screen → Calendar
screen. (Move the lever to the T side to return.)
•• It is possible to switch the playback screen by touching the
following icons.
]: 1-picture screen
–– [
]: 12-picture screen
–– [
]: Calendar screen
–– [
]: 30-picture screen
–– [
•• The screen can be switched gradually by dragging the screen up
or down.
•• When you select a picture using the cursor button and press
[MENU/SET] on the 12-picture or 30-picture screen, the selected
picture is displayed on the 1-picture screen (full-screen).
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
●●Pictures displayed with [!] cannot be played back.
273
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Switching the Playback Method
Viewing pictures by their recording date “Calendar Playback”
1
Move the zoom lever toward the W side to display the
calendar screen
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
2
Use
to select recording date and press
[MENU/SET]
•• Pictures are displayed in a 12-picture screen.
•• Turn the zoom lever toward the W side to return to the Calendar
screen display.
Selected date
SUN MON TUEWEDTHU FRI SAT
●●The recording date of the picture selected in the playback screen becomes the date selected
when the Calendar screen is first displayed.
●●You can display the calendar between January 2000 to December 2099.
●●Pictures taken without clock settings are displayed with the date 1st January, 2016.
●●Pictures taken with destination settings made in [World Time] are displayed in the calendar screen
using the appropriate date for the destination’s time zone.
274
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Switching the Playback Method
Viewing group pictures
You can consecutively play back multiple pictures in a group or play back group pictures
one by one.
[
]:Group pictures recorded consecutively by setting the
burst speed to [SH] (→202)
]:Group pictures recorded using [Time Lapse Shot]
(→216)
]:Group pictures recorded using [Stop Motion
Animation] (→219)
[
[
15 pic.
••You can delete or edit pictures in group units. (For example,
if you delete one of pictures in a group, all pictures in that
group will be deleted.)
●●Pictures will not be grouped if they are recorded without setting [Clock Set].
Playing back group pictures consecutively
1
Press
•• The same operation can be performed by touching the group picture icon ([
], [
],
]).
[
•• When you play back group pictures one by one, the option settings are displayed.
[From the first picture]:Play back the group pictures consecutively from the first picture in a
group.
[From the current picture]: P
lay back the group pictures consecutively from the picture currently
played back.
■■Operations during continuous playback
275
Continuous playback / Pause
Stop
Fast rewind playback
Fast forward playback
Returning to the previous picture
(while paused)
Scrolling to the next picture
(while paused)
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Switching the Playback Method
Playing back group pictures one by one
1
Press
2
Use
to select [Display In Group] and press
[MENU/SET]
Use
to scroll through the pictures
3
276
•• The same operation can be performed by touching [
].
•• Pressing again or touching [
] and selecting [Exit Display In
Group] will return you to the normal playback screen.
•• You can use the same operations for pictures stored in a group
as in normal still picture playback. (Multi Playback, Playback
Zoom, deletion of pictures, etc.)
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Deleting pictures
Deleted pictures cannot be recovered.
Pictures will not be deleted in the following cases:
••Protected pictures.
••Card switch is in “LOCK” position.
••Pictures that are not based on the DCF standard. (→269)
●●Do not turn off the camera while deleting.
●●Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).
[Delete Single]
1
Press [
] button to delete displayed picture
•• The same operation can be performed by touching [
TZ100/TZ101
].
TZ80/TZ81
2
277
Use
to select [Delete Single] and press [MENU/SET]
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Deleting pictures
To delete multiple (up to 100)/To delete all pictures
A picture group (→275) is handled as 1 picture. (All the pictures in the selected picture
group are deleted.)
1
Press [
] button while viewing a picture
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
2
Use
3
(When [Delete Multi] is selected)
Use
to select picture and press [MENU/SET]
(repeat)
to select [Delete Multi]/[Delete All] and press [MENU/SET]
•• You can select [All Delete Except Favorite] in [Delete All] if there are pictures that have been set
as [Favorite] (→297).
Picture selected
•• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.
OK
4
278
(When [Delete Multi] is selected) Use
to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]
•• May take time depending on number of pictures deleted.
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
You can specify picture protection, resizing, print settings, and other settings for pictures
you have taken.
••For the setting procedures of the menu. (→65)
●●In the following cases, new pictures are created after they have been edited. Before starting to
edit, make sure that there is enough free space in the memory card.
•• TZ100/TZ101 [RAW Processing]
•• [Light Composition]
•• [Clear Retouch]
•• [Text Stamp]
•• [Time Lapse Video]
•• [Stop Motion Video]
•• [Resize]
•• [Cropping]
●●It may not be possible to set or edit pictures taken with other cameras.
■■How to select an image(s) after selecting [Single] or [Multi]
Some menu items allow you to specify how to select an image(s).
[Single]
Use
to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]
•• If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right bottom of the screen, the
setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed again.
Set
[Multi]
When a screen similar to the one on the right is
displayed:
Use
to select a still picture and press
[MENU/SET] (repeat)
OK
•• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.
Use
to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]
When a screen similar to the one on the right is
displayed:
Use
to select a still picture and press
[MENU/SET] (repeat)
•• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Set/Cancel
279
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Slide Show]
Automatically play pictures in order. You can also put together a slide show composed
of only still pictures, only motion pictures, or only 4K Photos, etc. Recommended when
viewing on TV screen.
1 Set the menu
→
2
Use
3
Use
[Playback] → [Slide Show]
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
•• If you select [Video Only], 4K burst files recorded with the 4K
Photo function and pictures recorded using [Post Focus] will also
be played back.
•• Only an in-focus representative image will be played back from
pictures recorded using [Post Focus].
to select
•• When you select [Category Selection], use
category and press [MENU/SET]. For details about category,
refer to (→282).
to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]
■■Operations during Slide Show
Operation
Touch operation
Description
Play/Pause
Previous
Stop
Next
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
280
/
Volume down / Volume up
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
■■To change settings such as music or display time
Select [Effect] or [Setup] and press [MENU/SET].
[Effect]
[AUTO] / [NATURAL] / [SLOW] / [SWING] / [URBAN] / [OFF]
[Setup]
[Duration]
[5SEC] / [3SEC] / [2SEC] / [1SEC]
[Repeat]
[ON] / [OFF]
[Sound]
[AUTO]: W
ith still pictures, music will play back, and with motion
pictures, audio will play back.
[Music]: Music effect will play back.
[Audio]: Audio is played back from motion pictures.
[OFF]: Music and audio will not play back.
●●When [URBAN] has been selected, the picture may appear in black and white as a screen effect.
●●[AUTO] can be used only when [Category Selection] is selected. The pictures are played back with
the recommended effects for each category.
●●[Effect] is fixed to [OFF] when in [Video Only], or during the slide show for [
], [
], or [
] in
[Category Selection].
●●During slide shows of 4K photo burst files, pictures recorded in [Post Focus], or group pictures,
effects will stay turned off even if [Effect] is set.
●●When you play back the following pictures in a slide show, the [Duration] setting is disabled.
•• Motion pictures
•• 4K burst files
•• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]
•• Panorama pictures
•• Group pictures
●●[Duration] can be set only when [Effect] is set to [OFF].
●●Part of [Effect] cannot be used when displaying pictures on television using an HDMI micro cable
or when displaying pictures recorded in portrait position.
[Playback Mode]
Recorded pictures can be played back in a variety of ways.
1 Set the menu
→
2
281
Use
[Playback] → [Playback Mode]
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
•• If you select [Video Only], 4K burst files recorded with the 4K
Photo function and pictures recorded using [Post Focus] will also
be played back.
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
When selecting [Category Play] in step 2 (→281)
3
Use
to select the category and press [MENU/SET]
•• The available categories are as follows.
[Face Recog.]*
[i-Portrait], [i-Night Portrait], [i-Baby] in Automatic Scene Detection
[Clear Portrait], [Silky Skin], [Backlit Softness], [Clear in Backlight], [Relaxing Tone],
[Sweet Child’s Face], [Clear Night Portrait] (Scene Guide Mode)
[i-Scenery], [i-Sunset] in Automatic Scene Detection
[Distinct Scenery], [Bright Blue Sky], [Romantic Sunset Glow], [Vivid Sunset Glow],
[Glistening Water] (Scene Guide Mode)
[i-Night Portrait], [i-Night Scenery], [i-Handheld Night Shot] in Automatic Scene
Detection
[Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape],
[Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait] (Scene Guide
Mode)
[Clear Sports Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
[i-Food] in Automatic Scene Detection
[Appetizing Food], [Cute Dessert] (Scene Guide Mode)
[Travel Date]
A burst of pictures recorded by setting the burst speed to [SH]
[Time Lapse Shot], [Time Lapse Video]
[Stop Motion Animation], [Stop Motion Video]
*Use
to select a person to be played back and press [MENU/SET]. Face Recognition is
applied for all the pictures in the group.
●●The category for recording motion pictures is different from the category of still pictures used in
some Recording modes. For that reason, the pictures may not be played back.
282
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Location Logging]
After you send location information (latitude and longitude) obtained by your smartphone/
tablet to this unit, you can write this information on pictures using the unit.
Preparation
Send location information to this unit from your smartphone/tablet. (→314)
•• You must install “Panasonic Image App” on your smartphone/tablet. (→305)
1
Set the menu
2
Use
to select a period for writing location information, and press
[MENU/SET]
→
•• [
[Playback] → [Location Logging] → [Add Location Data]
] is displayed for pictures that have location information written to it.
■■Abort writing location information
Press [MENU/SET] while location information is being written
•• [ ] is displayed for the period of the abort operation.
If selected again while [ ] is displayed, writing location information will resume where it left off.
■■Delete received location information
Use
Use
to select [Delete Location Data] and press [MENU/SET]
to select a period for deleting location information, and press [MENU/SET]
●●The location information cannot be written in the following cases:
•• Pictures that were recorded after you sent the location information (→314)
•• Pictures that already have location information
•• Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] format
•• Protected pictures
•• If there is not enough free space on your card
•• Card switch is in “LOCK” position.
•• Pictures recorded using cameras other than this unit
Writing the location information using a smartphone/tablet
When you use your smartphone/tablet as a remote controller for this unit, you can write
the location information on pictures using the smartphone/tablet. (→315)
283
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
TZ100/TZ101
[RAW Processing]
You can use the camera to develop still pictures that were recorded in RAW format. The
created still pictures are saved in JPEG format.
1 Set the menu
→
2
3
[Playback] → [RAW Processing]
Press
to select RAW file and press [MENU/SET]
Press
to select the item
•• The following items can be set. The settings used during recording are applied at the time of
setting.
4
284
[White Balance]
You can select White Balance to make adjustments. When you select an
item with [
], you can develop the pictures using the same settings that
were applied for recording.
[Exposure Comp.]
You can perform Exposure Compensation in the range from –1 EV to
+1 EV.
[Photo Style]
You can select the [Photo Style] effects ([Standard], [Vivid], [Natural],
[Monochrome], [Scenery], or [Portrait]).
[i.Dynamic]
You can select the [i.Dynamic] settings ([HIGH], [STANDARD], [LOW], or
[OFF]).
[Contrast]
You can adjust the contrast.
[Highlight]
You can adjust the brightness of a highlighted area.
[Shadow]
You can adjust the brightness of a shadowed area.
[Saturation] /
[Color Tone]
You can adjust the saturation. (You can adjust the colouring when
[Monochrome] is selected for [Photo Style].)
[Filter Effect]
You can select a Filter effect. (Only when [Monochrome] is selected for
[Photo Style].)
[Noise Reduction]
You can set noise reduction.
[i.Resolution]
You can select the [i.Resolution] settings ([HIGH], [STANDARD], [LOW],
[EXTENDED], or [OFF]).
[Sharpness]
You can adjust the impression of resolution.
[Setup]
You can perform the following settings.
[Reinstate Adjustments]:You can restore the settings to the ones used
during recording.
[Color Space]:You can select [Color Space] from either [sRGB] or
[AdobeRGB].
[Picture Size]:You can select the picture size ([L], [M], or [S]) of a JPEG
file when saving pictures.
Press [MENU/SET] to set
•• The setting methods vary depending on the item. For details, refer to “Setting each item”
(→285).
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
5
Press [MENU/SET]
6
Press
•• The screen in step 3 reappears. To set another item, repeat steps 3 to 5.
to select [Begin Processing] and press [MENU/SET]
■■Setting each item
When you select an item, the setting screen appears.
Operation
Touch
operation
Drag
Description
Used to make adjustments
Set
[WB K Set]
Used to display the colour
temperature setting screen (→136)
(Only when [White Balance] is set
])
to [
[Adjust.]
Used to display the White Balance
fine adjustment screen (→137)
(Only when [White Balance] is set)
[DISP.]
[DISP.]
[MENU/SET]
[Set]
Set
Used to display the comparison
screen
Used to finalise an adjustment you
just made and to return to the item
selection screen
••If you have selected [Noise Reduction], [i.Resolution], or [Sharpness], the
comparison screen is not displayed.
••Pictures can be enlarged by operating the zoom lever.
••You can also zoom in by quickly touching the touch screen twice. (If the display was
enlarged, it returns to the same magnification ratio.)
The following operating methods are available to make adjustments on the comparison
screen.
Operation
Touch
operation
Drag
[DISP.]
[MENU/SET]
Description
Used to make adjustments
[DISP.]
Used to return to the setting screen
[Set]
Used to finalise an adjustment you
just made and to return to the item
selection screen
Set
Current setting
••If you touch the picture at the centre, it will be enlarged. If you touch [
will be reduced to the original size.
285
], the picture
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
When [Setup] is selected
When you select an item, the screen for selecting [Reinstate Adjustments], [Color
Space], or [Picture Size] is displayed.
Use
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
•• When [Reinstate Adjustments] is selected, confirmation screen is displayed. When you select
[Yes], the item selection screen reappears.
Use
to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]
●●The result of a RAW file developed by this camera and a RAW file developed by the software
“SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE” (→354) will not be exactly the same.
●●Regardless of the aspect ratio of the picture during recording, a RAW image recorded on this
camera is always recorded with the aspect ratio set to [3:2] (5472×3648), but if you perform [RAW
Processing] from the [Playback] menu, the picture will be processed with the aspect ratio fixed as
that at the time of recording.
●●The range that can be set using Exposure Compensation varies from the range used during
recording.
●●The [White Balance] setting of still pictures recorded using [Multi Exp.] is fixed to the setting used
during recording.
●●When an HDMI micro cable is connected, [RAW Processing] is disabled.
●●You can perform RAW processing on pictures recorded using this unit only. [RAW Processing]
cannot be used for pictures recorded on other devices or for pictures recorded in formats other
than the RAW format.
286
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Light Composition]
Select multiple frames from 4K burst files recorded in 4K Photo mode (→184) that you
wish to combine. Parts of the image that are brighter than the preceding frame will be
superimposed on the preceding frame to combine the frames into one picture.
1
Set the menu
2
3
Using
→
[Playback] → [Light Composition]
, select the 4K photo burst files and press [MENU/SET]
Choose the combining method and press [MENU/SET]
■■When [Composite Merging] is selected
Select the frames you wish to combine, and then camera superimposes brighter parts of the
image.
Select the frames
For button and touch operation, refer to (→193).
•• Images displayed cannot be enlarged or shrunk or shown
as in slide view
] in touch operation becomes [
].
•• [
Press [MENU/SET]
The selected frames are remembered, and the display goes
to the preview screen.
to select items and press [MENU/SET] to perform
Use
the following operations.
–– [Next]:Lets you select more frames for combining. Goes
back to step .
–– [Reselect]:Discards the frame selected immediately before
and lets you select a different image.
–– [Save]: Ends frame selection.
Repeat steps
-
Preview
Next
Reselect
Save
to select more frames to combine
•• You can select up to 40 frames.
Press
287
to select [Save], and then press [MENU/SET]
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
■■When [Range Merging] is selected
Select the first and last frames, and the brighter parts of frames within that range will be
superimposed.
Select the frame of the first picture
The selection method is the same as in step
Press [MENU/SET]
when selecting [Composite Merging].
The position of the first picture will be remembered.
Select the frame of the last picture
Press [MENU/SET]
The position of the last picture will be remembered.
4
288
Select [Yes] at the confirmation screen and press [MENU/SET]
The combined picture is displayed.
•• Pictures are saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information) such as shutter
speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity are also registered.
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Clear Retouch]
You can erase unnecessary parts recorded
on the pictures taken.
••The erasure operation can only be
performed by touching. [Clear Retouch]
automatically enables the touch
operation.
1 Set the menu
→
2
3
Use
[Playback] → [Clear Retouch]
to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]
Drag your finger over the part you want to erase
•• The parts to be erased are coloured.
•• Touching [Undo] will return the coloured part back to its previous
state.
REMOVE
SCALING
Undo
Set
Erasing details (enlarging the display)
Touch [SCALING]
•• On the touch screen, pinch out your two fingers to zoom in,
and pinch in your two fingers to zoom out (→61).
•• You can also zoom in/out with the zoom lever.
•• Dragging the screen allows you to move the enlarged part.
Touch [REMOVE]
REMOVE
SCALING
Undo
Set
•• This will bring you back to the operation of dragging your
finger over the part you want to erase. The part you want to
erase can be dragged even while the picture is enlarged.
4
5
Touch [Set]
Touch [Save] or press [MENU/SET]
●●Pictures may appear unnatural because the background of deleted parts is artificially created.
●●For group pictures, perform [Clear Retouch] on each picture. (They cannot be edited at once.)
●●When [Clear Retouch] is performed on group pictures, they are saved as new pictures separate
from the original ones.
●●Not available when the viewfinder is in use.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• Panorama pictures
•• Motion pictures
•• 4K burst files
•• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]
•• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [
289
]
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Title Edit]
You can enter characters (titles etc.) on a recorded picture. After text has been registered,
it can be stamped in prints using [Text Stamp] (→291).
1 Set the menu
→
[Playback] → [Title Edit] → [Single] or [Multi]
2
Select a still picture (→279)
3
Enter characters (Entering text (→87))
•• [
] is displayed for pictures with texts already stamped.
•• To delete texts, delete all the characters in the character input screen.
●●You can print out texts using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software (→353).
●●You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• Motion pictures
•• 4K burst files
•• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]
•• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [
290
], [
] or [
]
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Text Stamp]
You can stamp the recording date and time, names, travel destination, travel dates, etc. on
the recorded still pictures.
1 Set the menu
→
[Playback] → [Text Stamp] → [Single] or [Multi]
2
Select a still picture (→279)
3
4
5
•• [
] appears on screen if the picture is stamped with text.
Use
to select [Set] and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]
[Shooting Date]
[Name]
6
7
[W/O TIME]: Stamp recording date
[WITH TIME]: Stamp recording date and time
: Stamp name registered in Face Recognition
: Stamp name registered in [Profile Setup]
[Location]
Stamp location registered in [Setup] menu’s [Travel Date]
[Travel Date]
Stamp number of days that have elapsed since the travel date set in [Setup]
menu’s [Travel Date]
[Title]
Stamp text registered in [Title Edit]
Press [Q.MENU/ ] button
Use
to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]
●●Do not request date printing in store or make date printing on printer for still pictures with
date stamps. (Date printing may be overlapped.)
●●You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].
●●The picture quality may be coarser.
●●If you stamp text on the pictures in a group, those pictures are saved as new pictures.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• Motion pictures
•• 4K burst files
•• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]
•• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]
•• Panorama pictures
•• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped
•• Still pictures taken without setting clock
291
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Video Divide]
A single motion picture can be split into 2 parts. This is convenient when you want to keep
just the necessary scenes, or if you wish to delete unnecessary scenes to increase free
space on your card, such as when travelling.
1 Set the menu
→
[Playback] → [Video Divide]
2
3
Use
to select a motion picture to split and press [MENU/SET]
Press
at where you want to split a motion picture to pause it
4
Press
•• If you press
motion picture.
while paused, you can make finer adjustments to the splitting positions in a
•• The original motion picture that was split does not remain.
(There will only be the 2 motion pictures that were created after
the split.)
●●During dividing, do not turn off the camera or remove the card or battery. If you do so, the motion
picture may be deleted.
●●Motion pictures cannot be divided at a location close to the start or end of the motion picture.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]
•• Motion pictures with a short recording time
292
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Time Lapse Video]
You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that was recorded using
[Time Lapse Shot]. The motion picture you created is saved in the MP4 recording format.
1 Set the menu
→
2
3
[Playback] → [Time Lapse Video]
Use
to select the [Time Lapse Shot] picture group and press
[MENU/SET]
Create a motion picture after selecting a production method
•• For details, refer to step 5 and the subsequent steps (→217).
For details on the motion picture you created, refer to (→218).
[Stop Motion Video]
You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that was recorded using
[Stop Motion Animation]. The motion picture you created is saved in the MP4 recording
format.
1 Set the menu
→
2
3
293
Use
[Playback] → [Stop Motion Video]
to select a stop motion animation group and press [MENU/SET]
Create a motion picture after selecting a production method
•• For details, refer to step 8 and the subsequent steps (→221).
For details on the motion picture you created, refer to (→222).
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Resize]
Picture size can be reduced to facilitate e-mail attachment and use in web pages, etc.
1 Set the menu
→
2
[Playback] → [Resize] → [Single] or [Multi]
Select a still picture and size
[Single]
Use
Use
to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]
to select size and press [MENU/SET]
Set
[Multi] (up to 100 pictures)
Use
to select size and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]
(repeat)
•• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.
Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]
OK
●●Picture quality is reduced after resizing.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• Motion pictures
•• 4K burst files
•• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]
•• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]
•• Panorama pictures
•• Group pictures
•• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped
294
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Cropping]
Enlarge your still pictures and crop unwanted areas.
1 Set the menu
→
2
3
Use
[Playback] → [Cropping]
to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]
Select area to crop and press [MENU/SET]
•• You can also touch [
]/[
] to enlarge/reduce.
•• You can also move by dragging on the screen.
TZ100/TZ101
Enlarge
Change
position
TZ80/TZ81
Enlarge
Change
position
●●Perform cropping for each picture in the group. (You cannot edit pictures in group units.)
●●If you crop a picture in the group, it is saved as a new picture.
●●Original Face Recognition information will not be copied when still pictures are cropped.
●●Picture quality is reduced after cropping.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• Motion pictures
•• 4K burst files
•• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]
•• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]
•• Panorama pictures
•• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped
295
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Rotate] / [Rotate Disp.]
You can automatically display a still picture recorded in portrait orientation by taking the
picture with the camera held vertically, or manually rotate the picture in 90-degree units.
[Rotate]
Rotating a picture manually
••You cannot select [Rotate] when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [OFF].
1 Set the menu
→
[Playback] → [Rotate]
2
Use
3
Use
to select the rotation direction and press
[MENU/SET]
to select picture and press [MENU/SET]
•• You cannot rotate group pictures.
[
[
]: Rotate a picture 90 degrees clockwise.
]: Rotate a picture 90 degrees counterclockwise.
[Rotate Disp.]
1
Rotating a picture automatically to display
Set the menu
→
[Playback] → [Rotate Disp.] → [ON]
●●When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless the
OS or software is compatible with Exif. Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows recording
information, etc. to be added. It was established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information
Technology Industries Association)”.
●●A picture may not be automatically rotated to display it with portrait orientation on the Multi
Playback screen, which is displayed for settings such as [Delete Multi].
296
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Favorite]
By labelling your favourite pictures with a star [ ], you can play back your favourite
pictures only, or you can delete all pictures except your favourites.
1 Set the menu
→
2
[Playback] → [Favorite] → [Single] or [Multi]
Select picture (→279)
■■To clear all
In step 1, select [Favorite] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET]
●●Up to 999 pictures can be set.
●●When you set [Favorite] for a picture in a group, the number of pictures set is displayed with the
[Favorite] icon of the first picture.
●●Only when [Playback Mode] is set to [Normal Play], you can select [Cancel].
●●This function is not available in the following case:
•• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [
297
]
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Print Set]
Picture/picture no./date printing settings can be made for when printing with DPOF
print-compatible shops or printers. (Contact the local photo printing store or read
operating instructions of the printer to check if DPOF is supported.)
1 Set the menu
→
2
3
[Playback] → [Print Set] → [Single] or [Multi]
Select a still picture (→279)
Use
to set number of still pictures and press [MENU/SET] (up to 999
pictures)
(Repeat steps 2 and 3 when using [Multi])
•• Date print setting/release → Press .
■■To clear all
In step 1, select [Print Set] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET]
●●When you have performed [Print Set] for pictures in a group, the setting for how many prints to
make applies to all pictures in the group, and the number of prints set and total number of prints
are shown on the print settings icon of the first picture. If the total number of pictures is 1,000 or
higher, [999+] is displayed.
●●Date print setting cannot be made for pictures with a [Text Stamp] applied.
●●Depending on the type of printer, the printer settings may take priority over camera settings.
●●Some DPOF information (print settings) set by other equipment cannot be used. In such cases,
delete all of the DPOF information and then set it again with this camera.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• Motion pictures
•• 4K burst files
•• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]
•• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]
•• Cannot be set for files that are not compliant with the DCF standard
298
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Protect]
Set protection to disable picture deletion. Prevents deletion of important pictures.
1 Set the menu
→
2
[Playback] → [Protect] → [Single] or [Multi]
Select picture (→279)
■■To clear all
In step 1, select [Protect] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET]
When you set the write-protect switch on the card to the “LOCK” position, the
picture is not erased.
●●The picture is erased when formatting, even if it is protected.
●●May not be effective when using other devices.
●●When you set [Protect] for a picture in a group, the number of pictures set is displayed with the
[Protect] icon of the first picture.
[Face Rec Edit]
Edit or delete the recognition information for pictures with incorrect information.
1 Set the menu
→
[Playback] → [Face Rec Edit] → [REPLACE] or [DELETE]
2
3
Use
to select picture and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select a person and press [MENU/SET]
4
5
Use
•• If [DELETE], go to step 5.
Use
to select the person to replace for another and press [MENU/SET]
to select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]
●●When Face Recognition information is deleted, it cannot be restored.
●●Pictures for which all Face Recognition information has been deleted are not categorised in Face
Recognition during [Category Play] or [Category Selection].
●●Edit the Face Recognition information in group units for a picture group. (You cannot edit the
information for each picture in a group.)
●●You can edit only the first picture in a group.
299
SQW0550
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using the [Playback] menu
[Picture Sort]
You can set the display sequence used for playing back pictures on this unit.
1 Set the menu
→
2
Use
[Playback] → [Picture Sort]
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
[FILE NAME]
[DATE/TIME]
Displays pictures in the folder name or file name sequence. This display
format allows you to find the storage location of a picture on a card more
easily.
Displays pictures according to the date and time that the pictures were
taken in chronological order. When the pictures are taken using several
cameras and stored on the same card, this display format allows you to
find a specific picture more easily.
●●Pictures may not be displayed according to the [DATE/TIME] sequence immediately after a card
is inserted into this unit. In that case, wait a while, and the pictures will be displayed in the [DATE/
TIME] sequence.
300
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
What you can do with the Wi-Fi® function
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone/tablet
(→305)
Taking pictures via a smartphone (remote recording)
Playing back pictures in the camera on a smartphone
Saving pictures in the camera to a smartphone
Sending pictures in the camera to social networking services
Writing the location information on pictures in the camera
Combining motion pictures recorded with Snap Movie according to your
preference on a smartphone
Connect easily
You can easily set up a direct connection to your smartphone without entering a
password.
Displaying still pictures on a TV (→318)
Wireless printing (→323)
Sending pictures to AV device (→324)
Still pictures and motion pictures can be sent to AV device in the home (home AV
device).
Sending pictures to a PC (→325)
Using WEB services (→327)
Through “LUMIX CLUB”, you can send still pictures and motion pictures to social
networking services, etc. You can receive still pictures and motion pictures on a PC or a
smartphone/tablet using the Cloud Sync. Service.
••Hereafter, this manual uses the term “smartphone” for both smartphones and tablets
unless it is necessary to distinguish between them.
301
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Function
■■Before Use
••Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→42)
••To use the Wi-Fi function on this unit, a wireless access point or a destination device
equipped with the wireless LAN function is required.
■■Lighting of the Wi-Fi connection lamp when the Wi-Fi function is in use
Lit: When the Wi-Fi function is ON or connected
by Wi-Fi
Blinking: When sending picture data
TZ100/TZ101
TZ80/TZ81
■■About the [Wi-Fi] button
In this Operating Instructions, a function button to which [Wi-Fi] is assigned is referred
to as the [Wi-Fi] button. (At the time of purchase, [Wi-Fi] is assigned to [Fn5] button.)
••For details on the function button, refer to (→70).
To start up the Wi-Fi function:
Touch [ ]
Touch [
302
]
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Function
••Before a Wi-Fi connection is established, press the [Wi-Fi] button to perform the
following operations:
–– The information (SSID) required for directly connecting
your smartphone to this unit is displayed.
–– You can select the following items by pressing [DISP.]
button.
[New Connection]
[Select a destination from History] (→342)
[Select a destination from Favorite] (→342)
SSID
••You can also display the same menu by selecting
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi]
→ [Wi-Fi Function].
••This manual provides information on the process when [New Connection] is
selected.
••Pressing the [Wi-Fi] button during a Wi-Fi connection enables the following operation.
[Terminate the Connection]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
[Change the Destination]*
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to
select a different Wi-Fi connection.
[Change Settings for Sending
Images]*2
For details (→321).
[Register the Current Destination to
Favorite]*1
Registering the current connection destination or the
connection method, you can easily connect with the
same connection method next time.
[Network Address]
For details (→345).
1
*1This item will not be displayed if you press
to send pictures to WEB services while the
pictures are displayed (→330).
*2This item will not be displayed if the destination for [Remote Shooting & View], [Playback on
TV] or [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is set to [Printer].
303
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Function
■■Describing method
When “[Select a destination from History]”, etc. is
described in a step, perform any of the following operations.
With cursor button operations
Use cursor button to select [Select a destination from
History] and press [MENU/SET].
With touch screen operations
Touch [Select a destination from History].
●●Do not remove the memory card or battery or move to an area without any reception while
sending images.
●●The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.
●●Use a IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g or IEEE802.11n compatible device when using a wireless
access point.
●●We recommend that you use a fully charged battery when you send pictures.
●●When sending images on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be incurred
depending on the details of your contract.
●●Pictures may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions. If the connection is
terminated while sending pictures, pictures with missing sections may be sent.
●●The monitor display may become distorted for an instant while connected to the service, however
this will not affect the image being sent.
304
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a
smartphone
You can remotely operate the camera using a smartphone.
The “Panasonic Image App” (hereafter “Image App”) must be installed on your
smartphone.
Installing the smartphone/tablet app “Panasonic Image App”
For Android™ apps
Supported OS
Installation
procedure
Android 4.0 or later
Connect your Android device to a
network
Select “Google PlayTM Store”
Enter “Panasonic Image App” or
“LUMIX” to search for the app
Select “Panasonic Image App” and
install it
•• The icon will be added to
the menu.
For iOS apps
iOS 7.0 or later
Connect the iOS device to the
network
Select “App StoreSM”
Enter “Panasonic Image App” or
“LUMIX” to search for the app
Select “Panasonic Image App” and
install it
•• The icon will be added to
the menu.
••Use the latest version.
••Supported OS versions as of January 2016. Supported OS versions may be changed
without prior notice.
••The service may not be able to be used properly depending on the type of smartphone
being used.
For the latest information on the “Image App”, refer to the support site below.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/ (This site is available in English only.)
••When downloading the app on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may
be incurred depending on the details of your contract.
••For details about the operating procedure, etc., refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu.
••If you connect the camera and smartphone over a Wi-Fi connection and run “Image
App”, [Help] may not be displayed in the “Image App” menu for some smartphones. In
such a case, disconnect the Wi-Fi connection with the camera, connect the camera to
a cellular data line such as 3G and LTE, or the Internet to display [Help] in the “Image
App” menu.
••Some of the screens and information provided in this document may be different
depending on the supported operating system and “Image App” version.
305
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone
Connecting to a smartphone
You can easily establish a Wi-Fi connection on this unit without entering a password on
your smartphone.
Preparation
(On the camera) Set [Wi-Fi Password] to [OFF]. (→344)
(On your smartphone) Install “Image App” in advance. (→305)
[Wi-Fi Password] is set to [OFF] at the time of purchase. In [OFF] state, a third
party can tap into the Wi-Fi transmission and steal transmitted data.
To set [Wi-Fi Password] to [ON], refer to (→308).
••It may take some time for the operation to end after operating a smartphone.
1
Select the menu on the camera
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]
→ [Remote Shooting & View]
•• The information required for directly connecting your smartphone
to this unit (SSID) is displayed.
•• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] button
on the camera.
•• To change the connection method, refer to (→310).
SSID
2
306
Operate the smartphone
•• The connection method differs depending on the smartphone used.
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone
■■Using an iOS device
Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setting
menu of the smartphone
Select the SSID displayed on the screen of this unit
Return to the home screen and start “Image App” (→305)
•• When the connection confirmation screen appears on this unit, select [Yes] and press
[MENU/SET]. (Only when making a connection for the first time.)
■■Using an Android device
Start “Image App” (→305)
•• If a message appears stating that a camera search is in progress, close the message.
Select [ ]
Select the SSID displayed on this unit
•• When the connection confirmation screen appears on this unit, select [Yes] and press
[MENU/SET]. (Only when making a connection for the first time.)
307
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone
Using a password to set up a connection
When [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [ON], you can strengthen security by using manual input
or a QR code for password authentication.
Preparation
(On the camera) Set [Wi-Fi Password] to [ON]. (→344)
(On your smartphone) Install “Image App” in advance. (→305)
1
Select the menu on the camera
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]
→ [Remote Shooting & View]
•• The information (QR Code, SSID and Password) required for
directly connecting your smartphone to this unit is displayed.
•• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] button
on the camera.
•• Switching the connection method (→310)
SSID and Password
QR Code
2
308
Operate the smartphone
•• The connection method differs depending on the smartphone used.
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone
■■Using an iOS device
••When reading a QR Code to connect
(Steps to are not necessary when reconnecting.)
Start “Image App” (→305)
Select [ ] → [OK]
Read the QR Code displayed on this unit with “Image App”
(When you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR code is displayed in an
enlarged size.)
•• When the smartphone is connected to a wireless access point, it may take time to display QR
code.
Install the profile
•• The message is displayed in the Web browser.
•• If a passcode is required to unlock the smartphone, you will have to input the passcode.
Press the home button to close the Web browser
Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setting
menu of the smartphone
Select the SSID displayed on the screen of this unit
Return to the home screen and start “Image App” (→305)
••When connecting with SSID and password
Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setting menu of the smartphone
Select the SSID displayed on the screen of this unit
Enter the password displayed on this unit (First time connecting only)
Return to the home screen and start “Image App” (→305)
309
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone
■■Using an Android device
••When reading a QR Code to connect
Start “Image App” (→305)
Select [ ]
Read the QR Code displayed on this unit with “Image App”
(When you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR code is displayed in an
enlarged size.)
•• When the smartphone is connected to a wireless access point, it may take time to display QR
code.
••When connecting with SSID and password
Start “Image App” (→305)
•• If a message appears stating that a camera search is in progress, close the message.
Select [ ]
Select the SSID displayed on this unit
Enter the password displayed on this unit (First time connecting only)
•• If you check the item to display the password, you can confirm the password as you enter it.
Changing the connection method
To change the connection method, follow the steps below:
(When the connection is made using [Wi-Fi] in the [Setup] menu)
Press [DISP.] button
(When the connection is made by pressing [Wi-Fi] button)
→ [DISP.] button → [New Connection] → [Remote Shooting & View] →
[DISP.] button
■■When connecting with [Via Network]
(On the camera)
Select [Via Network] and press [MENU/SET]
•• Connect the camera to a wireless access point by following the
connection method (→338).
(On your smartphone)
Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”
Select the wireless access point you connected to the
camera, and set
Start “Image App” (→305)
310
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone
■■When connecting with [Direct]
(On the camera)
Select [Direct] and press [MENU/SET]
•• Select [Wi-Fi Direct] or [WPS Connection]*, and connect the camera to the smartphone by
following the connection method (→341).
*WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure the settings related to the
connection and security of wireless LAN devices. To check if the smartphone you are using is
compatible with WPS, refer to the instruction manual of the smartphone.
(On your smartphone)
Start “Image App” (→305)
Closing the connection
(On the camera)
1 On the recording standby screen, terminate the connection from the menu of
the camera
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes]
•• You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi] button on the camera (→303).
(On your smartphone)
2 Close “Image App”
<Using an iOS device>
From the “Image App” screen, press the home button on the smartphone to close the app
<Using an Android device>
From the “Image App” screen, press the back button on the smartphone twice to close the app
••When recording with [4K Pre-Burst] with the smartphone, terminate the connection only
after switching to 4K Burst recording by pressing [Q.MENU/ ] button on the camera.
311
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone
Taking pictures via a smartphone (remote recording)
1
2
Connect to a smartphone (→306)
Operate the smartphone
Select [ ]
Take pictures
•• The recorded images are saved in the camera.
•• Some settings are not available.
●●When using zoom, the camera could tilt when the lens barrel extends. Make sure to secure the
camera in place with a tripod or by other means.
●●This function is not available in the following cases:
•• Panorama Shot Mode
•• When using [Time Lapse Shot]
•• When [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]
Taking a picture while jumping
When you hold your smartphone and jump, the camera’s shutter can be released
automatically as the smartphone detects the peak of the jump.
1
312
[ ] → [ ] → Select the sensitivity
••[ ] will be displayed on the remote recording screen of the smartphone.
••We recommend that you take test pictures.
••For details about the operating procedure, refer to [Help] in the “Image App”.
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone
Playing back pictures in the camera on a smartphone
1
2
Connect to a smartphone (→306)
Operate the smartphone
Select [ ]
•• You can switch a device of pictures to be displayed using the icon at
the top left on the screen. Select [LUMIX] to display a picture saved
in the camera.
•• When the picture is touched, it is played back at a larger size.
Switch the
device of the
pictures to be
displayed
••When playing back motion pictures, the data size is reduced during transmission of
motion pictures to “Image App”. Therefore, the picture quality may be different from the
actual motion picture that you have recorded. Depending on your smartphone and its
usage environment, you may notice degradation in the picture quality or skipping of
sound when playing back motion pictures and still pictures.
Saving pictures in the camera to a smartphone
1
2
Connect to a smartphone (→306)
Operate the smartphone
Select [ ]
•• You can switch a device of pictures to be displayed using the icon at
the top left on the screen. Select [LUMIX] to display a picture saved
in the camera.
Press and hold the picture and drag it to save it on the
smartphone
••Functions can be assigned to the top, bottom, left and right as you wish.
●●RAW still pictures, AVCHD motion pictures, MP4 motion pictures for which the [Rec Quality] size is
[4K], 4K burst files, and pictures recorded with [Post Focus] cannot be saved.
313
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone
Sending pictures in the camera to social networking services
1
2
Connect to a smartphone (→306)
Operate the smartphone
Select [ ]
•• You can switch a device of pictures to
be displayed using the icon at the top
left on the screen. Select [LUMIX] to
display a picture saved in the camera.
Switch the
device of the
pictures to be
displayed
Press and hold the picture and drag
it to send it to the social networking
service, etc.
•• The picture will be sent to the social
networking service or other WEB
services.
••Functions can be assigned to the top, bottom, left and right as you wish.
Adding location information to pictures in the camera from a
smartphone
You can send the location information acquired from a smartphone to the camera. After
the information is sent, you can write it on the pictures in the camera.
GPS
Starts location information recording
Ends location information recording
Sends and writes the location
information
Start the recording
••You can also use [Location Logging] in the [Playback] menu to write the sent location
information to the pictures.
••Location information that is different from the information acquired during recording may
be written. Take care regarding the following matters.
–– Set [Home] of [World Time] of the camera to your home area.
–– Once a smartphone starts recording the location information, do not change the
[Home] setting of [World Time] of the camera.
••The location information cannot be written to pictures recorded without setting [Clock
Set].
314
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone
■■Recording location information and taking pictures
Start recording the location information on your smartphone
Start “Image App” (→305)
Select [
]
Select [
Select [
]
Start geotagging]
Take pictures using the camera
End recording of the location information on your smartphone
Select [
Stop geotagging] to end recording of location information
■■Writing location information to a picture
Preparation
(On the camera) Connect to a smartphone. (→306)
Operate the smartphone
Start “Image App” (→305)
Select [
Select [
]
]
Select [ ] to send or write location information
•• Follow the messages on the screen to perform the operation.
] is displayed for pictures that have location information written to it.
•• [
●●The smartphone battery drains faster while location information is being recorded. When recording
of location information is not necessary, stop it.
●●For details about the operating procedure, etc., refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu.
•• On the smartphone, you can set the acquisition interval of location information and check the
transfer status of location information
●●The location information cannot be written in the following cases:
•• Images recorded after location information was sent to the camera
•• Pictures that already have location information
•• Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] format
•• Protected pictures
•• There is not enough free space on your card
•• Card switch is in “LOCK” position
•• When connected to computer/printer
•• Pictures recorded using cameras other than this unit
315
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone
Combining motion pictures recorded with Snap Movie
according to your preference on a smartphone
Using a smartphone, you can combine motion pictures recorded with the camera’s [Snap
Movie] function (→262). Music can be added to motion pictures to be combined. In
addition, you can save the combined motion picture or upload it on a web service.
WEB
services
Combine the motion
pictures, save the
combined motion picture,
and send it to a web
service
Record motion pictures
with [Snap Movie]
Send the recorded
motion pictures
Edit
Combine the motion
pictures, and save the
combined motion picture
316
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone
■■Combining motion pictures by operating a smartphone
Connect to a smartphone (→306)
Operate the smartphone
Select [
]
Select [
]
•• [Snap Movie] motion pictures with recent recording dates will be selected and automatically
sent to the smartphone.
•• When motion pictures with recent recording dates are not available, a screen that lets you
select motion pictures will be displayed. Select motion pictures and send them.
Operate the smartphone to edit the motion pictures
•• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate [Snap Movie]
of “Image App”.
●●[Snap Movie] of the “Image App” requires a smartphone that supports Android OS 4.3 or higher.
●●The iPhone 4 does not support [Snap Movie] of the “Image App”.
●●The smartphone may not be able to play back and save [Snap Movie] motion pictures recorded with
another device.
317
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Displaying still pictures on a TV
You can display still pictures on a TV that is compatible with a DLNA certified digital
media renderer (DMR) function.
Preparation
Set the TV to DLNA waiting Mode.
•• Read the operating instructions for your TV.
1
Set the menu
2
3
Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→338, 341)
4
Take or play back still pictures on this unit
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]
→ [Playback on TV]
Select the device you wish to connect to
•• When the connection is established, the screen is displayed.
•• To terminate the connection, follow the steps below:
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes]
(You can also close the connection by pressing the [Wi-Fi] button. (→303))
●●When you display the pictures on a TV using the Wi-Fi function, they are not output using 4K
resolution. To output pictures using 4K resolution, connect this unit to the TV using an HDMI micro
cable. (→348)
●●When a TV is connected to this unit, the TV screen may temporarily return to the status before the
connection. Pictures are displayed again when you take or play back pictures.
●●Even if [Effect] and [Sound] are set on this unit, these settings are disabled when the pictures are
played back on a TV during Slide Show playback.
●●Motion pictures and 4K burst files cannot be played back.
●●During Multi Playback, Calendar Playback, or when selecting a focus position from a picture
recorded in Post Focus, pictures displayed on the screen of the camera are not displayed on the
TV.
318
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Sending pictures
When sending pictures, first select [New Connection], then
select the method of sending pictures.
After you have completed connecting, you can also change
the sending settings, such as the size of pictures to be sent.
■■Images that can be sent
Destination
JPEG
RAW
MP4*1
AVCHD*1, *2
4K Burst File*1
Pictures recorded in
[Post Focus]*1
[Smartphone] (→322)
○
–
○*3
–
–
[PC] (→325)
○
○
○
○
○
[Cloud Sync. Service]
(→331)
○
–
○*3
–
–
[Web service] (→327)
○
–
○*3
–
–
[AV device] (→324)
○
–
–
–
–
○
–
–
–
–
[Printer]*1 (→323)
*1Sending by [Send Images While Recording] is not available.
*2Files larger than 4 GB cannot be sent.
*3Excluding motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K].
••Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.
••For more information about picture playback, see the operating instructions of the
destination device, or check the WEB service to which you will send the pictures.
[Send Images While Recording]
A picture can be automatically sent to a specified device every time you take it.
••[ ] is displayed on the recording screen while connected by
[Send Images While Recording], and [ ] is displayed while
files are being sent.
1
••To terminate the connection, follow the steps below:
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes]
••You can terminate the connection or change the send settings by pressing [Wi-Fi]
button. (→303)
You cannot change the settings while sending a still picture. Wait until sending is
complete.
319
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Sending pictures
●●Since the camera gives priority to recording, sending may take longer during the recording.
●●If you turn off the camera before you have completed sending, or if you close the Wi-Fi
connection, or in similar situations, unsent files will not be resent.
●●You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.
●●Motion pictures, 4K burst files recorded with the 4K Photo function, and pictures recorded in [Post
Focus] cannot be sent.
●●If you set [Time Lapse Shot], the Wi-Fi connection is terminated and you cannot use this function.
[Send Images Stored in the Camera]
You can select and send recorded images.
■■How to select an image(s) after selecting [Single Select] or [Multi Select]
[Single Select]
Select the picture
Select [Set]
Set
[Multi Select]
Select the picture (repeat)
•• If selected again, the setting will be cancelled.
Select [OK]
•• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is
limited.
OK
1
2
3
4
5
6
••To change the send settings on a screen that is displayed after the image has been
sent, press [DISP.] button. To close the connection, select [Exit].
●●Details of the [Playback] menu [Favorite] or [Print Set] settings will not be sent.
●●Some images taken with a different camera may not be able to be sent.
●●Images that have been modified or edited with a computer may not be able to be sent.
320
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Sending pictures
Changing the settings for sending images
After you have completed connecting, you can change the sending settings, such as the
size of pictures to be sent, by pressing the [DISP.] button.
Item
[Size]
Description
Resize the image to send.
[Original] / [Auto]*1 / [Change]
•• If you select [Auto], the image size is determined by the
circumstances at the destination.
•• You can select the image size for [Change] from [M], [S], or [VGA].
The aspect ratio does not change.
[File Format]*2
[JPG] / [RAW+JPG] / [RAW]
[Delete Location Data]*3
Select whether to delete the location information from images before
sending them.
[ON]:Delete the location information, then send.
[OFF]:Keep the location information and send.
•• This operation only deletes the location information from the
images that are set to be sent. (The location information will not
be deleted from the original images stored in this unit.)
[Cloud Limit]*4
You can select whether to send images when the Cloud Folder runs
out of free space.
[ON]:Do not send images.
[OFF]:Delete images from the oldest ones, then send new images.
*1 Only available when the destination is set to [Web service].
*2Only available when the destination is set to [PC].
*3Only available when the destination for [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is set to [Cloud Sync.
Service] or [Web service].
*4 Only available when the destination is set to [Cloud Sync. Service].
321
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Sending pictures to a smartphone
Preparation
Install “Image App” in advance. (→305)
1
Set the menu
2
Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→338, 341)
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]
→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]
→ [Smartphone]
(On your smartphone)
■■When connecting with [Via Network]
Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”
Select a wireless access point and set
Start “Image App” (→305)
■■When connecting with [Wi-Fi Direct] or [WPS Connection] in [Direct]
Start “Image App” (→305)
■■When connecting with [Manual Connection] in [Direct]
Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”
Select the SSID displayed on this unit
Start “Image App” (→305)
3
4
Select the device you wish to connect to
Check the send settings, and select [Set]
•• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→321)
[Send Images While Recording]
5 Take a still picture (→319)
[Send Images Stored in the Camera]
Select the picture (→320)
5
322
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Wireless printing
You can print out recorded still pictures wirelessly from a PictBridge (wireless
LAN-compatible)* printer.
*Compliant with the DPS over IP standards.
Contact the printer manufacturers for details on PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printers.
1
Set the menu
2
3
4
Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→338, 341)
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]
→ [Send Images Stored in the Camera] → [Printer]
Select a printer you want to connect
Select the still picture and print
•• Pictures are selected the same way as when connecting by USB connection cable. For details
(→358).
•• To terminate the connection, press [Q.MENU/ ] button.
(You can also close the connection by pressing the [Wi-Fi] button. (→303))
●●Motion pictures, 4K burst files, and pictures recorded with [Post Focus] cannot be printed.
323
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Sending pictures to AV device
Still pictures and motion pictures can be sent to AV devices in the home (home AV
devices), such as DLNA compatible recorders.
Home AV device
Wireless access point
Preparations
When sending a picture to AV devices, set your device to DLNA waiting Mode.
•• Read the operating instructions of your device for details.
1
Set the menu
2
3
4
Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→338, 341)
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]
→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]
→ [AV device]
Select the device you wish to connect to
Check the send settings, and select [Set]
•• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→321)
[Send Images While Recording]
5 Take a still picture (→319)
[Send Images Stored in the Camera]
Select the picture (→320)
5
324
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Sending pictures to a PC
Still pictures and motion pictures recorded by the camera can be sent to a PC.
Preparations
•• Turn the computer on.
•• Prepare folders for receiving images on the PC before sending a picture to the PC (below).
•• If the standard settings are changed for the workgroup on the connected PC, you must change
settings in [PC Connection] on this unit. (→344)
To create a folder that receives images
••Create a PC user account (account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to
32 characters)) consisting of alphanumeric characters. An attempt to create a receive
folder may fail if the account includes non-alphanumeric characters.
■■When using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the PC (→353)
Create a folder that receives images with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
•• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).
■■When not using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
(For Windows)
Supported OS: Windows 10 / Windows 8.1 / Windows 8 / Windows 7
Example: Windows 7
Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then right-click
Select [Properties], then enable sharing of the folder
•• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the operating system.
(For Mac)
Supported OS: OS X v10.5 to v10.11
Example: OS X v10.8
Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then click on the items in the following
order
[File] → [Get Info]
Enable sharing of the folder
•• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the operating system.
325
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Sending pictures to a PC
Sending pictures to a PC
1
Set the menu
2
3
Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→338, 341)
4
5
Select the folder you want to send to
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]
→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]
→ [PC]
Select the PC you want to connect to
•• If the PC you want to connect to is not displayed, select [Manual Input], then enter the computer
name (for Mac, enter the NetBIOS name).
Check the send settings, and select [Set]
•• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→321)
[Send Images While Recording]
6 Take a still picture (→319)
[Send Images Stored in the Camera]
Select the picture (→320)
6
●●Folders sorted by the sent date are created in the specified folder, and pictures are saved in those
folders.
●●If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you set on your PC.
●●If the computer name (for Mac, the NetBIOS name) contains spaces, etc., the name may not be
properly recognised. If you cannot connect, we recommend changing the computer name (for
Mac, the NetBIOS name) to a combination of 15 or less alphanumeric characters only.
326
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Using WEB services
Through “LUMIX CLUB”, you can send still pictures and motion pictures to social
networking services, etc. By selecting the setting to automatically transfer still pictures
and motion pictures to [Cloud Sync. Service], you can receive the transferred still pictures
and motion pictures on a PC or a smartphone.
WEB services
LUMIX CLUB
Wireless access point
Cloud
synchronisation
services
When sending images to WEB service
Preparation
You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB” (→332) to send a picture to a WEB service.
To send images to a WEB service, you need to register the WEB service. (→328)
●●Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting from the leakage, loss, etc.
of images uploaded on WEB services.
●●When uploading images to the WEB service, do not delete images from this camera, even
after they have finished sending, until you have checked that they have been properly
uploaded to the WEB service. Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages
resulting from the deletion of images stored in this unit.
●●Images uploaded to the WEB service cannot be displayed or deleted with this camera. Check
images by accessing the WEB service with your smartphone or computer.
●●If sending images fails, a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the email address
registered with “LUMIX CLUB”.
327
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Using WEB services
Registering the WEB service to “LUMIX CLUB”
Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible WEB services.
http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/
Preparation
Make sure that you have created an account on the WEB service you want to use, and have the
login information available.
1
Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer
2
3
Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password and log in to the service
4
328
http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
If you have not registered your email address with “LUMIX CLUB”, register the
email address
Select the WEB service to be used for WEB service link settings and register it
•• Follow the instructions on the screen to register the service.
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Using WEB services
Sending pictures
1
Set the menu
2
3
4
Select [Via Network] and connect (→338)
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]
→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]
→ [Web service]
Select a WEB service you want to connect
Check the send settings, and select [Set]
•• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→321)
[Send Images While Recording]
5 Take a still picture (→319)
[Send Images Stored in the Camera]
Select the picture (→320)
5
329
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Using WEB services
■■Quickly sending pictures in the camera to WEB services
Once you send a picture, you can send pictures to the WEB service as quickly and
easily as using a smartphone, only when the environment for connecting to a wireless
access point is available.
(The instructions below assume that you are already registered to “LUMIX CLUB”
and the camera has a record of a connection to a wireless access point.)
Display the picture
•• When pictures are displayed as a group, they are all sent.
When a single picture in a group is displayed, only the picture
being displayed is sent.
Select [Yes] after pressing
(When group pictures are being displayed, select
[Upload(Wi-Fi)] → [Yes])
•• The same operation can be performed by touching [
].
], and select
(When group pictures are selected, touch [
[Upload(Wi-Fi)].)
Select a WEB service you want to connect
Check the send settings, and select [Set]
The camera is connected to the previously used wireless access point and the pictures are sent
to the WEB service.
•• Step , are not necessary when you continue to send another image.
•• To change the transmission setting for the picture, press the [DISP.] button. (→321)
•• To terminate the connection, press [MENU/SET] or operate other controls to exit the playback
screen. You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi] button on the camera.
(→303)
To change the settings for sending images or web service
Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, and follow step and onwards again.
••You can also change the send settings by pressing [Wi-Fi] button while using a Wi-Fi
connection. (→303)
●●If the camera has no records of connections to wireless access points that are available, a screen
that asks you to select a connection method is displayed. Select the connection method and
connect the camera to a wireless access point. (→338)
●●When you are not registered to “LUMIX CLUB”, a screen that asks you to acquire a new login ID is
displayed. Get a login ID and set a password. (→333)
330
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Using WEB services
When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service]
Preparation
You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB” (→332) and configure the Cloud Sync. setting to send
a picture to a Cloud Folder. Use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (→353) on a PC or “Image App” on a
smartphone to configure the Cloud Sync. settings.
■■About the images sent to a Cloud Folder by the use of [Cloud Sync. Service]
(Current as of January 2016)
••If you set the picture destination to [Cloud Sync. Service], sent pictures are
temporarily saved in the cloud folder, and they can be synchronised with the device
in use, such as the PC or smartphone.
••A Cloud Folder stores transferred images for 30 days (up to 1,000 pictures).
Transferred images are deleted automatically 30 days after the transfer.
Furthermore, when the number of stored images exceeds 1,000, some images may
be deleted depending on the [Cloud Limit] (→321) setting even within 30 days after
the transfer.
••When the download of images from a Cloud Folder to all specified devices is
complete, images may be deleted from the Cloud Folder even within 30 days after
the transfer.
1
Set the menu
2
3
4
Check the message and press [MENU/SET]
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]
→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]
→ [Cloud Sync. Service]
Select [Via Network] and connect (→338)
Check the send settings, and select [Set]
•• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→321)
[Send Images While Recording]
5 Take a still picture (→319)
[Send Images Stored in the Camera]
Select the picture (→320)
5
331
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Using “LUMIX CLUB”
About the [LUMIX CLUB]
Acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID (free).
If you register this unit to the “LUMIX CLUB”, you can synchronise images between the
devices you are using, or transfer these images to WEB services.
Use the “LUMIX CLUB” when uploading pictures to WEB services.
••You can set the same “LUMIX CLUB” login ID for this unit and a smartphone. (→335)
Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.
http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
Please note;
••The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected problems,
and service contents may be changed or added to, without prior notice to the users.
••The service may be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable period of advance
notice.
332
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Using “LUMIX CLUB”
Acquiring a new login ID ([New account])
1
Set the menu
2
3
Select [Set/Add Account]
4
Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point, and set
5
Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use and select [Agree]
6
Enter the password
7
Check the login ID and select [OK]
333
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]
Select [New account]
•• Connect to the network. Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].
•• A confirmation screen will be displayed if a login ID has already been acquired for the camera.
Select [Yes] to acquire a new login ID, or [No] if you do not need to acquire a new login ID.
•• For details (→338).
•• The settings screen will only appear during the first connection. Connection methods set on this
unit are stored and will be used for subsequent connections. If you want to change the wireless
access point to connect to, press the [DISP.] button, then change the connecting destination.
•• Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].
•• You can press
to switch pages.
•• Turn the zoom lever to the T side to enlarge the page display (x2 magnification).
•• If you turn the zoom lever to the W side after enlarging the page, the page returns to its original
size (no magnification).
to move the position of the area to be enlarged.
•• You can use
•• Press [Q.MENU/ ] button to cancel the process without acquiring a login ID.
•• Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password.
•• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→87).
•• The login ID (12-digit number) will be displayed automatically.
When logging in to the “LUMIX CLUB” with a computer, you only need to enter the numbers.
•• A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Select [OK].
•• Be sure to make a note of the login ID and password.
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Using “LUMIX CLUB”
Using a previously acquired login ID/confirming and changing login ID
and password ([Set Login ID])
Preparation
To use a previously acquired login ID, confirm your ID and password.
To change the “LUMIX CLUB” password on the camera, access the “LUMIX CLUB” website from
your smartphone or PC and change the “LUMIX CLUB” password in advance.
1
Set the menu
2
3
Select [Set/Add Account]
4
5
Select the item you wish to change
6
Select [Exit]
334
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]
Select [Set Login ID]
•• The login ID and password are displayed.
•• The password is displayed as “ ”.
•• Close the menu if only checking the login ID.
Enter your login ID or password
•• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→87).
•• Enter the new password you have created on your smartphone or PC into the camera.
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Using “LUMIX CLUB”
To set the same login ID for the camera and the smartphone
••Setting the same login ID on this unit and your smartphone is convenient for sending
images on this unit to other devices or WEB services.
■■When either this unit or the smartphone has acquired the login ID
Connect this unit to the smartphone (→306)
From the “Image App” menu, set the common login ID
••After connecting this unit to the smartphone, the setup screen for a common login ID
may appear when you display the playback screen. You can also set a common login
ID by following the on-screen instructions.
••This operation is not available for [Wi-Fi Direct] connection.
■■When this unit and the smartphone have acquired different login IDs
When you want to use the smartphone’s login ID for this unit
Change the login ID and password for this unit to those acquired by the smartphone.
When you want to use this unit’s login ID for the smartphone
Change the login ID and password for the smartphone to those acquired by this unit.
Check the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use
Check the details if the terms of use have been updated.
1 Set the menu
→
2
335
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]
Select [Terms of use]
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
Using “LUMIX CLUB”
Delete your login ID and account from the “LUMIX CLUB”
Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party or disposing of it.
You can also delete your “LUMIX CLUB” account.
••Changes and other actions to login IDs can only be made to the login ID acquired with
the camera.
1 Set the menu
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]
2
Select [Delete account]
3
Select [Yes] in the login ID delete confirmation screen
4
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen for deleting the “LUMIX CLUB” account
5
Select [Next]
336
•• The message is displayed. Select [Next].
•• The message is displayed. Select [Next].
•• If you want to continue using the service, selecting [No] will only delete the login ID. Exit the
menu after it is executed.
•• The login ID is deleted, and then the message notifying the deletion of your account is displayed.
Select [OK].
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
About connections
If you have selected [New Connection], select the Wi-Fi function and sending destination,
and then select the connection method.
If you are connecting with the same settings as used previously, you can quickly start
using the Wi-Fi function by connecting with [Select a destination from History] or [Select a
destination from Favorite].
This section describes connection methods.
••When connecting with the same settings as used previously, refer to (→342).
When a screen similar to the one below is displayed, select a connection method.
••Example of operation for displaying a screen:
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]
→ [Send Images While Recording] → [Smartphone]
Wireless access point
Connection method
Description
[Via Network]
Connects through a wireless access point.
(→338)
[Direct]
Your device connects directly to this unit.
(If you are out and unable to use your wireless access
point, or temporarily connecting to equipment you do not
ordinarily use, or in a similar situation, it is convenient to
make a direct connection.)
(→341)
337
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
About connections
Connecting via a wireless access point ([Via Network])
Select a connection method to the wireless access point.
••WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure
the settings related to the connection and security of
wireless LAN devices. To check if the wireless access
point you are using is compatible with WPS, refer to the
instruction manual of the wireless access point.
Connection method
Description
Save push button type wireless access point that is compatible with
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ with a WPS mark.
[WPS (Push-Button)]
1
Press the wireless access point WPS button until it
switches to WPS Mode
•• Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for details.
Save PIN code type wireless access point that is compatible with
Wi-Fi Protected Setup with a WPS mark.
1
[WPS (PIN code)]
2
3
On the camera screen, select the wireless access point
you are connecting to
Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen
into the wireless access point
Press [MENU/SET] on the camera
•• Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for details.
[From List]
338
Select this option when you are not sure about the WPS compatibility,
or when you want to search for and connect to a wireless access
point. (→339)
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
About connections
If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility
(connecting by [From List])
Search for available wireless access points.
••Confirm encryption key of the selected wireless access point if the network
authentication is encrypted.
••When connecting by [Manual Input], confirm SSID, network authentication type,
encryption type, encryption key of the wireless access point you are using.
1 Select the wireless access point you are connecting to
•• Pressing [DISP.] button will search for a wireless access point
again.
•• If no wireless access point is found, refer to “When connecting
with [Manual Input]” (→340).
2
(If network authentication is encrypted)
Enter the encryption key
•• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→87).
339
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
About connections
■■When connecting with [Manual Input]
On the screen of step 1 of “If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility
(connecting by [From List])”, select [Manual Input] (→339)
Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, then select [Set]
•• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→87).
Select the network authentication type
•• For information on network authentication, see the instruction manual of the wireless access
point.
Select the encryption type
•• The type of settings that can be changed may vary depending on the details of network
authentication settings.
Network authentication type
Encryption types that can be set
[WPA2-PSK] / [WPA-PSK]
[TKIP] / [AES]
[Common Key]
[WEP]
[Open]
[No Encryption] / [WEP]
(When an option other than [No Encryption] is selected)
Enter the encryption key
●●Check the wireless access points instruction manual and settings when saving a wireless access
point.
●●If no connection can be established, the wireless access point’s radio waves may be too weak.
Refer to “Message displays” (→376) and “Q&A Troubleshooting” (→383) for details.
●●Transmission speed may decrease, or may not be usable depending on the environment it is used
in.
340
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
About connections
Connecting directly ([Direct])
Select a connection method with which your equipment is
compatible.
••Read the operating instructions of your device for details.
Connection method
[Wi-Fi Direct]
Description
1
2
3
Set the device to Wi-Fi Direct® mode
1
2
Select [WPS (Push-Button)]
Select [Wi-Fi Direct] on the camera screen
On the camera screen, select the device to connect to
[WPS (Push-Button)]
[WPS Connection]
Set the device to WPS mode
•• You can wait longer for a connection by pressing the [DISP.] button on
this unit.
[WPS (PIN code)]
1
2
1
[Manual Connection]
Select [WPS (PIN code)]
Enter the PIN code of the device into the camera
Enter the SSID and password
into the device. The SSID and
password are displayed on the
connection waiting screen of this
unit
•• If a device to be connected is [Smartphone],
the password is not displayed. Select SSID
to connect. (→306)
341
SSID and Password
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
About connections
Connecting quickly with the same settings as used previously
([Select a destination from History] / [Select a destination from
Favorite])
The camera keeps a History of times you used the Wi-Fi function. You can register items
in the History to Favourite.
You can easily connect with the same settings as used previously by connecting from
History or Favourite.
••If the Wi-Fi settings of the device to connect to have been changed, it may not be
possible to connect to the device.
1 Set the menu
→
2
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function]
Select [Select a destination from History] or [Select a destination from Favorite]
Item
3
Description
[Select a destination from History]
Connects using the same settings as used previously.
[Select a destination from Favorite]
Connects using settings registered in Favourite.
Select the desired connection setting
•• If the device you want to connect to (smartphone, etc.) is connected to a wireless access point
other than the camera, you cannot connect the device to the camera using [Direct]. Change the
Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the access point to be used is set to
the camera.
You can also select [New Connection] and reconnect the devices. (→306)
Registering History items to Favourite
1
Set the menu
2
3
Select the item you wish to register and press
342
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function]
→ [Select a destination from History]
Enter a registration name
•• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→87).
•• Up to 30 characters can be entered. A double-byte character will be treated as two characters.
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
About connections
Editing items registered in Favourite
1
Set the menu
2
3
Select the Favourite item you wish to edit and press
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function]
→ [Select a destination from Favorite]
Select item
Item
Description
[Remove from Favorite]
Cancels Favourites setting.
[Change the Order in Favorite]
Select the destination.
[Change the Registered Name]
•• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”
(→87).
•• Up to 30 characters can be entered. A double-byte character
will be treated as two characters.
Registering and saving frequently used Wi-Fi connection settings to
Favourites (→342)
●●The number of settings that can be saved in the history is limited.
Checking connection details of History or Favourite
●●When selecting History or Favourite items, you can view connection details by pressing
the [DISP.] button.
●●Performing [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] deletes content registered in History and Favourite.
●●When using [Select a destination from History] or [Select a destination from Favorite] to connect to
a network to which many PCs are connected, it may be difficult to make the connection because
the camera searches for previously connected equipment out of a large number of equipment
pieces. If you cannot connect, retry the connection using [New Connection].
343
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
[Wi-Fi Setup]
Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.
[Wi-Fi Setup] cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.
1
Set the menu
→
[Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → Desired setting
Item
Description
[Wi-Fi Password]
You can improve security
by enabling password entry
for a direct connection to a
smartphone.
[ON]:Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID and
password. (→308)
[OFF]:Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID.
(→306)
[LUMIX CLUB]
Acquires or changes the
“LUMIX CLUB” login ID.
•• For details (→332).
[PC Connection]
You can set the workgroup.
You must connect to the same workgroup as the destination
computer when sending pictures to the computer.
(The default is set to “WORKGROUP”)
[Change Workgroup Name]:
Enter the workgroup of the connecting computer.
[Restore to Default]:
Returns settings to default settings.
•• When [ON] is selected, you can also set up a connection by
scanning a QR code. (→309, 310)
•• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”
(→87).
•• To use with a computer of the standard settings, you do not have
to change the workgroup.
[Device Name]
You can change the name
(SSID) of this unit.
344
Press [DISP.] button
Enter the desired device name (Up to 32 characters can be
entered)
•• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”
(→87).
SQW0550
Wi-Fi
[Wi-Fi Setup]
Item
Description
[Wi-Fi Function Lock]
To prevent incorrect operation
or use of the Wi-Fi function
by a third party and to protect
saved personal information,
it is recommended that you
protect the Wi-Fi function with
a password.
Setting a password will automatically display the password input
screen when the Wi-Fi function is used.
[Setup]: Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
[Cancel]
[Network Address]
Displays the MAC address and
IP address of this unit.
•• A “MAC Address” is a unique address that is used to identify
network equipment.
•• “IP address” refers to a number that identifies a PC connected to
a network such as the Internet. Usually, the addresses for homes
are automatically assigned by the DHCP function such as a
wireless access point. (Example: 192.168.0.87)
345
•• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”
(→87).
•• Make a copy of password. If you forget the password, you can
reset it with [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu, however
other settings will also be reset. (excluding [LUMIX CLUB])
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Enjoying 4K motion pictures
Viewing 4K motion pictures
■■Viewing on TV screen
When you connect this unit to a 4K-compatible TV and play
back a motion picture recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K],
you can enjoy high-resolution 4K motion pictures. Although
resolution output will be lower, you can also play back 4K
motion pictures by connecting to a high-definition TV and
other devices that do not have 4K support.
Preparations
•• Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] (→83) to [AUTO] or [4K].
•• When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture, select [Auto].
Connect this unit to a 4K-compatible TV using an HDMI micro cable and display the
playback screen (→348)
•• When the [VIERA Link] setting on the camera is set to [ON] and the camera is connected to
a VIERA Link (HDMI)-compatible Panasonic television (VIERA), the television automatically
switches its input and the playback screen is displayed. For details (→350).
•• When you have motion pictures recorded with [Rec Format] set to
[MP4] and their size set to [4K] in [Rec Quality], you can also play
them back by inserting the card into the SD card slot of a TV that
supports motion pictures in 4K.
•• Read the operating instructions for the TV.
■■Viewing 4K motion pictures on a PC screen
To play back motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K] on a
PC, use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (→353).
••To play back and edit 4K motion pictures, a high-performance PC
environment is required.
••For details, refer to the operating instructions of
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).
346
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Enjoying 4K motion pictures
Storing 4K motion pictures
■■Storing 4K motion pictures on your PC
For details (→352).
■■Storing 4K motion pictures on a DVD
You cannot transfer or copy motion pictures recorded in [Rec Quality] with [4K] to a
Blu‑ray disc or DVD using a Panasonic recorder. (Current as of January 2016)
You can use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (→353) to convert the file size of a
motion picture to a smaller size or copy it to a DVD.
••For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).
347
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Viewing on TV screen
You can view pictures on a TV screen by connecting your camera to your TV with the
HDMI micro cable.
Preparation
Turn off both camera and TV.
1
Connect camera to TV
Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong
direction, the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not
insert into the wrong socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.
An HDMI micro cable can be used to enable viewing of still and motion pictures in
high-resolution.
TZ100/TZ101
[HDMI] socket
To HDMI video/audio
input socket
HDMI micro cable
Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo. Cables that do not
comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D-Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)
TZ80/TZ81
[HDMI] socket
To HDMI video/audio
input socket
HDMI micro cable
Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo. Cables that do not
comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D-Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)
2
3
348
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input source to match the
connection socket
Turn on the camera and press the Playback button
••Input of the TV will switch automatically and playback screen is displayed when
connected to a VIERA Link-compatible TV using an HDMI micro cable with the
[VIERA Link] set to [ON]. (→350)
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Viewing on TV screen
●●Bars may appear at the sides or at the top and bottom of the screen, depending on the aspect
ratio setting.
●●Change the screen mode on your TV if the picture is displayed with the top or bottom cut off.
●●When pictures are displayed, they may not be displayed properly depending on the type of TV.
●●Pictures rotated to portrait may be blurred slightly.
●●You can play back pictures on TVs in other countries (regions) which use the NTSC or PAL
system. You can find [Video Out] setting in [TV Connection] from the [Setup] menu.
●●Depending on the TV to be connected, 4K burst files may not be played back correctly.
●●Check the [HDMI Mode (Play)]. (→83)
●● TZ100/TZ101
To play back 24p motion pictures, set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to [AUTO]. Otherwise, the picture is not
output at 24 frames per second.
●●When an HDMI micro cable is connected, pictures are not displayed on the screen.
●●HDMI output will be cancelled if a USB connection cable (supplied) is connected simultaneously.
●●Audio output is stereo.
●●Read the operating instructions for the TV.
The recorded pictures can be played back on a TV with an SD
Memory Card slot
●●Proper playback (aspect ratio) will be dependent on the TV used for viewing.
●●The file format of the motion pictures that can be played back differs depending on the
TV model.
●●You may not be able to play back panorama pictures. Also you cannot perform
automatic scrolling playback of panorama pictures.
●●For cards compatible with playback, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.
349
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Viewing on TV screen
VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™)
What is VIERA Link (HDMI)?
●●VIERA Link is a function that automatically links this camera to VIERA Linkcompatible devices by connecting HDMI micro cables for enabling easy operation
with the VIERA remote control. (Some operations are not available.)
●●VIERA Link (HDMI) is an exclusive Panasonic function added to the industrystandard HDMI control functions known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics
Control). Operation is not guaranteed when connecting with non-Panasonic HDMI
CEC-compatible devices. Refer to your product manual to verify compatibility with
VIERA Link (HDMI).
●●This camera supports VIERA Link (HDMI) Version 5. This is the Panasonic standard
that also supports previous Panasonic VIERA Link devices.
Preparation
Set [VIERA Link] to [ON] (→84).
1
2
3
Connect the camera to a VIERA Link (HDMI)-compatible Panasonic television
(VIERA) with an HDMI micro cable (→348)
Turn on the camera and press the Playback button
Operate with the remote control for the TV
●●To play back the audio of the motion pictures in a slide show, set the [Sound] in the Slide Show
setting screen to [AUTO] or [Audio].
●●It is recommended to connect this unit to an HDMI terminal other than the HDMI1 if there are 2 or
more HDMI input terminals on the TV.
●●If the [VIERA Link] setting on the camera is [ON], operations via the camera buttons will be limited.
350
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Viewing on TV screen
■■Other related operations
Turning the unit OFF
••The camera can also be turned off when the television is turned off with the remote
control.
Automatic input select
••When the camera and TV are connected by HDMI micro cable, the camera is turned
ON, and the camera’s Playback button is pressed, the television input automatically
switches to the camera’s screen. The television can also be switched on via the
camera from Standby Mode
(if “Power on link” on the television is set to “on”).
••If VIERA Link (HDMI) does not function correctly (→395)
●●If you do not know if your TV is VIERA Link (HDMI) compatible, see the TV’s operating
instructions.
●●Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo. Cables that do not comply with the
HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D-Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)
●●When VIERA Link is activated, the [HDMI Mode (Play)] setting of this unit is automatically
recognised.
351
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures
on your PC
Still/motion pictures can be copied from the camera to your computer by connecting the
two together.
••Some computers can read directly from the camera’s memory card.
For details, see the instruction manual for your computer.
••If your computer does not support SDXC Memory Cards, a message will be displayed
requesting you to format the card. (Do not format the card. This will erase recorded
pictures.)
If the card is not recognised, refer to the following support website.
http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html
■■Computer specifications
You can connect the camera to a computer that can detect a mass storage device
(device that stores a large volume of data).
••Windows: Windows 10 / Windows 8.1 / Windows 8 / Windows 7
••Mac: OS X v10.5 - v10.11
Some motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] may not be scanned
correctly by copying a file or folder
●●When using Windows, be sure to use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software (→353) to
copy motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD].
●●When using Mac, you can copy motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] using “iMovie”.
Note, however, that it may not be possible to copy pictures depending on the picture
quality settings.
(For details about iMovie, please contact Apple Inc.)
352
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC
Downloading software
If you wish to play back or edit pictures on a PC, download software from the supplier’s
website and install it on your PC.
PHOTOfunSTUDIO 9.8 PE
You can capture still pictures or motion pictures to your PC, or organise captured pictures
by categorising by recording date, model name of the digital camera used to record, etc.
You can also correct still pictures, edit motion pictures, or write to DVD.
Check the website below to download/install the software.
The software is available for download until the end of March 2021.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_pfs98pe.html
••Operating environment
Supported OS
Windows® 10 (32-bit/64-bit)
Windows® 8.1 (32-bit/64-bit)
Windows® 8 (32-bit/64-bit)
Windows® 7 (32-bit/64-bit) SP1
Windows® 10
CPU
Windows® 8.1
Windows® 8
Pentium® 4
2.8 GHz or higher
Windows® 7
Display
1024×768 pixels or more (1920×1080 pixels or more recommended)
Windows® 10
RAM
Windows® 8.1
Windows® 8
Windows®
Free hard disk
space
1 GB or more (32-bit) / 2 GB or more (64-bit)
7
450 MB or more for installing software
••To edit 4K motion pictures, you need the 64-bit versions of Windows 10,
Windows 8.1, Windows 8, or Windows 7.
••Refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF) for further
information about the operating environment.
353
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC
SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE
This software develops and edits RAW file pictures. Edited pictures can be saved in a file
format such as JPEG or TIFF that can be displayed on a PC, etc.
Check the website below to download/install the software.
http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/
••Operating environment
Supported OS
Windows® 10
Windows® 8.1
Windows® 8
Windows® 7
Mac® OS X v10.6 - v10.11
••For details on the operating environment and how to use the SILKYPIX Developer
Studio SE, refer to the “Help” or the Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s support website.
LoiLoScope 30 day full trial version
Motion pictures can be edited easily.
(Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8 / 7)
Check the website below to download/install the software.
http://loilo.tv/product/20
••For more information on how to use LoiLoScope and its operating environment, read
the LoiLoScope manual available for download at the website.
●●To download the software, the PC must be connected to the Internet.
●●It may take time to download the software in some communication environments.
354
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC
Copying still pictures and motion pictures
Preparations
•• Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on your computer before starting the copying procedure. (→353)
•• Turn on the camera and computer.
1
Connect camera to computer
•• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction,
the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not insert into the wrong
socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.
•• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
TZ100/TZ101
[CHARGE] socket
[Access] (sending data)
•• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable
(supplied) while [Access] is displayed.
TZ80/TZ81
USB connection cable (supplied)
[CHARGE] socket
[Access] (sending data)
•• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable
(supplied) while [Access] is displayed.
USB connection cable (supplied)
2
Use
3
Use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to copy pictures to your computer
355
to select [PC] and press [MENU/SET]
•• If you set the [USB Mode] (→82) to [PC] in the [Setup] menu in advance, the camera will be
automatically connected to the PC without displaying the [USB Mode] selection screen.
•• If you connect the camera to a PC with the [USB Mode] set to [PictBridge(PTP)], a message
may appear on the PC screen. In such a case, close the message and remove the USB
connection cable safely, and then reset the [USB Mode] to [PC].
•• Do not delete or move copied files and folders using Windows Explorer or other browsers.
Otherwise, you will not be able to play back or edit the files using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC
■■For PTP mode
The camera can be connected to your computer even if [USB Mode] (→82) is set to
[PictBridge(PTP)].
••Data can be read only from the card in the PC.
••It may not be possible to import if there are 1,000 or more pictures on the card.
••Motion pictures cannot be played back in the PTP mode.
■■Copying to your computer without using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
You can save pictures to use on your computer by dragging and dropping folders and
files into separate folders on your computer.
••The card of this unit contains the following files (folder structure).
DCIM (Still/motion pictures)
100_PANA (Up to 999 pictures/folder)
Card
●●Windows
Drive (“LUMIX”) is
displayed in [Computer].
●●Mac
Drive (“LUMIX”) is
displayed on the desktop.
Folder number
P1000001.JPG*1
File number
P1000999.JPG
TZ100/TZ101 Colour SpaceP: sRGB
_: AdobeRGB
101_PANA
999_PANA
*2
MISC (DPOF files, Favourite)
PRIVATE
*1.JPG: Still pictures
AVCHD (Motion pictures in AVCHD)
.RW2: Still pictures recorded in RAW file
.MP4: [MP4] Motion Pictures
*2New folders are created in the following cases:
•• When there is a picture with file number 999 inside the folder.
•• When using cards already containing the same folder number (for example, pictures taken with
other cameras, etc.).
•• When recording after performing [No.Reset]. (→85)
●●Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection
cable. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.
●●Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).
●●When the battery begins to run out during communication, a warning beep sounds. Remove the
USB connection cable safely. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.
●●Before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (optional), turn the camera off.
356
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures in
the recorder
Copying by inserting the card into the recorder
You can copy pictures using Panasonic equipment (such as
Blu-ray disc recorders) with support for each file format.
••The method of importing still pictures and motion pictures
recorded in this unit to other devices will vary depending on
the file format (JPEG, RAW, AVCHD, or MP4).
••You cannot copy 4K burst files (MP4 format) with [Aspect Ratio] set to an option other
than [16:9] to hard disk drives, including those of Panasonic recorders compatible with
import of 4K motion pictures. (As of January 2016)
••See the instruction manual for the recorder for details for copying and playing back.
357
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Printing
You can connect directly to a PictBridge-compatible printer for printing.
Preparations
•• Adjust the print quality or other settings on your printer, as needed.
•• Turn on the camera and printer.
1
Connect camera to printer
•• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction,
the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not insert into the wrong
socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.
•• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one. Using cables other than
the above may cause a malfunction.
TZ100/TZ101
[CHARGE] socket
•• [ ]
Do not disconnect the USB connection cable
(supplied) when the cable disconnection icon [ ] is
displayed (may not be displayed with some printers).
USB connection cable (supplied)
TZ80/TZ81
[CHARGE] socket
•• [ ]
Do not disconnect the USB connection cable
(supplied) when the cable disconnection icon [ ] is
displayed (may not be displayed with some printers).
2
3
4
358
Use
USB connection cable (supplied)
to select [PictBridge(PTP)] and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select a picture and press [MENU/SET]
Use
to select [Print start] and press [MENU/SET]
(Print settings (→361))
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Printing
Printing multiple pictures
Multiple pictures are printed at one time.
1
2
3
Press
Use
to select [Multi Print] in step 3 of “Printing” (→358)
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
•• [Multi Select]:
•• [Select All]:
•• [Print Set (DPOF)]:
•• [Favorite]:
Use
Scroll between pictures with
, select pictures to print with
[MENU/SET] (Press [MENU/SET] again to release selection.)
Use to select [OK], and press [MENU/SET]
Print all pictures.
Print pictures selected in [Print Set]. (→298)
Print pictures selected as [Favorite]. (→297)
to select [Print start] and press [MENU/SET]
(Print settings (→361))
●●The group pictures are displayed one by one instead of all pictures at the same time.
●●Disconnect USB connection cable (supplied) after printing.
●●Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).
When the battery begins to run out during communication, a warning beep sounds. Cancel printing
and disconnect USB connection cable (supplied).
●●Before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (optional), turn the camera off.
●●Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection
cable.
●●Some printers can print directly from the camera’s memory card. For details, see the manual for
your printer.
●●An orange “●” displayed during printing indicates an error message.
●●When printing a large number of pictures, the remaining sheets display may differ from the number
of pictures set for printing.
●●Motion pictures, 4K burst files, and pictures recorded with [Post Focus] cannot be printed.
●●Still pictures recorded in a RAW file cannot be printed. (The still pictures recorded in JPEG file
format at the same time as the RAW file can be printed.)
359
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Printing
Printing with date and text
Time and date can be set to be printed on the picture when taking the picture by
activating the [Text Stamp] function in the [Playback] menu. (→291)
■■Printing date without [Text Stamp]
Printing in store:
Only recording date can be printed. Request date printing in store.
••Making [Print Set] (→298) settings on the camera in advance allows settings for
numbers of copies and date printing to be designated before giving the card to the
store.
••You cannot request a store to print the characters entered for [Age] or [Name] of
[Profile Setup] or [Face Recog.], [Travel Date], [Location], and [Title Edit].
Using computer:
Print settings for recording date and text information can be made using
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software (→353).
Using printer:
Recording date can be printed by setting [Print Set] on the camera, or by setting [Print
with Date] (→361) to [ON] when connecting to a printer compatible with date printing.
360
SQW0550
Connecting with other devices
Printing
Making print settings on the camera
Setting options include the number of printed pictures and their size. Make settings before
selecting [Print start].
to select the item and press [MENU/SET]
1 Use
Item
2
Settings
[Print with Date]
[ON] / [OFF]
[Num.of prints]
Set number of pictures (up to 999 pictures)
[Paper Size]
When [
[Page Layout]
[
[
Use
] is selected, the printer settings take priority.
] (printer takes priority) / [
] (1 picture, with border) / [
] (1 picture, no border) /
] (2 pictures) / [
] (4 pictures)
to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]
●●When [Print Set (DPOF)] has been selected, the [Print with Date] and [Num.of prints] items are not
displayed.
●●If the printer does not support date printing, the date cannot be printed on the picture.
●●When setting [Print with Date] to [ON], check the date printing settings on the printer (printer
settings may be prioritised).
●●To print a picture on which text or a date has been stamped, set [Print with Date] to [OFF]. (The
still picture is printed with the date superimposed on it.)
●●In some printers, dates for pictures taken with the aspect ratio set to [1:1] will be printed vertically.
●●Items may not be displayed if incompatible with printer.
●●To print to paper sizes/layouts not supported by this camera, set to [ ] and make settings on the
printer. (Consult your printer’s operating manual.)
●●Even with completed [Print Set] settings, dates may not be printed, depending on the shop or
printer used.
361
SQW0550
Others
Optional accessories
Using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional)
instead of the battery
By using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional), you can record and play
back without worrying about the remaining battery charge.
The optional DC coupler can only be used with the designated Panasonic AC adaptor
(optional).
●●Always use a genuine Panasonic AC adaptor (optional).
●●Also read the AC adaptor and DC coupler operating instructions.
362
SQW0550
Others
TZ100/TZ101
List of monitor/viewfinder displays
••The following images are examples of when the display screen is set to [
] (monitor
style) in the monitor.
••The information displayed, such as histograms, magnifications, and numeric values, are
only for the purpose of reference.
In recording
50p
Recording mode (→49)
1
Custom Set (→127)
[Photo Style] (→129)
Flash Mode (→243)
50p
[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]
(→255)
[Snap Movie] (→262)
Automatic switching between
viewfinder and monitor (→59)
[Peaking] (→172, 215)
[Highlight Shadow] (→133)
[HDR] (→143)/[iHDR] (→92)
[Multi Exp.] (→223)
Electronic shutter (→199)
Overheat indicator
(→186, 384, 386)
[Aspect Ratio]/[Picture Size]
(→139)
Image size (Panorama Shot
Mode) (→109)
Picture effect (Filter)
adjustment display (→118, 131)
EXPS
Types of picture effects (Filter)
(→131)
Card (displayed only during
recording) (→37)
XXmXXs
Elapsed recording time*1
(→251)
Simultaneous recording
indicator (→261)
363
SQW0550
Others
TZ100/TZ101
List of monitor/viewfinder displays
100fps
[Quality] (→140)
AF area (→146, 156, 161)
[High Speed Video] (→125)
Spot metering target (→183)
[Self Timer]*4 (→208)
[Post Focus] (→210)
[AFS/AFF/AFC] (→148)/
AFS AFF AFC MF
MF (→167)
[Silent Mode] (→225)
AEL
[Metering Mode] (→64, 183)
AF Mode (→149)
[Pull Focus] (→264)
[Face Recog.] (→226)
AFL
AE Lock (→173)
AF Lock (→173)
Burst (→202)
[4K PHOTO] (→184)
[Auto Bracket] (→206)
[Self Timer] (→208)
Programme Shift (→97)
2.8
Aperture value (→97)
60
Shutter speed (→97)
Exposure compensation value
(→177)
Brightness (exposure)
(→94, 121)
Remaining battery (→32)
Manual Exposure Assist
(→104)
Macro recording (→165)
ISO sensitivity (→179)
[Level Shot] (→266)
[Stabilizer] (→234)
Jitter alert (→234)
Recording state (Flashes red.)
(→251)/
Focus (Lights green.) (→46)
Focus (Under low illumination)
(→146)
Focus (Starlight AF) (→146)
Wi-Fi connection status
Histogram (→55)
Name*2 (→229)
Travel elapsed days*3 (→77)
Age in years/months*2 (→229)
Location*3 (→77)
Current date/time*3
Travel destination setting*3:
(→76)
Exposure meter (→98)
Zoom (→238)
364
SQW0550
Others
TZ100/TZ101
List of monitor/viewfinder displays
[Dial Guide] (→52)
Touch tab (→61)
White Balance Bracket (→138)
Touch zoom (→240)
White Balance Fine Adjustment
(→137)
Touch Shutter (→63)
[Touch AE] (→64)
White Balance (→134)
[Peaking] (→172)
Colouring (→94)
98
RXXmXXs
Number of recordable
pictures*5 (→39)
Function buttons (→71)
Available recording time*1, *5
(→40)
Colouring (→94)
Defocus control function
(→93, 121)
Brightness (exposure)
(→94, 121)
Type of defocus ([Miniature
Effect]) (→122)
[One Point Color] (→123)
[Sunshine] (→123)
Picture effect (Filter)
adjustment display
(→118, 131)
(→126)
Picture effects ON or OFF
(→131)
Picture effects (Filter)
(→131)
Aperture value (→46)
Shutter speed (→46)
ISO sensitivity (→179)
*1[m] and [s] indicate “minute” and “second”.
*2This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on if the [Profile Setup] setting is
set.
*3This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock and after
switching from Playback Mode to Recording mode.
*4This is displayed during countdown.
*5It is possible to switch the display between the number of recordable pictures and available
recording time with the [Remaining Disp.] setting in the [Custom] menu.
365
SQW0550
Others
TZ100/TZ101
List of monitor/viewfinder displays
In playback
15 pic.
1ST DAY
11 months 20 days
4K Photo (4K burst file) (→184)
Playback Mode (→281)
[Post Focus] (→210)
Protected picture (→299)
[Aspect Ratio]/[Picture Size]
(→139)
Number of prints (→298)
With location information
(→283, 315)
50p
Favourites (→297)
Cable disconnect prohibit icon
(→358)
Motion picture playback
(→270)
Panorama picture playback
(→111)
Continuous playback of burst
picture group (→275)
Save pictures from the 4K
burst file (→190, 194)
[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]
(→255)
[Snap Movie] (→262)
[Quality] (→140)
100fps
[High Speed Video] (→125)
Remaining battery (→32)
1/98
Picture number/Total pictures
Wi-Fi connection status
15 pic.
XXmXXs
Number of group pictures
Motion picture recording time*1
(→270)
Save a picture from pictures
recorded using [Post Focus]
(→214)
Continuous playback of Time
Lapse Shot picture group
(→275)
Continuous playback of stop
motion animation group
(→275)
Text stamped display (→291)
XXmXXs
366
Elapsed playback time*1
SQW0550
Others
TZ100/TZ101
List of monitor/viewfinder displays
Clear Retouch completed icon
(→289)
Acquiring information icon
(→378)
Name*2 (→228, 229)
Location*2 (→77)
Title*2 (→290)
Playback (Motion Pictures)
(→270)
1ST DAY Travel elapsed days (→77)
Upload (Wi-Fi) icon (→330)
Recording information*3
Submenu icon (→276, 330)
[Silent Mode] (→225)
11 months 20 days
Age in years/months
(→228, 229)
Multi Playback (→273)
Delete (→277)
■■Detailed information display
10:00 1.DEC.2016
100-0001
Recording information
[Aspect Ratio]/[Picture Size]
(→139)
[Stabilizer] (→234)
[i.Dynamic]*3 (→142)
[HDR]*4 (→143)/[iHDR]*4 (→92)
[i.Resolution] (→142)
50p
100fps
[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]
(→255)
[High Speed Video] (→125)
[Quality] (→140)
[Color Space]*4 (→145)
4K Photo (4K burst file) (→184)
Recording date/time
World time (→76)
367
[Post Focus] (→210)
100-0001
Folder/File number*3 (→356)
SQW0550
Others
TZ100/TZ101
List of monitor/viewfinder displays
■■Histogram display
R
G
B
Y
1/98
Histogram (→57)
100-0001
1/98
100-0001
Picture number/Total pictures
Folder/File number*3 (→356)
Recording information*3
*1[m] and [s] indicate “minute” and “second”.
*2It is displayed in order of [Title], [Location], [Name] ([Baby1]/[Baby2], [Pet]), [Name] ([Face Recog.]).
*3This is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD].
*4This is not displayed for motion pictures.
368
SQW0550
Others
List of monitor/viewfinder displays
TZ80/TZ81
••The following images are examples of when the display screen is set to [
] (monitor
style) in the monitor.
••The information displayed, such as histograms, magnifications, and numeric values, are
only for the purpose of reference.
In recording
50p
Recording mode (→49)
Simultaneous recording
indicator (→261)
Custom Set (→127)
Automatic switching between
viewfinder and monitor (→59)
[Photo Style] (→129)
[Peaking] (→172, 215)
Flash Mode (→244)
Electronic shutter (→199)
[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]
(→255)
Overheat indicator
(→186, 384, 386)
1
50p
[HDR] (→143)/[iHDR] (→92)
[Snap Movie] (→262)
[Aspect Ratio]/[Picture Size]
(→139)
Image size (Panorama Shot
Mode) (→109)
Picture effect (Filter)
adjustment display (→118, 131)
EXPS
Types of picture effects (Filter)
(→131)
Card (displayed only during
recording) (→37)
XXmXXs
369
Elapsed recording time*1
(→251)
SQW0550
Others
TZ80/TZ81
List of monitor/viewfinder displays
[Quality] (→140)
AF area (→146, 156, 161)
200fps 100fps [High Speed Video] (→125)
Spot metering target (→183)
[Self Timer]*4 (→208)
[Post Focus] (→210)
[AFS/AFF/AFC] (→148)/
AFS AFF AFC MF
MF (→167)
AF Mode (→149)
[Silent Mode] (→225)
AEL
[Metering Mode] (→64, 183)
[Pull Focus] (→264)
[Face Recog.] (→226)
AFL
AF Lock (→175)
Burst (→202)
[4K PHOTO] (→184)
[Auto Bracket] (→206)
[Self Timer] (→208)
Remaining battery (→32)
Macro recording (→165)
[Level Shot] (→266)
AE Lock (→175)
Programme Shift (→97)
3.3
Aperture value (→97)
60
Shutter speed (→97)
Exposure compensation value
(→177)
Brightness (exposure)
(→94, 121)
Manual Exposure Assist
(→104)
ISO sensitivity (→179)
[Stabilizer] (→234)
Jitter alert (→234)
Recording state (Flashes red.)
(→251)/
Focus (Lights green.) (→46)
Focus (Under low illumination)
(→146)
Wi-Fi connection status
Histogram (→55)
Name*2 (→229)
Travel elapsed days*3 (→77)
Age in years/months*2 (→229)
Location*3 (→77)
Current date/time*3
Travel destination setting*3:
(→76)
Exposure meter (→98)
Zoom (→238)
370
SQW0550
Others
TZ80/TZ81
List of monitor/viewfinder displays
[Dial Guide] (→52)
Touch tab (→61)
White Balance Bracket (→138)
Touch zoom (→240)
White Balance Fine Adjustment
(→137)
Touch Shutter (→63)
[Touch AE] (→64)
White Balance (→134)
[Peaking] (→172)
Colouring (→94)
98
RXXmXXs
Number of recordable
pictures*5 (→39)
Function buttons (→71)
Available recording time*1, *5
(→40)
Colouring (→94)
Defocus control function
(→93, 121)
Brightness (exposure)
(→94, 121)
Type of defocus ([Miniature
Effect]) (→122)
[One Point Color] (→123)
[Sunshine] (→123)
Picture effect (Filter)
adjustment display
(→118, 131)
(→126)
Picture effects ON or OFF
(→131)
Picture effects (Filter)
(→131)
Aperture value (→46)
Shutter speed (→46)
ISO sensitivity (→179)
*1[m] and [s] indicate “minute” and “second”.
*2This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on if the [Profile Setup] setting is
set.
*3This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock and after
switching from Playback Mode to Recording mode.
*4This is displayed during countdown.
*5It is possible to switch the display between the number of recordable pictures and available
recording time with the [Remaining Disp.] setting in the [Custom] menu.
371
SQW0550
Others
TZ80/TZ81
List of monitor/viewfinder displays
In playback
15 pic.
1ST DAY
11 months 20 days
4K Photo (4K burst file) (→184)
Playback Mode (→281)
[Post Focus] (→210)
Protected picture (→299)
[Aspect Ratio]/[Picture Size]
(→139)
Number of prints (→298)
With location information
(→283, 315)
50p
Favourites (→297)
Cable disconnect prohibit icon
(→358)
Motion picture playback
(→270)
Panorama picture playback
(→111)
Continuous playback of burst
picture group (→275)
Save pictures from the 4K
burst file (→190, 194)
[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]
(→255)
[Snap Movie] (→262)
[Quality] (→140)
200fps 100fps [High Speed Video] (→125)
Remaining battery (→32)
1/98
Picture number/Total pictures
Wi-Fi connection status
15 pic.
XXmXXs
Number of group pictures
Motion picture recording time*1
(→270)
Save a picture from pictures
recorded using [Post Focus]
(→214)
Continuous playback of Time
Lapse Shot picture group
(→275)
Continuous playback of stop
motion animation group
(→275)
Text stamped display (→291)
XXmXXs
372
Elapsed playback time*1
SQW0550
Others
TZ80/TZ81
List of monitor/viewfinder displays
Clear Retouch completed icon
(→289)
Acquiring information icon
(→378)
Name*2 (→228, 229)
Location*2 (→77)
Title*2 (→290)
Playback (Motion Pictures)
(→270)
1ST DAY Travel elapsed days (→77)
Upload (Wi-Fi) icon (→330)
Recording information*3
Submenu icon (→276, 330)
[Silent Mode] (→225)
11 months 20 days
Age in years/months
(→228, 229)
Multi Playback (→273)
Delete (→277)
■■Detailed information display
10:00 1.DEC.2016
100-0001
Recording information
[Aspect Ratio]/[Picture Size]
(→139)
[Stabilizer] (→234)
[i.Dynamic]*3 (→142)
[HDR]*4 (→143)/[iHDR]*4 (→92)
[i.Resolution] (→142)
50p
[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]
(→255)
200fps 100fps [High Speed Video] (→125)
[Quality] (→140)
4K Photo (4K burst file) (→184)
[Post Focus] (→210)
Recording date/time
World time (→76)
373
100-0001
Folder/File number*3 (→356)
SQW0550
Others
TZ80/TZ81
List of monitor/viewfinder displays
■■Histogram display
R
G
B
Y
1/98
Histogram (→57)
100-0001
1/98
100-0001
Picture number/Total pictures
Folder/File number*3 (→356)
Recording information*3
*1[m] and [s] indicate “minute” and “second”.
*2It is displayed in order of [Title], [Location], [Name] ([Baby1]/[Baby2], [Pet]), [Name] ([Face Recog.]).
*3This is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD].
*4This is not displayed for motion pictures.
374
SQW0550
Others
Message displays
The following explains the meaning of major messages displayed on the monitor or
viewfinder, and how to respond to them.
■■Memory cards
[Memory Card Error]
[Format this card?]
•• Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera. (→38)
•• Try with a different card.
[Read Error] / [Write Error]
[Please check the card]
•• Check whether card has been inserted correctly (→35, 36).
•• Turn off the camera and remove the card. Reinsert the card and turn the camera on again.
•• Try with a different card.
[Motion recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of the card]
•• The speed class of a required card varies depending on [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion
picture. 4K photo recording requires a card that meets a particular speed class rating. Use a card
that meets the rating. Be sure to use a card of the recommended speed class. For details, refer to
“About motion picture/4K photo recording and speed class ratings” (→37).
•• If recording stops even when using a card of the recommended speed class (→37), the data writing
speed has dropped. If this happens, we recommend backing up the data on the memory card and
formatting it (→38). Depending on the type of the card, recording may stop in the middle.
[Memory Card Error]
[This memory card cannot be used]
•• Use a compatible card. (→37)
[Cannot record due to incompatible format(NTSC/PAL) data on this card.]
•• Format the card after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (→38)
•• Insert a different card.
375
SQW0550
Others
Message displays
■■Battery
[This battery cannot be used]
•• Use a genuine Panasonic battery. Consult the dealer or your nearest Service Centre if display still
remains.
•• Wipe any dirt away from the battery terminal.
■■Wi-Fi function
[Failed to connect wireless access point] / [Connection failed] / [No destination found]
•• Check following regarding the wireless access point.
–– The wireless access point information set on this unit is wrong. Check the authentication type,
encryption type, and encryption key. (→339)
–– Power of the wireless access point is not turned on.
–– Setting of the wireless access point is not supported by this unit.
•• Check the network setting of the destination.
•• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access point. Check other
devices that are connected to the wireless access point and devices that use the 2.4 GHz band.
[No picture to send]
•• This is displayed when there is no image to transmit due to the restriction of the destination.
Check the file type of the image to transmit. (→319)
[Connection failed. Please retry in a few minutes.] / [Network disconnected. Transfer stopped.]
•• Radio waves from the wireless access point are getting weak. Perform the connection closer to the
wireless access point.
•• There is no reply from the server or it has exceeded the communication processing time. Try again
after a while.
•• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically disconnected after
specific time has passed. Reconnect the connection again.
[Upload to the Cloud Folder is available after Cloud Sync settings have been set up on
downloadable devices such as PCs or smartphones.]
•• Devices that download images from a cloud folder are not registered.
•• Perform Cloud Sync setting. Configure the settings on a PC with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (→353) or
on a smartphone with “Image App”. For details on [Cloud Sync. Service], refer to (→331).
376
SQW0550
Others
Message displays
[Connection failed]
•• Check following regarding the smartphones you intend to connect.
→→The smartphone does not operate.
→→Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to this camera.
→→There is no free storage space on the smartphone.
[Login failed. Please check Login ID and Password.]
•• Login ID or password for the “LUMIX CLUB” is not correct. Please enter it again. If you have
forgotten the login ID or the password, there is information in the login screen of the “LUMIX CLUB”
website.
[Some files cannot be sent because of destination limit] /
[Transfer completed. Some files are left because of destination limit.]
•• Check the file format of the image to send. (→319)
•• Sending motion pictures may fail if the file size is too large. Split the motion picture using [Video
Divide]. (→292)
[Unavailable. Please set Login settings on LUMIX CLUB web site.]
•• Login to the “LUMIX CLUB” from your smartphone or PC, and set the login details of the
destination WEB service.
[Both picture and video sharing service cannot be selected together]
•• WEB services designed only for pictures, and WEB services designed only for motion pictures
cannot be selected at the same time. Deselect one of the services.
[Cannot get IP address. Please set wireless AP’s IP address setting to DHCP.]
•• Turn on DHCP settings of the IP address of the connected wireless access points.
[Cannot connect to server]
•• If a message is displaying asking to update the root certificate, agree to update the root certificate.
377
SQW0550
Others
Message displays
■■Others
[This picture is protected]
•• Delete the picture after cancelling the protect setting (→299).
[Some pictures cannot be deleted]
[This picture cannot be deleted]
•• Non-DCF pictures (→269) cannot be deleted. Save needed data on a computer or other device,
and then use [Format] on the camera. (→38)
[Cannot be set on this picture]
•• [Print Set], [Title Edit], [Text Stamp], and other functions cannot be used for pictures that are not
compliant with the DCF standard (→269).
[Please turn camera off and then on again]
[System Error]
•• Turn the camera on again. (Consult the dealer or your nearest Service Centre if display still
remains.)
[A folder cannot be created]
•• Folder numbers in use have reached 999. Save needed data on a computer or other device, and
then use [Format] on the camera (→38). Folder number is reset to 100 when performing [No.Reset]
(→85).
[Editing operation cannot proceed as another operation is taking place.]
•• If you display the playback screen when the camera contains many picture files, the acquiring
] or [
] may be displayed for a long time. While either one
information icon [
of these icons is displayed, some of the [Playback] menus cannot be used. You cannot create
pictures from motion pictures or play back 4K burst files recorded with the 4K Photo function. If you
have been playing back a motion picture, stop the playback and wait for while until the message
disappears.
When the camera is turned off while information is being acquired, only the pictures whose
information has been acquired up to that time are saved as a group. When the camera is turned on
again, the camera once again begins acquiring information of the remaining pictures in the group.
378
SQW0550
Others
Menu list
[Rec]
••The [Photo Style], [Filter Settings], [Sensitivity], [AF Mode], [AFS/AFF/AFC],
[Metering Mode], TZ100/TZ101 [Highlight Shadow], [i.Dynamic], [i.Resolution], [Diffraction
Compensation], [i.Zoom] and [Digital Zoom] menu items are common for both [Rec] and
[Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same
name in other menu will also be changed automatically.
[Photo Style]
→129
[Time Lapse Shot]
→216
[Filter Settings]
→131
[Stop Motion Animation]
→219
[Aspect Ratio]
→139
[Panorama Settings]
→110
[Picture Size]
→139
[Shutter Type]
→199
[Quality]
→140
[Sensitivity]
→179
TZ80/TZ81
[White Balance]
→134
TZ100/TZ101
[Flash]
TZ80/TZ81
[Flash Adjust.]
→243
→250
[AF Mode]
→149
[Red-Eye Removal]
→245
[AFS/AFF/AFC]
→148
[ISO Limit Set]
→181
[Metering Mode]
→183
[ISO Increments]
→181
[Burst Rate]
→202
[Extended ISO]
→182
[4K PHOTO]
→184
[Auto Bracket]
→206
[Self Timer]
→208
TZ100/TZ101
[Highlight Shadow]
→133
[i.Dynamic]
→142
[i.Resolution]
→142
[Post Focus]
→210
[iHandheld Night Shot]
→91
[iHDR]
→92
[HDR]
→143
TZ100/TZ101
[Multi Exp.]
379
TZ100/TZ101
[Long Shtr NR]
→144
[Diffraction Compensation]
→144
[i.Zoom]
→237
[Digital Zoom]
→238
TZ100/TZ101
[Color Space]
[Stabilizer]
→145
→234
[Face Recog.]
→226
[Profile Setup]
→229
→223
SQW0550
Others
Menu list
[Motion Picture]
••The [Photo Style], [Filter Settings], [Sensitivity], [AF Mode], [AFS/AFF/AFC],
[Metering Mode], TZ100/TZ101 [Highlight Shadow], [i.Dynamic], [i.Resolution], [Diffraction
Compensation], [i.Zoom] and [Digital Zoom] menu items are common for both [Rec] and
[Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same
name in other menu will also be changed automatically.
For details, refer to the corresponding item of the [Rec] menu.
[4K Live Cropping]
→258
[Continuous AF]
→257
[Snap Movie]
→262
[Level Shot]
→266
[Rec Format]
→255
[Flkr Decrease]
→266
[Rec Quality]
→255
[Silent Operation]
→126
[Exposure Mode]
→124
[Wind Noise Canceller]
→267
[High Speed Video]
→125
[Zoom Mic]
→267
380
SQW0550
Others
Menu list
[Custom]
[Cust.Set Mem.]
→127
[Highlight]
→57
[Silent Mode]
→225
[Zebra Pattern]
→230
[AF/AE Lock]
→173
→175
[Monochrome Live View]
→231
[AF/AE Lock Hold]
→173
→175
[Constant Preview]
[Shutter AF]
→163
[Half Press Release]
→163
[Quick AF]
→163
[Eye Sensor AF]
→60
TZ100/TZ101
[Pinpoint AF Time]
TZ100/TZ101
[Pinpoint AF Display]
→160
→160
TZ100/TZ101
→105
[Expo.Meter]
→98
[Dial Guide]
→52
[LVF Disp.Style]
→53
→54
[Monitor Disp. Style]
→53
→54
[Rec Area]
→252
[Remaining Disp.]
→41
[Auto Review]
→47
[AF Assist Lamp]
→164
[Fn Button Set]
→70
[Direct Focus Area]
→156
→169
[Zoom lever]
→239
[Focus/Release Priority]
→164
[Zoom Resume]
→239
[AF+MF]
→164
[MF Assist]
→171
[MF Assist Display]
→169
[MF Guide]
[Peaking]
TZ100/TZ101
[Q.MENU]
→69
[Ring/Dial Set]
→74
→75
→171
[Eye Sensor]
→60
→172
[Touch Settings]
→61
[Histogram]
→55
[Touch Scroll]
→268
[Guide Line]
→55
[Menu Guide]
→116
381
SQW0550
Others
Menu list
[Setup]
[Online Manual]
→76
[Menu Resume]
→84
[Clock Set]
→42
[Menu Background]
→84
[World Time]
→76
[Menu Information]
→84
[Travel Date]
→77
[Language]
→84
[Wi-Fi]
→344
[Version Disp.]
→85
[Beep]
→78
[Exposure Comp. Reset]
→85
[Live View Mode]
→78
[Self Timer Auto Off]
→85
[Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder]
→79
[No.Reset]
→85
[Monitor Luminance]
→80
[Reset]
→86
[Economy]
→81
[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]
→86
[USB Mode]
→82
[Demo Mode]
→86
[TV Connection]
→82
[Format]
→38
[Slide Show]
→280
[Stop Motion Video]
→293
[Playback Mode]
→281
[Resize]
→294
[Location Logging]
→283
[Cropping]
→295
[Rotate]
→296
[Rotate Disp.]
→296
[Playback]
TZ100/TZ101
[RAW Processing]
→284
[Light Composition]
→287
→297
[Clear Retouch]
[Favorite]
→289
→298
[Title Edit]
[Print Set]
→290
→299
[Text Stamp]
[Protect]
→291
→299
[Video Divide]
[Face Rec Edit]
→292
→300
[Time Lapse Video]
[Picture Sort]
→293
382
SQW0550
Others
Q&A
Troubleshooting
Try checking these items (→383 - 397) first.
If the problem persists,
Performing [Reset] in the [Setup] menu may resolve the issue (→86). (Note that
except for some items such as [Clock Set], all settings are returned to their values at
the time of purchase.)
Also, see the Panasonic support site for the latest support information.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This site is available in English only.)
■■Battery, power
The charging lamp blinks.
•• Charging is being performed in a place with extremely high or low temperature.
→→Reconnect the USB connection cable (supplied) and retry charging in a place where ambient
temperature is 10 °C to 30 °C (50 °F to 86 °F) (temperature conditions also apply to the battery
itself).
•• Charging is not possible if the power supply capacity of the computer is low.
Camera does not work even if the camera is turned on. Camera switches off as soon as the
camera is turned on.
•• Battery needs recharging.
→→Turn the camera off frequently by using the [Economy] etc. (→81)
This unit is turned off automatically.
•• [Economy] is activated. (→81)
•• The linked operation of VIERA Link (HDMI) is enabled.
→→If you are not using VIERA Link (HDMI), set [VIERA Link] to [OFF]. (→84)
Card/battery door does not close.
•• Insert the battery securely all the way in. (→26, 27)
The battery runs down quickly.
] ([4K Pre-Burst]).
•• [4K PHOTO] is set to [
] ([4K Pre-Burst]) has been selected, the battery drains faster.
→→When [
] ([4K Pre-Burst]) only when recording.
Select [
•• The Wi-Fi connection has been on for a long time.
→→The battery is used up faster with a Wi-Fi connection. Turn off the camera as often as possible
using [Economy] (→81) or other methods.
383
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
■■Recording
Cannot record pictures. The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is
pressed.
•• [4K PHOTO] is set to [
] ([4K Pre-Burst]).
] ([4K Pre-Burst]), the camera temperature
→→When [4K PHOTO] in the [Rec] menu is set to [
], switch to [ ] ([4K Burst]) and stop the
rises. In some cases, the camera may display [
recording to protect itself. Wait until the camera cools down.
•• Focus is not aligned.
→→When [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [FOCUS], the camera will not record until proper
focusing is achieved. (→164)
Recorded pictures look white.
•• Lens is dirty (fingerprints, etc.).
→→Turn the camera off and clean the lens surface with a soft dry cloth.
Recorded pictures are too bright/too dark.
•• Adjust the exposure (→177).
•• AE Lock (→173, 175) is set inappropriately.
Some pictures are taken when I press the shutter button just once.
•• Cancel the following settings:
–– [Simultaneous record w/o filter] (→132)
–– White Balance Bracket (→138)
] of the self-timer (→201)
–– [Burst]/[Auto Bracket]/[
Focus not aligned correctly.
•• Subject outside of focus range. (→46)
•• Caused by jitter or subject movement. (→234)
•• [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [RELEASE]. (→164)
•• [Shutter AF] is set to [OFF]. (→163)
•• AF Lock (→173, 175) is set inappropriately.
•• If there are fingerprints or dirt on the lens, the focus may be set to the lens and not the subject.
(When the Scene Guide Mode is set to [Soft Image of a Flower], and during macro recording)
Recorded pictures are blurred. The stabiliser function ineffective.
•• Shutter speed is slower in dark locations and the stabiliser function is less effective.
→→Hold camera firmly with both hands, keeping arms close to body.
→→Use a tripod and the self-timer when using a slower shutter speed (→208).
•• If you take a picture of a moving subject using the electronic shutter, the subject in the picture may
be skewed in some cases. (→199)
Taking pictures using White Balance Bracket is not possible.
•• Is there any memory remaining on the card?
384
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
Recorded pictures appear coarse, or there is interference.
•• We recommend trying the following methods.
→→Lower ISO sensitivity (→179).
→→Take pictures in brighter locations.
→→Either adjust [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to a higher setting or set each item other than
[Noise Reduction] to a lower setting. (→130)
→→ TZ100/TZ101
Set [Long Shtr NR] to [ON]. (→144)
→→Change the settings of [Picture Size] (→139) and [Quality] (→140).
•• When Digital Zoom is used, the picture quality will become lower if you zoom in higher.
Subject appears skewed in pictures.
•• If you take a picture of a moving subject in the electronic shutter mode, motion picture recording
mode, or 4K photo recording mode, the subject in the picture may be skewed in some cases.
This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. This is not a
malfunction.
Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent lighting and LED lighting
fixture.
•• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup
sensors. This is not a malfunction.
•• If you are taking still pictures using the electronic shutter, the striping may be
reduced by setting a slower shutter speed. (→102)
•• When noticeable flicker or striping is seen under lighting such as a fluorescent
or LED lighting fixture in the motion picture recording mode, you can reduce
the flicker or striping by setting up [Flkr Decrease] (→266) and fixing the
shutter speed. It is possible to select a shutter speed from [1/50], [1/60],
[1/100], or [1/120]. You can set the shutter speed manually in the Creative
Video Mode. (→124)
Brightness or colouring of recorded picture different from real life.
•• When recording under fluorescent or LED lighting fixture etc., increasing the shutter speed may
introduce slight changes to brightness and colour. These are a result of the characteristics of the
light source and do not indicate a malfunction.
•• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under fluorescent lighting, LED
lighting fixture, mercury lamp, sodium lighting etc., the colours and screen brightness may change
or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.
Subject cannot be locked. (AF tracking not possible)
•• Set the AF area to the distinctive colour of the subject if there is a part that is different from the
surrounding colour. (→151)
Low or inaudible operating sound.
•• The speaker is blocked.
385
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
Panorama picture recording stops before finishing.
•• If the pan motion of the camera is too slow, the camera assumes that the operation has been
aborted and stops recording.
•• If the pan motion of the camera is too shaky when it is moved toward the recording direction, the
camera stops recording.
4K photo recording stops before finishing.
•• When the ambient temperature is high or recording with [ ] ([4K Burst]) or [
of the 4K Photo function is performed continuously, the camera may display [
recording to protect itself. Wait until the camera cools down.
] ([4K Burst(S/S)])
] and stop the
■■Motion Picture
Cannot record motion pictures.
•• When a large capacity card is used, you may not be able to take a picture for a while after you turn
on the camera.
Motion picture recording stops midway.
•• When the ambient temperature is high or motion picture is recorded continuously, the camera may
] and stop the recording to protect itself. Wait until the camera cools down.
display [
•• The speed class of a required card varies depending on [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion
picture. Be sure to use a card of the recommended speed class. For details, refer to “About motion
picture/4K photo recording and speed class ratings” (→37).
•• If recording stops even when using a card of the recommended speed class, the data writing
speed has dropped. If this happens, we recommend backing up the data on the memory card and
formatting it (→38).
The screen turns dark while recording motion pictures.
•• While motion pictures are being recorded, the screen may turn dark as time passes in order to slow
battery consumption. This condition, however, will not affect the recorded motion picture.
The screen turns momentarily black or noise is recorded.
•• While motion pictures are being recorded, the screen may momentarily turn black or noise may be
recorded due to static electricity or strong electromagnetic waves (radio transmitters, high-voltage
lines, etc.) under some environmental conditions.
Sometimes focus adjustment with Auto Focus mode is difficult while recording 4K motion
pictures.
•• This may occur when taking a picture by reducing the Auto Focus speed in order to adjust the
focus at high precision. This is not a malfunction.
386
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
A noise, such as a clicking or buzzing noise, is recorded on a motion picture. Audio is
recorded at low volumes.
•• With recording in a quiet environment, the sound of aperture, focus and other actions may be
recorded in motion pictures. This is not a malfunction. The focus operation during recording of
motion pictures can be set to [OFF] in [Continuous AF] (→257).
•• Use of [Silent Operation] is recommended if you are concerned about operational sounds. (→126)
•• If you block the microphone with your fingers while motion pictures are being recorded, the audio
may be recorded at a low volume or may not be recorded at all. In this case, the camera may pick
up the lens operating sounds more easily.
Operating sounds are recorded at the end of the motion picture recording.
•• If the operation sound of the motion picture button pressed to end recording bothers you, try the
following:
→→Record the motion picture about three seconds longer, and then divide the last part of the motion
picture using [Video Divide] (→292) in the [Playback] menu.
■■Flash
No flash emitted.
•• The flash becomes unavailable in the following cases.
–– TZ100/TZ101
The flash is closed. (→241)
–– TZ80/TZ81
Flash set to [
] (Forced Flash Off). (→244)
•• Set [Shutter Type] to [AUTO] or [MSHTR]. (→199)
•• Set [Silent Mode] to [OFF]. (→225)
The flash fires twice.
•• The flash fires twice. When red-eye reduction (→243, 244) is set, the firing interval will be longer.
Make sure that the subject does not move until the second firing is completed.
387
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
■■Monitor/viewfinder
The monitor display momentarily turns off.
•• When the monitor display automatically switches between finder and monitor (→59), the action of
the eye sensor causes automatic switching of the display to the finder if the finder gets close to the
user’s eye or an object.
The monitor/viewfinder is turned off although the camera is turned on.
•• If no operations are performed during the set time period [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] (→81) is activated,
and the monitor/viewfinder turns off.
•• When a hand or an object is close to the eye sensor, the monitor display mode could be switched
to viewfinder display mode. (→59)
The screen is too bright/too dark.
•• Check [Monitor Luminance] setting. (→80)
•• Use [Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder] to adjust the brightness of the screen. (→79)
It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change significantly for an
instant.
•• This occurs due to the aperture of the lens changing when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or
when the brightness of the subject changes. This is not a malfunction.
The screen flickers indoors.
•• The screen may flicker for a few seconds after turning on. This is an operation to correct flicker
caused by lighting such as fluorescent lights, LED lights, etc. and is not a malfunction.
Pictures do not show on the monitor.
•• Viewfinder display mode is activated.
→→Press the [LVF] button to switch to the monitor display mode. (→58)
•• Monitor is turned off.
→→Press the [DISP.] button to switch the display information. (→53)
Cannot switch between the monitor and viewfinder when pressing [LVF] button.
•• When it is connected to a computer or printer, the camera can display pictures on the monitor only.
Black, white, red, blue and green dots appear on the Monitor/Viewfinder.
•• This is not a fault, and will not be recorded on the actual pictures.
Noise appears on the monitor/viewfinder.
•• In dark places, noise may appear to maintain the brightness of the monitor/viewfinder.
388
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
■■Playback
The picture being played back is not rotated, or is rotated in an unexpected direction, when
displayed.
•• When [Rotate Disp.] is set to [OFF], the picture is displayed without changing its orientation.
(→296)
•• You can rotate pictures with the [Rotate] function. (→296)
Cannot view pictures. There are no recorded pictures.
•• A card is not inserted in the camera.
•• Has the file name of the picture been changed on a computer? If so, it cannot be played back on
the camera.
→→It is recommended to use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software (→353) to write pictures from PC
to card.
•• Set [Playback Mode] to [Normal Play]. (→281)
Folder/file number displayed as [-]. Picture is black.
•• Is this a non-standard picture, a picture which has been edited using a PC or a picture which was
taken by another device?
•• Battery removed immediately after picture taken, or picture taken with low battery.
→→Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera. (→38)
Playback and operation sounds are too low.
•• The speaker is blocked. (→20, 21)
Incorrect date displayed in Calendar Search.
•• Is the clock in the camera set properly? (→42)
•• Pictures edited on a PC or pictures recorded on other cameras might display a different date to the
recorded date during Calendar Playback.
White round spots like soap bubbles appear on the recorded picture.
•• If you take a picture with the flash in a dark place or indoors, white round spots
may appear on the picture caused by the flash reflecting particles of dust in the
air. This is not a fault.
[Thumbnail is displayed] is shown on the screen.
•• The pictures may have been recorded on another device. If so, they may be displayed with poor
picture quality.
389
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
Red areas in pictures appear blackened.
•• TZ100/TZ101
When the digital red-eye correction ([
], [
]) is operating, red areas may be blackened.
→→We recommend closing the built-in flash, setting the flash mode to [ ], or turning [Red-Eye
Removal] to [OFF] before recording. (→245)
•• TZ80/TZ81
When the digital red-eye correction ([
], [
], [
]) is operating, red areas may be
blackened.
]/[ ] or [Red-Eye Removal] to [OFF] before
→→We recommend setting the flash mode to [
recording. (→245)
Motion pictures taken with this camera cannot be played in other cameras.
•• Even if a motion picture is played back on a compatible device, it may have bad picture quality or
sound quality upon playback, or it may not be played back. Also, the recording information may not
be displayed correctly.
390
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
■■Wi-Fi function
It cannot connect to the wireless LAN. Radio waves get disconnected. Wireless access point
is not displayed.
General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection
•• Use within the communication range of the wireless LAN network.
•• Is any device, such as microwave oven, cordless phone, etc., that uses 2.4 GHz frequency
operated nearby?
→→Radio waves may get interrupted when used simultaneously. Use them sufficiently away from
the device.
•• When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or the
connection may be disrupted. (A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
•• When this unit is placed on a metal table or shelf, the connection may not be established easily.
Use the camera away from metal surfaces.
About a wireless access point
•• Check if the wireless access point to connect is in operating state.
•• The camera may not display or connect to a wireless access point depending on the radio wave
condition.
→→Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point.
→→Remove the obstacles between this unit and the wireless access point.
→→Change the direction of this unit.
→→Move the location or change the angle of the wireless access point.
→→Perform the [Manual Input]. (→340)
•• It may not display even if the radio waves exist depending on the setting of the wireless access
point.
•• Is the network SSID of the wireless access point set not to broadcast?
→→It may not be detected when it is set not to broadcast. Enter and set the network SSID. (→339)
Alternatively, set the network SSID of the wireless access point to broadcast.
•• Connection types and security setting methods are different depending on the wireless access
point.
→→Refer to the operating instructions of the wireless access point.
•• Is the 5 GHz/2.4 GHz switchable wireless access point connected to other equipment using the
5 GHz band?
→→The use of a wireless access point that can use 5 GHz/2.4 GHz simultaneously is
recommended. It cannot be used simultaneously with this camera if it is not compatible.
391
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
It takes long time every time to connect to a smartphone.
•• It may take longer time to connect depending on the Wi-Fi connection setting of the smartphone,
but it is not a malfunction.
This unit is not displayed in the Wi-Fi setting screen of the smartphone.
•• Try switching the ON/OFF of the Wi-Fi function in the Wi-Fi settings of the smartphone.
I have forgotten the login ID or password for the “LUMIX CLUB”.
•• Check the information in the login screen of “LUMIX CLUB”.
http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
I do not have a wireless access point at my home, but I would like to perform service user
registration of the “LUMIX CLUB”.
•• Service user registration for the “LUMIX CLUB” is not possible in the environment without a
wireless access point.
The camera cannot be connected to Mac computer/Windows PC via Wi-Fi connection.
→→Please confirm login name and password are correctly typed.
→→When the system time of Mac computer or Windows PC connected to a camera differs severely
from that of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the computer or PC in some OSs.
Please confirm clock set and world time of the camera matches with time, date and time zone in
Windows PC or Mac computer. When both settings do not match severely, please match them.
I am having a problem connecting to my Windows 8 PC. The user name and password are not
recognised.
•• Depending on the OS version, on Windows 8, for example, there are two types of user account
(local account/Microsoft account).
→→Be sure to set the local account and use the user name and password for the local account.
392
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
The Wi-Fi connection is not recognising my PC.
•• By default, the Wi-Fi connection uses the default workgroup name of “WORKGROUP”. If the name
of the workgroup has been changed, it will not be recognised.
→→Select [PC Connection] then [Change Workgroup Name] in the [Wi-Fi Setup] to change the
workgroup name to match that of your PC. (→344)
Pictures cannot be transmitted to the computer.
•• If a firewall is enabled by the OS or security software, this unit may be unable to connect to the
computer.
Images cannot be transmitted to the WEB service.
•• Confirm that the login information (login ID/user name/email address/password) is correct.
•• WEB service server or the network may be busy.
→→Try again after a while.
→→Check the site of the WEB service you are sending the image to.
It takes time to transmit an image to the WEB service.
•• Is the size of the image too large?
→→Transmit after dividing the motion picture with [Video Divide] (→292).
→→Reduce the image size at [Size] (→321), and then send.
•• It may take longer time to transmit when distance to the wireless access point is far.
→→Transmit closer to the wireless access point.
The image that was supposed to have uploaded to the WEB service is not there.
•• Upload may not complete when it is disconnected while transmitting the image.
•• It may take some time after uploading the image to be reflected in the WEB service depending on
the status of the server.
→→Wait for a while and try again.
•• You can check the transmission status on the WEB service link settings by logging into “LUMIX
CLUB”.
I would like to return the image in the WEB service to the camera.
•• The images in the WEB Service cannot be saved (downloaded) to this unit. Do not delete the
uploaded images, and make a backup of them.
393
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
I cannot display or delete the images uploaded to the WEB service by this unit.
•• The images uploaded to the WEB service cannot be displayed or deleted by this unit.
→→Perform the task using a smartphone or a PC.
Your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password were deleted after sending the camera in to be
repaired.
•• The settings stored in the camera may be deleted depending on the type of repair.
→→Always make a copy of important settings.
Transmission of the image fails midway. There is an image that could not be transmitted.
•• Image cannot be transmitted when the battery indicator is flashing red.
•• Is the size of the image too large?
→→Divide the motion picture using [Video Divide] (→292).
→→Reduce the image size at [Size] (→321), and then send.
•• File format of the picture that can be sent differs depending on the destination. (→319)
•• Capacity or number of images in the WEB service is full.
→→Login to “LUMIX CLUB”, and check the status of the destination on the WEB service link
settings.
I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.
→→Execute the [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu. (→86)
However, the information you have set on the [Wi-Fi Setup] will be reset.
I cannot send images to an AV device.
•• Sending may fail depending on the operational status of the AV device. Also, sending may take a
while.
394
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
■■TV, computer, printer
No image appears on TV. Image blurred or not coloured.
•• Not connected correctly (→348).
•• The television has not been switched to auxiliary input.
The display on the TV and on the camera do not match.
•• Aspect ratio may be incorrect or edges may be cut off with certain televisions.
Cannot play motion pictures on TV.
•• Card is inserted into TV.
→→Connect with HDMI micro cable and play on camera (→348).
No sound is output from the camera speaker.
•• When the HDMI micro cable is connected to the camera, no sound is output from the camera.
VIERA Link (HDMI) is not working.
•• Check that the HDMI micro cable is fully inserted. (→348)
•• Is the camera’s [VIERA Link] setting set to [ON]? (→84)
→→The input setting may not be able to be changed automatically with certain television HDMI
sockets. In this case, please change the input setting with your television’s remote control
(consult your television’s operating instructions for details).
→→Check the VIERA Link (HDMI) settings on the device you are connecting to.
→→Turn the camera off and on again.
→→Turn the “VIERA Link control (HDMI device control)” setting on your television (VIERA) to off and
then to on again. (Consult your VIERA’s operating instructions for details.)
Cannot communicate with the computer.
•• Check whether computer has recognised camera (→355).
→→Set [USB Mode] to [PC] (→82).
→→Turn the camera off and then on again.
395
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
Computer does not recognise card.
•• Disconnect USB connection cable (supplied) and reconnect with card in place.
•• If there are two or more USB terminal on a single PC, try connecting the USB connection cable to
another USB terminal.
Computer does not recognise card. (When using an SDXC Memory Card)
•• Check whether your computer is compatible with SDXC Memory Cards.
http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html
•• A message prompting you to format the card may appear when you connect it. Do not format the
card.
•• If the [Access] indicator on the screen does not go off, turn the camera off before disconnecting the
USB connection cable.
Cannot print when connecting to printer.
•• Printer not compatible with PictBridge.
•• Set [USB Mode] to [PictBridge(PTP)] (→82, 358).
The edges of pictures are cut off when printing.
•• Release any trimming or edgeless printing settings on printer before printing.
•• The aspect ratio of pictures is different from that of paper used for printing.
→→If printing in shop, check if 16:9 sizes can be printed.
Cannot print panorama pictures properly.
•• The aspect ratio of panorama pictures is different from that of regular still pictures, and some
panorama pictures may not be printed correctly.
→→Use a printer with support for panorama pictures.
→→We recommend adjusting the size of a picture in accordance with print paper using the
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software (→353).
396
SQW0550
Others
Q&A Troubleshooting
■■Others
The lens makes a clicking noise.
•• When the camera is turned on or off, the lens is moved, or an aperture operation is performed,
such a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.
•• When the brightness changes after a zooming operation or moving the camera, the lens may make
a noise while adjusting the aperture. This is not a malfunction.
Zooming stops instantaneously.
•• When using the Extra Optical Zoom, the zooming action will stop temporarily. This is not a
malfunction.
Red lamp illuminated when pressing shutter button halfway in dark locations.
•• [AF Assist Lamp] is set to [ON] (→164).
AF Assist Lamp is not illuminated.
•• [AF Assist Lamp] is set to [OFF] (→164).
•• Not illuminated in bright locations.
Part of a picture flashes black and white.
•• [Highlight] is set to [ON]. (→57)
Camera is hot.
•• Camera may become a little warm during use, but this does not affect performance or quality.
Clock is incorrect.
•• If you do not use the camera for a long time, the clock may be reset.
→→Reset the clock (→43).
When using zoom, picture becomes slightly warped and the edges of the subject become
coloured.
•• Pictures may be slightly warped or coloured around the edges, depending on the zoom ratio, but
this is not a fault.
File numbers are not recorded in sequence.
•• If you perform an operation after performing a specific operation, the picture may be saved in a
folder with a different folder number than the previous folder number.
File numbers have jumped backwards.
•• If you insert or remove the battery before turning off the camera, the folder and file numbers for the
pictures taken will not be stored in the memory. Therefore, when the camera is turned on again and
pictures are taken, they may be stored under file numbers which should have been assigned to
previous pictures.
397
SQW0550
Others
Usage cautions and notes
When in use
●●Camera may become warm if used for long periods of time, but this is not a fault.
●●Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as
microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
••If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may
be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
••Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely
affecting the pictures and/or sound.
••Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic
fields created by speakers or large motors.
••Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures
and/or sound.
••If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning
properly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor (supplied)/
AC adaptor (optional). Then reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this
unit on.
Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.
••If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/
or sound may be adversely affected.
●●Do not extend the supplied cord or cable.
●●Do not allow camera to come into contact with pesticides or volatile substances (can
cause surface damage or coating to peel).
●●TZ100/TZ101
Do not keep objects that may be influenced magnetically close to the speaker.
••Magnetised objects such as bank cards, commuter passes, watches, may be
adversely affected by the magnetic influence of the speaker.
●●Never leave the camera and the battery in a car or on a car hood in the summer.
Doing so may cause leakage of the battery electrolyte, overheating, fire or a battery
explosion due to the high temperature.
398
SQW0550
Others
Usage cautions and notes
Caring for your camera
To clean your camera, remove the battery, the DC coupler (optional) or a card, or
disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
●●Use a damp cloth to remove stubborn stains, before wiping with a dry cloth.
●●Do not use benzine, thinners, alcohol, or kitchen detergent, as these may damage the
outer casing and finish of the camera.
●●If using a chemically-treated cloth, read the supplied instructions carefully.
●●Do not touch the lens barrier.
TZ80/TZ81
TZ100/TZ101
Lens barrier
When not using for a while
●●Turn off the camera before removing battery and card (ensure that battery is removed
to prevent damage through over-discharge).
●●Do not leave in contact with rubber or plastic bags.
●●Store together with a drying agent (silica gel) if leaving in drawer, etc. Store batteries in
cool (15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F)) places with low humidity (40%RH to 60%RH) and
no major temperature changes.
●●Charge battery once per year and use completely before storing again.
●●Check all the parts before taking pictures when you have not used the camera for a
long period of time.
Monitor/viewfinder
●●Do not press hard on the monitor. This may cause uneven display and damage the
monitor.
●●In cold climates or other situations when the camera becomes cold, the monitor or
the viewfinder may appear slightly darker than normal immediately after the camera is
turned on. Normal brightness will return once the internal components have warmed up.
The monitor and viewfinder are made with extremely high precision technology.
However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or green) on the screen.
This is not a malfunction. The monitor and viewfinder screens are controlled with
extremely high precision, but some pixels may be inactive. The spots will not be
recorded on pictures on a card.
399
SQW0550
Others
Usage cautions and notes
Lens
●●Do not press the lens with excessive force.
●●Images may appear slightly white if lens is dirty (fingerprints, etc.). Turn the camera on,
hold the extracted lens barrel with your fingers, and gently wipe the lens surface with a
soft, dry cloth.
●●Do not leave the camera with the lens facing the sun as rays of light from the sun may
cause it to malfunction. Also, be careful when placing the camera outside or near a
window.
●●Do not touch the lens barrier, as this may damage the lens. Be careful when removing
camera from bag, etc.
Battery
The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.
This battery is easily affected by temperature and humidity, and is affected more when the
temperature is high or low.
●●The time required for charging varies depending on conditions of battery usage.
Charging takes longer at high or low temperatures and when the battery has not been
used in some time.
●●Battery will be warm during charging and for some time thereafter.
●●Battery will run out if not used for long periods of time, even after being charged.
●●Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug.
Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the
resulting heat generated.
●●Frequently charging up battery is not recommended.
(Frequently charging battery reduces maximum usage time and can cause battery to
expand.)
●●If available battery power is significantly reduced, battery is reaching end of lifespan.
Please purchase a new battery.
●●When charging:
••Wipe dirt from the battery terminal with a dry cloth.
••Keep at least 1 m (3.3 feet) away from AM radio (may cause radio interference).
●●Do not use a damaged or dented battery (especially connectors), e.g. by dropping (can
cause faults).
400
SQW0550
Others
Usage cautions and notes
AC adaptor (supplied)
●●Keep at least 1 m (3.3 feet) away from AM radio (may cause radio interference).
●●The AC adaptor (supplied) may generate whirring sounds when it is being used. This is
not a malfunction.
●●After use, be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet. (A
very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)
Memory cards
●●To prevent damage to cards and data
••Avoid high temperatures, direct sunlight, electromagnetic waves, and static electricity.
••Do not bend, drop, or expose to strong impacts.
••Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or
carrying the card.
••Do not touch terminals on reverse of card or allow them to become dirty or wet.
●●Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate
handling. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded
data.
●●When disposing of/transferring memory cards
••If using the “format” or “delete” functions on your camera or computer, this only
changes the file management information, and does not completely delete the data
from within the memory card. When disposing of or transferring your memory cards,
we recommend physically destroying them, or using commercially available computer
data erasing software to completely delete the data from the card. Data within
memory cards should be managed responsibly.
When using a tripod or unipod
●●Do not apply excessive force or tighten screws when they are crooked. (This may
damage the camera, screw hole, or label.)
●●Ensure that the tripod is stable. (Refer to the tripod instructions.)
●●You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or unipod.
401
SQW0550
Others
Usage cautions and notes
Personal Information
To protect personal information, we recommend that you set a Wi-Fi password or a Wi-Fi
function lock. (→344, 345)
If names or birthdays are set in [Profile Setup] or in the [Face Recog.] function, keep in
mind that the camera and recorded pictures will contain personal information.
Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, likeness rights, etc. of a subject and
take your own responsibility when you use the [Silent Mode], or use functions such
as writing the location information and changing the shutter noise, etc.
●●Disclaimer
••Data containing personal information can be altered or lost due to malfunction, static
electricity, accidents, breakdowns, repairs, or other operations.
Panasonic will not be liable for any damage that occurs, direct or indirect, as a result
of the alteration or loss of data containing personal information.
●●When ordering repairs or transferring/disposing of the camera
••After you make a note of the personal information, perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings]/
[Delete account] to delete data containing personal information such as wireless LAN
connection settings that you registered or set in this unit. (→86, 336)
••To protect your personal information, please reset the settings. (→86)
••Remove the memory card from the camera.
••When ordering repairs, settings may be returned to the initial purchase state.
••If the above operations cannot be performed because of a camera malfunction,
consult with the dealer or nearest Service Centre.
●●When transferring or disposing of your memory card, see “When disposing of/
transferring memory cards” in the previous section. (→401)
●●Uploading pictures to WEB services
••Pictures may contain personal information that can be used to identify the user, such
as titles, recording dates and times, and location information. Before uploading the
pictures to WEB services, check the pictures carefully for information that should not
be disclosed.
402
SQW0550
Others
Usage cautions and notes
Wi-Fi function
■■Use the camera as a wireless LAN device
When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than
wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety
designs and defects for the systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility
for any damage that arises when using the camera for any purpose other than as a
wireless LAN device.
■■Use of the Wi-Fi function of this camera is presumed to be in countries where
this camera is sold
There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in countries
other than those where this camera is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for
any violations.
■■There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted
Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted by a third party. We strongly recommend that you enable encryption in the
settings of your wireless access point to ensure information security.
■■Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or
interference
••Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference,
such as near microwave ovens. Radio waves may not reach the camera.
••Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones
that use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both
devices.
■■Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorised to use
When the camera utilises its Wi-Fi function, wireless networks will be searched
automatically. When this happens, wireless networks that you are not authorised to use
(SSID*) may be displayed, however do not attempt to connect to the network as it may
be considered as unauthorised access.
*SSID refers to the name that is used to identify a network over a wireless LAN connection. If the
SSID matches for both devices, transmission is possible.
403
SQW0550
Others
Usage cautions and notes
●●SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
●●The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other
countries.
●●HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
●●“AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive” logo are trademarks of
Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.
●●Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
●●Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
●●Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
●●Windows is either registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
●●iMovie, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
●●iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
●●App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
●●Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
●●The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
●●The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
●●“Wi-Fi®” and “Wi-Fi Direct®” are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
●●“Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™”, and “WPA2™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
●●DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks, service marks, or certification
marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.
●●QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
●●This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware Corporation. DynaFont is a registered
trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc.
●●Other names, company names, and product names mentioned in these instructions are
trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.
404
SQW0550
Others
Usage cautions and notes
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of a consumer
or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in compliance with
the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer
engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC
Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be
obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com
405
SQW0550
Others
Usage cautions and notes
This product incorporates the following software:
(1)the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation,
(2)the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic Corporation, and/or
(3)open source software
The software categorised as (3) is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Please refer to the detailed terms and conditions thereof displayed by selecting
[MENU/SET] → [Setup] → [Version Disp.] → [Software info].
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying
documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries
must not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used
batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance
with your national legislation.
By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources
and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the
environment.
For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your
local municipality.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in
accordance with national legislation.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this
case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical
involved.
406
SQW0550
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising